Operator’s Guide
Version 3.1 R3
MAN007
MAN007-0211, February, 2011
Version 3.1 R3, Revision A
Copyright© 2011 Hirsch Electronics LLC. All rights reserved. ScramblePad® and ScrambleProx® are registered trademarks of
Hirsch Electronics. DIGI*TRAC™, MATCH™, ScrambleCard™, SCRAMBLE*NET™ (abbreviated S*NET), X*NET, and Velocity™ are
all trademarks of Hirsch Electronics.
Microsoft, MS and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows and Windows XP are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Velocity systems are suitable for use over private (intranet) and public (internet) data networks when configured to use an
encryption method including an Authentication Header and an algorithm capable of Triple-DES or better that is NIST certified. The encryption must be provided using Listed (NWGQ) Lantronix Model SecureBox SDS1100 encryption modules and
Listed (EPBU) Ever Glow Electronic Co., Ltd., Model DCU120030 plug-in transformers.
The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) has awarded the Velocity 3.0 AES Certificate #281.
Hirsch Electronics
1900-B Carnegie Avenue
Santa Ana, CA 92705-5520
Phone: 949-250-8888 or 888-809-8880 (toll-free)
Fax:
949-250-7372
Web: www.HirschElectronics.com
Getting Help
If you encounter a problem that is not discussed in this guide and you need technical
support, do the following:
1.
2.
Contact your local dealer or the provider of this product.
If your dealer is not available, contact Hirsch Technical Support directly. This can be
done in a number of ways:
Mail:
Hirsch Electronics
1900-B Carnegie Avenue
Santa Ana, CA 92705-5520
Attn: Technical Services
Phone:
877-HIRSCHX (877-447-7249) toll-free
Fax:
(949) 250-7362
Email:
[email protected]
WWW:
www.HirschElectronics.com
Whenever you call your local dealer or Hirsch, be sure to have your registration
material, serial number and software version number available.
For future reference, record these numbers here.
Serial Number: _________________________________
Version Number: ________________________________
Dealer: ________________________________________
Dealer Phone #: ________________________________
CCM Rev/Version #: _____________________________
UL Requirements
The following UL issues are addressed here:
GENERAL
1.
2.
UL terms that are applicable to this application can be found “Glossary” on page 283 of the
Velocity Operators Guide (MAN007).
The UL Listed Velocity System is comprised of the following: Central Supervisory Station,
XBox, M1N, M2, M8, M16, DS37LH, DS47L, DS47L-HI, DS47L-SPX, Power Limitation Board,
PS2, DTLM1, DTLM2, DTLM3, MELM1, MELM2, and MELM3. The M2, M8, and M16 may
employ the following expansion boards: MEB/BE, AEB8, REB8, and SNIB.
VELOCITY
1.
2.
3.
4.
If Alarm Priority levels are assigned by user, then priority must be assigned as follows for UL
applications:
a. Fire alarm and industrial supervision where a risk of injury to persons, or damage or
destruction of property may be involved.
b. Hold-up or panic alarm.
c. Burglar alarm.
d. Watchman tour.
e. Fire-alarm supervision.
f. Burglar-alarm supervision.
g. Industrial supervision where a risk of injury to persons, or damage or destruction of
property will not be involved.
h. Other supervisory services.
Items (b) and (c) may have equal priority. Items (e) and (f) may have equal priority. Items
(g) and (h) may have equal priority.
Alarm Stacking feature is not to be used for UL applications.
Return to Normal feature is not to be used for UL applications.
Video capability of Velocity 3.1 software has not been evaluated by UL.
CENTRAL SUPERVISORY STATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
See the introduction to the Velocity Installation Guide (MAN004) for the minimum
hardware and software requirements of the central supervisory station equipment.
The data processing equipment and office appliance equipment used as central supervisory
station equipment shall be Listed under Office Appliances and Business Equipment (UL
114) or Information Processing and Business Equipment (UL 478) or Information
Technology Equipment (UL 60950).
Instructions for switching over from the primary Velocity workstation to a backup computer
are provided in the Redundant Server Configuration Guide (MAN009).
A redundant server configuration must be employed where the servers and workstations are
networked via a dedicated Ethernet LAN. The network interfaces the protected premise
units through an XBox.
The Map Builder function must be employed to display the state and condition of all alarm
points of the system.
A “panel logged off” event may be a compromise attempt on the system.
Supply line transient protection complying with the Standard for Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors, UL 1449, with a maximum marked rating of 330 V shall be used on Central
Monitoring Station Equipment.
If the XBox is not installed in the Central Monitoring Station, signal line transient protection
complying with the Standard for Protectors for Data communications and Fire Alarm Circuits
(UL 497B) with maximum marked rating of 50 V shall be used on communication circuits
extending beyond 25 feet from the computing systems.
The Central Monitoring Station Equipment shall be installed in a temperature-controlled
environment. A temperature-controlled environment is defined as one that can be
maintained between 13–35°C (55–95°F) by the HVAC system. Twenty-four hours of
standby power shall be provided for the HVAC system. The standby power for the HVAC
system may be supplied by an engine-driven generator alone. A standby battery is not
required to be used.
10. In addition to the main power supply and secondary power supply that are required to be
provided at the central supervisory station, the system shall be provided with an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with sufficent capacity to operate the computer
equipment for a minimum of 15 minutes. If more than 15 minutes is required for
secondary power supply to supply the UPS input power, the UPS shall be capable of
providing input power for a least that amount of time.
11. The UPS shall comply with the Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment (UL
1778) or the Standard for Fire Protective signaling Devices (UL 1481).
12. In order to perform maintenance and repair service, a means for disconnecting the input to
the UPS while maintaining continuity of power to the automation system shall be provided.
13. The alarm system’s network settings shall be designed such that the maximum time lapse
from the initiation of an initiating device circuit until it is annunciated at the central
supervising station shall not exceed 90 seconds.
14. The alarm system’s network settings shall be designed such that the maximum time for the
central supervising station to annunciate a single break, single ground, wire-to-wire short,
loss of signal, or any combination of these shall not exceed 200 seconds.
15. The alarm system configuration shall be designed such that the number of signals on a
single channel shall be limited to 1000.
XBOX
1.
XBox configuration and installation are addressed in ,“XBox Installation,” of the Hirsch
DIGI*TRAC Design and Installation Guide (MAN001).
2.
UL has not verified the XBox hookup for a remote dialup controller or the modem
loop configuration.
3.
4.
5.
The alarm relay contact is rated 24 VDC, 2 A, resistive.
Wiring to the RS-232 circuit is limited to the same room (50 feet).
Shielded cable must be used on the RS-232 circuit.
M1N
1.
2.
3.
Input rating of the M1N is 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 500 mA.
The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive.
The M1N shall not employ a secondary battery.
M2
1.
2.
UL has verified compatibility of the Hirsch DS37L, DS37LH, DS47L, DS47L-HI, DS47L-SPX,
and DS47L-HI-SPX with the M2.
The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive.
M8
1.
2.
UL has verified compatibility of the Hirsch DS37L, DS37LH, DS47L, DS47L-HI, DS47L-SPX,
and DS47L-HI-SPX with the M8.
The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive.
M16
1.
2.
3.
Input rating of the M16 is 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1A.
UL has verified compatibility of the Hirsch DS47L-SPX with the M16.
The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive.
MAN007-0211
Contents
Getting Help ............................................................................................................ ........................ iii
UL Requirements .................................................................................................... .........................iv
Introduction.............................................................................................................................. 1
Who Should Read This... ........................................................................................ ..........................2
Getting Started......................................................................................................... ..........................3
Preliminaries ...............................................................................................................................3
Starting Velocity .........................................................................................................................3
Exiting Velocity ..........................................................................................................................4
Velocity Main Menu................................................................................................ ..........................5
Velocity Administration Main Screen ........................................................................................6
System Tree Window (System Tree Pane) ..............................................................................6
Expanding and Contracting the System Tree ......................................................................7
Velocity Configuration Folder.............................................................................................8
DIGI*TRAC Configuration Folder ...................................................................................10
Interfaces Configuration Folder.........................................................................................13
Components Window (Components Pane) ............................................................................14
Velocity Icon Tool Bar .............................................................................................................15
Velocity Menu Bar....................................................................................................................17
File Options ............................................................................................................................18
Console Options .....................................................................................................................19
Window Options ....................................................................................................................19
Add-Ins Options .....................................................................................................................20
Help Options ..........................................................................................................................21
Help Topics........................................................................................................................21
Velocity Hot Keys.....................................................................................................................22
Status Line.................................................................................................................................23
Off Normal Points ..................................................................................................................24
System Icons .............................................................................................................................24
Navigating Velocity................................................................................................. ........................26
Navigating Between Modules...................................................................................................26
Using the Mouse and Keyboard................................................................................................26
Mouse Functions ....................................................................................................................26
Keyboard Functions ...............................................................................................................26
Using Velocity Fields and Tools...............................................................................................27
Switching Operators..................................................................................................................28
Locking Workstations ...............................................................................................................29
Managing Desktop Space........................................................................................ ........................30
Managing Velocity Windows ...................................................................................................30
Column Management................................................................................................................31
Sorting By Column Header ....................................................................................................33
Rearranging Column Headers ................................................................................................33
Resizing Columns and Panes .................................................................................................34
Using Velocity Programs......................................................................................... ........................35
Advice for Operators.................................................................................................................36
vii
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Alarm Viewer ......................................................................................................................... 39
Starting Alarm Viewer ............................................................................................ ........................ 40
Alarm Viewer Main Screen .................................................................................... ........................ 41
Icon Bar .................................................................................................................................... 42
Alarm Viewer Columns............................................................................................................ 42
Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity Desktop ..................................................... ........................ 45
How To Use Alarm Viewer..................................................................................... ........................ 46
Acknowledging an Alarm......................................................................................................... 46
Acknowledging All Alarms...................................................................................................... 46
Clearing an Alarm .................................................................................................................... 47
Clearing All Alarms ................................................................................................................. 47
Displaying a Credential ............................................................................................................ 47
Copying to Clipboard ............................................................................................................... 48
Operator Notes.......................................................................................................................... 48
Replaying a WAV File ............................................................................................................. 50
Playing DVR Video.................................................................................................................. 50
Get Recorded Alarm Video ...................................................................................................... 50
Viewing Instructions for an Alarm........................................................................................... 51
Viewing a Map for an Alarm.................................................................................................... 51
Refresh Alarms on the Alarm Viewer ...................................................................................... 51
Closing Alarm Viewer ............................................................................................ ........................ 52
Status Viewer.......................................................................................................................... 53
Status Viewer Main Screen..................................................................................... ........................ 54
Status Window Columns .......................................................................................................... 55
Status Viewer: How to Use ..................................................................................... ........................ 60
Status Viewer Right-Click Options .......................................................................................... 60
Creating Status Groups ........................................................................................... ........................ 62
Status Groups Page................................................................................................................... 63
Column Headers Page ........................................................................................................... 64
Status Messages........................................................................................................................ 65
Graphics Designer.................................................................................................................. 67
Displaying a Drawing ............................................................................................. ........................ 68
Switching between Drawings ................................................................................................... 68
Panning Drawings................................................................................................... ........................ 69
Viewing Linked Maps............................................................................................. ........................ 70
Monitoring Placed Objects ..................................................................................... ........................ 71
Controlling Placed Objects ..................................................................................... ........................ 75
Acknowledging/Clearing Alarms............................................................................................. 76
Suspending Alarm Switching ................................................................................................... 79
Executing Command Sets....................................................................................... ........................ 81
Show Credential Information ................................................................................. ........................ 82
Enrollment Manager.............................................................................................................. 83
Opening Enrollment Manager ................................................................................ ........................ 84
Enrollment Manager Main Screen.......................................................................... ........................ 85
Enrollment Manager Menu Bar................................................................................................ 87
People Tree Pane ...................................................................................................................... 89
Person Group Subfolders.......................................................................................................... 90
viii
MAN007-0211
Personal Information Pane ........................................................................................................90
General Property Sheet ..........................................................................................................91
TAB1 - TAB10 Property Sheets ............................................................................................93
Groups Property Sheet ...........................................................................................................93
Additional Images Property Sheet .........................................................................................94
Personal Information Form .......................................................................................................95
Enrolling a New Person........................................................................................... ........................97
Editing Multiple Persons...........................................................................................................98
Person Templates ......................................................................................................................99
Assigning a Credential to a Person .........................................................................................101
Assigning an Existing Credential to a Person ......................................................................101
Assigning a Person to an Existing Credential ......................................................................103
Assigning a New Credential to a Person..............................................................................103
Assigning a Credential Template to a Person ......................................................................104
Unassigning Credentials.......................................................................................................104
Downloading Credentials.....................................................................................................104
Downloading Multiple Credentials ......................................................................................105
Finding a Person...................................................................................................... ......................106
Search Groups .........................................................................................................................107
Search Groups Screen ..........................................................................................................108
Finding a Card Credential .......................................................................................................110
Search Filters...........................................................................................................................112
Person Filters...........................................................................................................................112
Quick Find...............................................................................................................................113
Wildcard Symbols................................................................................................................114
Multiple People Selection ....................................................................................... ......................115
Displaying Credentials for Multiple Persons ..........................................................................115
Modifying an Existing Person................................................................................. ......................117
Modifying Existing Credentials for a Person..........................................................................118
Deleting Persons .....................................................................................................................118
Person Groups ......................................................................................................... ......................120
Adding People to Person Groups ............................................................................................121
Batch Enroll Card Credentials ................................................................................................123
Capturing a Signature.............................................................................................. ......................126
Capturing a Photo.................................................................................................... ......................128
Video Capture ......................................................................................................................129
Video Dialog Box ............................................................................................................130
TWAIN Capture...................................................................................................................131
TWAIN Setup Dialog Box ..............................................................................................131
File Capture ..........................................................................................................................133
Image Preview......................................................................................................................133
Image Preview Dialog Box..............................................................................................134
Additional Images ...................................................................................................................136
E-mailing a Photo.................................................................................................................137
Saving a Photo to Another Source .......................................................................................138
Scanning Enrollment Data ......................................................................................................139
Previewing a Badge................................................................................................. ......................142
Print Preview Screen ...............................................................................................................142
Printing a Badge ...................................................................................................... ......................144
ix
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Badge Print Status .................................................................................................................. 144
Double-Sided Badge Printing................................................................................................. 145
Credentials .............................................................................................................. ...................... 146
How to Define Credentials ..................................................................................................... 147
Credential Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................... 147
General Property Sheet........................................................................................................ 148
Function Property Sheet ...................................................................................................... 152
Limits Property Sheet .......................................................................................................... 153
Options Property Sheet........................................................................................................ 156
Define Function Dialog Box................................................................................................ 158
Credential Biometrics Properties Sheet............................................................................... 159
Writing Fingerprint Data to a Credential ........................................................................ 162
ID Formats (IDF)................................................................................................................. 164
Duress Digits ....................................................................................................................... 165
Setting Up Duress Digits................................................................................................. 165
Using Duress Digits With Code Extension Digits .......................................................... 165
Credentials: Set Expiration Date ..................................................................................... 166
Credentials: Link to Template ............................................................................................. 167
Credentials: Concatenating UDFs ....................................................................................... 168
Credentials: Reissue ............................................................................................................ 169
Credential Tasks ..................................................................................................................... 169
Display Credential Information ........................................................................................... 172
Absentee Limiting ............................................................................................................... 172
Use Limiting ........................................................................................................................ 173
Day Limiting........................................................................................................................ 173
Executive Passback Override .............................................................................................. 173
Forgiving Passback.............................................................................................................. 174
Forgiving Users ................................................................................................................... 174
Alert ..................................................................................................................................... 174
Tagging................................................................................................................................ 175
Auto-Delete ......................................................................................................................... 175
Report Manager ................................................................................................................... 177
Opening Report Manager ....................................................................................... ...................... 179
Report Manager Main Screen................................................................................. ...................... 180
Report Manager: Menu Bar.................................................................................................... 181
Report Manager: Icon Tool Bar ............................................................................................. 182
Creating a Report.................................................................................................... ...................... 183
Add a New Report .................................................................................................................. 183
List of Existing Reports.......................................................................................................... 184
Customizing an Existing Report............................................................................. ...................... 190
Criteria Page ........................................................................................................................... 193
Sorting Page............................................................................................................................ 195
Selected Criteria List Pane ..................................................................................................... 196
Saving Custom Reports .......................................................................................................... 197
Previewing a Report................................................................................................ ...................... 198
Report Preview Screen ........................................................................................................... 198
Preview Screen Features...................................................................................................... 200
Printing Reports ...................................................................................................... ...................... 202
x
MAN007-0211
Access & Control Functions................................................................................................ 203
Access Functions..................................................................................................... ......................206
Access Functions: Momentary Access ...................................................................................206
Access Functions: Unlock a Door...........................................................................................207
Access Functions: Relock a Door ...........................................................................................207
Access Functions: Extended Access .......................................................................................207
Alarm Functions...................................................................................................... ......................208
Alarm Functions: Momentary Door Masking.........................................................................210
Alarm Functions: Momentary Input Masking ........................................................................210
Alarm Functions: Masking Doors...........................................................................................210
Alarm Functions: Masking Inputs...........................................................................................211
Alarm Functions: Unmasking Doors ......................................................................................211
Alarm Functions: Unmasking Inputs ......................................................................................211
Control Functions.................................................................................................... ......................212
Control Functions: Triggering Doors and Relays ...................................................................213
Control Functions: Lock Open for a Door ..............................................................................214
Control Functions: Lock Open for a Relay .............................................................................214
Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Door.................................................................214
Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Relay ...............................................................215
Control Functions: Lock Down a Relay .................................................................................215
Control Functions: Lock Down a Door...................................................................................216
Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Door ...............................................................216
Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Relay ..............................................................216
Control Functions: Force On Doors........................................................................................217
Control Functions: Force On Relays.......................................................................................217
Control Functions: Force On Release for a Door ...................................................................217
Control Functions: Force On Release for a Relay ..................................................................218
Control Functions: Force Off a Door ......................................................................................218
Control Functions: Force Off a Relay.....................................................................................218
Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Door...................................................................219
Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Relay..................................................................219
Password Functions................................................................................................. ......................220
Special Functions .................................................................................................... ......................221
Indexed Command: Clear Code Tamper ................................................................................224
Indexed Command: Count Users Other Side ..........................................................................224
Indexed Command: Count Users This Side............................................................................225
Indexed Command: Forgive All Users ...................................................................................226
Indexed Command: Manual Holiday Tables ..........................................................................226
Indexed Command: Manual Unholiday Tables ......................................................................227
Function Priority Levels..........................................................................................................227
Time Zone Control of Relays..................................................................................................228
CCTV Viewer ....................................................................................................................... 231
CCTV Viewer.......................................................................................................... ......................232
CCTV Viewer Functions ......................................................................................... ......................235
Pan-Tilt....................................................................................................................................235
Zoom Mode.............................................................................................................................235
Focus Mode.............................................................................................................................235
Iris Mode ................................................................................................................................235
xi
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Auto Pan ................................................................................................................................. 235
DVR/NVR Operation........................................................................................................... 237
Operating the DVR ................................................................................................. ...................... 238
Addressing the DVR/NVR and Attached Cameras................................................................ 238
Addressing a DVR/NVR Camera Directly............................................................................. 239
Viewing DVR/NVR Video From Attached Cameras ............................................................ 240
Viewing Camera Video ....................................................................................................... 240
Live View ............................................................................................................................ 240
Live Video Screen........................................................................................................... 241
Video Explorer .................................................................................................................... 243
Search & Retrieve Recorded Video ....................................................................................... 245
Play & Export Local Video .................................................................................................... 246
Play Video Window............................................................................................................. 247
Menu Tool Bar ................................................................................................................ 248
Location Indicators.......................................................................................................... 249
Control Buttons & Speed Slider...................................................................................... 249
Start & End Time Fields.................................................................................................. 249
Navigation Buttons.......................................................................................................... 250
Image Tools..................................................................................................................... 250
Export DVR/NVR Video ....................................................................................................... 252
Generate and Stop Host Alarm............................................................................................... 252
Get Alarm List........................................................................................................................ 253
Get Motion Events List .......................................................................................................... 256
Time Synchronization ............................................................................................................ 258
Drag & Drop Camera Views .................................................................................................. 258
Drag & Drop with Live View.............................................................................................. 258
Drag & Drop with Video Explorer ...................................................................................... 259
DVR/NVR View Groups........................................................................................................ 259
Camera Control ...................................................................................................................... 260
PTZ Camera Controls.......................................................................................................... 263
All Video Events..................................................................................................... ...................... 265
Event History Viewer.............................................................................................. ...................... 268
Generating History Logs ........................................................................................................ 268
Customizing DVR/NVR Logs................................................................................................ 269
Event List Functions............................................................................................................... 271
Who’s Inside ......................................................................................................................... 273
How To Use Who’s Inside ...................................................................................... ...................... 274
Who's Inside Screen ............................................................................................................... 275
Who's Inside: Forgiving Credentials ...................................................................................... 277
Who's Inside: Reassigning Credentials to Another Zone ....................................................... 278
Velocity Learning Center .................................................................................................... 279
Opening the Learning Center.................................................................................. ...................... 280
Learning Center Main Screen................................................................................. ...................... 280
How to Use the Learning Center ............................................................................ ...................... 281
Closing Learning Center......................................................................................... ...................... 281
Glossary .................................................................................................................. ...................... 283
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 319
xii
MAN007-0211
Introduction
Velocity© Version 3.1 is the latest version of the Hirsch Electronics security access
program that simplifies the task of controlling and monitoring access to any surveillance
system, no matter how large or small it is.
Velocity provides the kind of functionality you normally only expect from high-end
programs with the ease-of-use of an entry-level system.
Features you'll find in Velocity include:








Easy-to-use graphical interface
Intuitive operation
Choice of controller networks (hardwired, dial-up, or networked)
Centralized monitoring and control
Real-time alarm and event monitoring
Interactive maps with alarm, status, and control
Dozens of standard reports
Quick and easy badge and graphics creation
1
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Who Should Read This...
If you are an administrator or configurator, tasked with the job of setting up and
administering this Velocity system, continue with the Velocity Administrators Guide.
If you are an operator involved in the day-to-day processes of enrolling badge holders,
monitoring security, and generating reports, refer to the Velocity Operators Guide.
2
Who Should Read This...
MAN007-0211
Getting Started
Preliminaries
If you are running Velocity Server or Velocity Workstation, the run-time version of SQL
Server 2005 (SQL Server 2005 Express) is automatically started every time you start
Windows. Service Control Manager (SCM) loads automatically every time you start
Windows.

If you are running Velocity Server or Velocity Workstation, the run-time
version of SQL Server 2005 (SQL Server 2005 Express) is automatically
started every time you start Windows. Service Control Manager (SCM)
loads automatically every time you start Windows.
You can tell whether SQL is running by looking at the
icon located in the system
tray in the lower right hand corner. You can start and/or stop DIGI*TRAC Network
Service (DTNS), Security Domain Service (SDS), Velocity Extension Service, and CCTV
Service from this manager.
Starting Velocity
To start Velocity:


If, during Velocity installation, you checked the box that put the Velocity shortcut on
your Windows desktop, then double click the
icon.
If the Velocity shortcut icon does not appear on your Windows desktop, at the Start
menu on the Windows 2000 desktop, select Programs > Hirsch Electronics
Velocity > Velocity.
The Velocity splash screen appears.
This screen disappears after a few seconds and the main Velocity screen appears.
To modify the text that appears on this splash screen, refer to the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
You can make starting Velocity even easier by moving Velocity to your desktop. While
you have the choice to place the shortcut during Velocity installation, you can create a
shortcut later using the following procedure.
To create a shortcut for Velocity on your desktop:
1.
2.
From the Windows desktop, select Start > Programs > Hirsch Electronics
Velocity.
Right click on Velocity.
A list of options pop up.
3.
Select Send to > Desktop (create shortcut).
The Velocity icon appears on your desktop as a shortcut,
.
Once the Velocity icon is on your desktop, you only need to double click the icon to
start Velocity.
Getting Started
3
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Exiting Velocity
To exit Velocity:
Do one of the following:



4
Select File > Exit from the Velocity menu bar
Click the Exit button,
, in the upper right hand corner
From Velocity, press Alt + F4.
Getting Started
MAN007-0211
Velocity Main Menu
When you open Velocity, a main screen like the following example appears:
This screen is divided into four main sections.
Menu tool bar
This is the main menu providing pull-down option lists for such
features as selecting different Velocity program modules (Console
option), quitting the program (File option), adding programs
(Add-Ins), consulting help, and selecting windows within the
program (Window option).
The program modules accessed through the Console option are
also accessible through the Icon Tool Bar.
Icon Tool Bar
The icon bar enables the Velocity user to click and open any of the
Velocity modules. The most frequently used modules, such as the
Enrollment Manager and the Event Viewer, are displayed on the
left side of this bar.
The less frequently used functions, like the Badge Designer and
the SQL Manager, are grouped on the right end of this bar.
Main window
This is the space within which the Velocity modules appear,
including the Administration window.
If docked, Velocity modules cannot be dragged beyond its border.
For more on this, refer to “Managing Velocity Windows” on page
30.
Status Line
Contains information about the operator currently logged on, the
current number of alarms, the current threat level as well as date
and time.
For more on this, refer to page 23.
Velocity Main Menu
5
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Administration window is nested within the main window and appears once you
press F2 or select Administration from the Console option list. For more on this, refer
to “Velocity Administration Main Screen” starting on page 6.
Velocity Administration Main Screen
The Administration main screen is normally nested within the confines of the main
menu and looks like this example:
The Administration main screen contains the:



System Tree window (see page 6)
Components window (see page 14)
The term ‘window’ is used interchangeably with pane in this guide. Both
terms refer to an area within a larger screen where data or options are
displayed. For example, you will find references to both 'System Tree pane'
and 'System Tree window'. They are the same entity.
Use the Velocity Administration main screen to:





Add components to the system
Configure components
Delete or copy components
Specify a particular task to be performed by the current system (Task option)
View the current system from two perspectives (View option)
Both the DIGI*TRAC Configuration and Interfaces Configuration folders include the
computer name for each Velocity server/client included in this system, as shown in the
previous example. There should be a separate DIGI*TRAC Configuration and Interfaces
Configuration folder for the Velocity server and each defined client.
The Administration window is only available to operators who are members of the
administrator's role.
Hint
Most Velocity operators won't need to access the administrator's window. Their job
is to monitor the system and identify possible problems. Only administrators
responsible for configuring the system should be granted access to this screen.
System Tree Window (System Tree Pane)
The System Tree pane is located on the left side of the Velocity Administration main
screen and provides a hierarchical display of basic Velocity system components.
There are three main tree branches or folders:
 Velocity Configuration
6
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
DIGI*TRAC Configuration
Interfaces Configuration
These three branches and subsidiary files are shown in the following example:


Notice that each DIGI*TRAC Configuration and Interfaces Configuration folder is
followed by the workstation ID. Each Velocity server/client defined for this system
should have a separate entry here.
Each folder is described briefly in the following subsections. More detailed descriptions
are available for each configuration topic in the following sections:



The Velocity Configuration folder and its uses is outlined in “Velocity Configuration”
starting on page 215.
The DIGI*TRAC Configuration folder and its uses is outlined in “Hardware
Configuration” starting on page 57.
The Interfaces Configuration folder and its uses is outlined in “Interfaces
Configuration” on page 343.
Expanding and Contracting the System Tree
Here are instructions on expanding and contracting the system tree:
To expand a folder:
To contract one or more folders:
Click on the
Click on the
sign.
sign.
Double click the folder.
Double click the expanded folder.
Select and press the right arrow
key.
Select the expanded folder and press the left
arrow key.
Select and press Enter.
Select and press Enter.
Tree elements can consist of several different component types. Each element is
associated with an icon. These icons are described briefly in System Icons.
Velocity Main Menu
7
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
An example of a fully expanded system tree is shown below:
Notice that the relationship of top-level folders to second-level folders is indicated by
dotted lines running between them. This not only establishes the relationship between
them but also the dominant and subordinate nature of the relationship. As you click
each plus mark to reveal the levels beneath it, the tree can expand to display any
number of nested levels.
You can display the components of a selected folder in the Components window.
To display a selected folder:

From the System Tree window, double click the element you want to display. The
element you selected appears in the Components window.
Velocity Configuration Folder
One of the three major folders of the Configuration Tree is Velocity Configuration. This
folder provides all the information an operator requires to define the non-hardware
elements of this system.
An example of the Velocity Configuration folder tree is shown below:
8
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
The subfolders comprising the Velocity Administration folder are:
This
Folder:
Defines:
Person
Templates
A group of values that can be applied to a person during
enrollment that can expedite the entering of values into the
Enrollment Manager Personal Information Form. For more on this,
refer to “Person Templates” on page 283 in the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Credential
Templates
Most field values for card or code holder credentials. Filling out all
credential fields for each card or code holder is time-consuming
and repetitive.
To save time, use a credential template to preset many of the
fields in a template, then only customize a few remaining fields to
individualize the credential, as required, in Enrollment Manager. For
more on this, refer to “Credential Templates” starting on page 228
in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Time Zones
All time zones defined for this system. This includes three possible
types of time zones: standard, master, and grand master time
zones. For more on this, refer to “Time Zones” starting on page
313 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Holidays
Holidays recognized by this system. For more on this, refer to
“Holidays” starting on page 330 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s
Guide.
Door Groups
All door groups associated with this system. A door group
associates one or more readers/ keypads with one or more time
zones.
A master door group associates several door groups. For more on
this, refer to “Door Groups” starting on page 257 in the Velocity
3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Velocity Main Menu
Function
Groups
Access and control functions are performed whenever an
extension digit is entered along with the normal PIN. For more on
this, refer to “Function Groups” starting on page 265 in the Velocity
3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Roles
The tasks and forms an operator can access and use. It also
specifies which events and alarms are routed to them. For more on
this, refer to “Roles” on page 285 in the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Operators
All system operators recognized by the system. A system operator
is any person who can use Velocity to monitor or configure the
system. For more on this, refer to “Operators” starting on page 275
in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
9
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
This
Folder:
Defines:
Command
Sets
One or more DIGI*TRAC commands that can be batched and
triggered by any function you select, such as access to a drug
pantry or control to a control zone. For more on this, refer to
“Command Sets” starting on page 216 in the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Workstations
All workstations currently defined for this system. The available
workstations are displayed on the Velocity server automatically. For
more on this, refer to “Workstations” starting on page 334 in the
Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Alarm
Responses
A list of operator notes that can be entered quickly in Alarm Viewer.
For more on this, refer to “Alarm Responses” on page 337 in the
Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Threat Levels
A list of available threat levels. You can rename any of these threat
levels as required. For more on this, refer to “Threat Levels” on
page 338 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Card Data
Mappings
Digits in established codes or cards that are mapped to MATCH
code. For more on this, refer to “Card Data Mapping” on page 340
in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
DIGI*TRAC Configuration Folder
The DIGI*TRAC Configuration folder displays all the information an operator requires to
define and configure hardware for the Velocity system.
Each DIGI*TRAC Configuration
folder that appears in the System
Tree pane is identified (in
parenthesis) by the name of the
computer it represents.
The Velocity server computer name follows the folder name in parenthesis. Each
Velocity server defined for this system should possess a separate folder here.
The three sub-folders under DIGI*TRAC Configuration specify the three possible
network protocols Velocity supports:
SNET
Short for SCRAMBLE*NET protocol. This is the proprietary network
protocol used to connect Hirsch controllers to a host PC port. The host
port can use either a serial or TCP/IP connection.
For more on this, refer to “S*NET Systems” starting on page 68.
10
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
XNET
Short for XBox Network protocol. This is the network protocol you
should choose if your host PC is connected to Hirsch controllers through
an intervening XBox. The host port can use either a serial or TCP/IP
connection.
For more on this, refer to “X*NET Systems” starting on page 72.
Dial-Up
This branch enables you to configure one or more controllers connected
to this server by a dial-up modem.
For more on this, refer to “Dial-Up Configuration” starting on page 136.
The structure of the DIGI*TRAC tree depends on the protocol you define above.
The second level folders define the Port. Three types of ports are supported by Velocity:



SNET port—This defines a port used by the host PC to connect directly to one or
more controllers.
XNET port—This defines a port used by the host PC to connect to one or more
controllers via an XBox.
Dial-Up port—This port specifies a modem installed in the host PC that can connect
to and communicate with one or more remote controllers.
The next level indicates the component to which the port is connected:



If this is SNET,
, the controller connected to the SNET port is defined. This
specifies values used to configure the controller.
If this is XNET,
, the XBox is next in line. Define the properties of the XBox
connected to this port. You then add one or more controllers that are connected to
this XBox.
If this is a dial-up connection,
, the dial-up location, connected remotely to the
modem is defined. You then define the remote modem settings and one or more
controllers that are connected to this remote modem.
The lowest level defines the components or devices connected to the controller. These
include:
This Folder:
Defines:
Inputs
Line modules (alarm inputs) connected to this controller.
For more on this, refer to “Inputs” starting on page 179.
Relays
Relays connected to this controller. Locks connect to the
controller via these relays.
For more on this, refer to “Relays” starting on page 168.
Expansion Inputs
Any expansion inputs (installed or uninstalled) connected to
this controller.
For more on this, refer to “Expansion Inputs” starting on page
187.
Expansion Relays
Any expansion relays (installed or virtual outputs) connected
to this controller.
For more on this, refer to “Expansion Relays” starting on page
173.
Velocity Main Menu
11
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
This Folder:
Defines:
Readers
Any reader connected to this controller, including card,
ScramblePad, and biometric readers.
For more on this, refer to “Readers & Keypads” starting on
page 194.
Doors
Doors connected to this controller. A door includes all inputs,
relays, and readers associated with this door.
You can also bundle unbundled inputs, relays, and readers to
form a door. For more on this, refer to “Bundling
Components to Create Doors” starting on page 148.
For more on this, refer to “Doors” starting on page 146.
If SNET is designated, then a final tree structure like this example appears:
If XNET is designated, a tree structure like this example appears:
If the Dial-Up connection is designated, a tree structure like this example appears:
12
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
Interfaces Configuration Folder
The Interface Configuration folder is the third main branch in the system tree pane. It
contains all of the subfolders and components required to install and configure an
attached CCTV system. It also provides support for E-mail writers and serial port writer.
An example of the Interface Configuration fully expanded is shown in the following
example:
The elements of this branch are:
This Folder:
Defines:
CCTV
Closed-circuit TV systems attached to this Velocity system.
For detailed information on configuring and using the CCTV
subsystem functions, refer to “CCTV Configuration” starting
on page 657 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Serial Port Writers
How and when alarms/events are sent to the serial port and
in what format.
For more on this, refer to “Serial Port Writers” starting on page
344 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
E-mail Writers
How to notify qualified operators and administrators by
E-mail when a specified Velocity alarm occurs.
For more on this, refer to “E-mail Writers” starting on page
348 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
XML Writers
How and when to send data in XML form to a specified port
or application.
For more on this, refer to “XML Writers” starting on page 360
of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Message Queue
Writers
How to set up a data output compatible with the Microsoft
Windows message queue.
For more on this, refer to “Message Queue Writers” on page
356 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
DVR/NVR
Configuration and use of one or more DVR or NVR systems
connected to this Velocity network.
For more on this, refer to “Configuring the DVR/NVR” starting
on page 719 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator Guide.
Central Stations
Configuration and monitoring of fire alarm systems.
For more on this, refer to “Central Stations” on page 365 of
the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Velocity Main Menu
13
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
When you select the Interfaces Configuration folder, the Hirsch Trigger Action Manager
appears in the components pane. This is an administrative feature and is detailed in the
Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Components Window (Components Pane)
The Components pane is located to the right of the System Tree window within the
Administration Main Screen. This window displays elements contained within the file
selected in the System Tree window.
For example, if you select the top-level Configuration folder in the System Tree window,
the Components window displays this arrangement of modules:
This window contains not only all the Velocity modules but also the main Velocity
folders (Velocity Configuration, DIGI*TRAC Configuration, and Interfaces Configuration).
Double click any of the components within this window to open the selected module
or, in the case of the three configuration folders, expand the folder to reveal all relevant
sub-folders.
If you select a lower-level folder, such as Velocity Configuration, from either the
System Tree or Components Window, the Components Window displays the contents
of that folder like this example:
This provides a flat view of the system as opposed to the hierarchical view provided by
the System Tree window.
By expanding the folders within the System Tree window, the elements displayed
within the Components window become more specific, gaining greater granularity.
14
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
For example, if you select Holidays from either the System Tree or Components
Window, the Components window displays all holidays currently defined for the
system. In most cases, you will also see a folder at the top of the Components window
entitled Add New... (for example, Add New Holiday). Double click this folder and a
dialog box appears that guides you through the creation of the relevant system
component.
Velocity Icon Tool Bar
The Velocity icon toolbar looks like this:
A single click on one of these icons opens the associated program.
The most commonly used modules are grouped on the left side of the icon bar:
This icon:
Velocity Main Menu
Opens this
program:
This program can also be opened
through the:
Alarm Viewer
main menu bar Console option or by
pressing F8
Event Viewer
main menu bar Console option or by
pressing F7
Enrollment Manager
main menu bar Console option or by
pressing F3
Graphics
main menu bar Console option or by
pressing F6 (Opens Designer in Graphics
mode)
Video Explorer
main menu bar Console option
Report Manager
main menu bar Console option
Status Viewer
main menu bar Console option or by
pressing F9
15
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Less frequently used modules are grouped on the right side of the icon bar:
This
icon:
Opens this program:
This program can also be opened
through the:
Administration Module
main menu bar Console option or by
pressing F2
Customization Manager
main menu bar Console option
Badge & Graphics Designer
main menu bar Console option
(Opens Designer in Badge mode.)
16
SQL Database Manager
main menu bar Console option
Scheduling Agent
main menu bar Console option
CCTV Viewer
main menu bar Console option
Who’s Inside
main menu bar Console option
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
Velocity Menu Bar
The Velocity menu (tool) bar is located at the top left of the main menu screen, just
below the Velocity title bar, and looks like this:
It contains four menu items:
File
This menu item contains these menu options: Import/Export,
Switch Operator, Restart Operating System, Lock Workstation,
Log on as Different Windows User, and Exit.
For more on this option, refer to “File Options” on page 18.
Console
This menu item contains options for accessing Velocity programs as
well as the option to set preferences. These programs include:
Administration, Alarm Viewer, Badge & Graphics Designer, CCTV
Camera Viewer, Customization Manager, Video Explorer, Enrollment
Manager, Event Viewer, Graphics, Report Manager, Status Viewer, SQL
Manager, Scheduling Agent, and Who’s Inside.
For more on using these programs, see “Using Velocity Programs”
starting on page 35.
Notice that several of these programs can be started by pressing one
of the function keys along the top of your keyboard. For example, if
you press the F8 key, the Alarm Viewer appears. See “Velocity Hot
Keys” on page 22 for more on this.
The final option shown in this list is the Preferences... option. This
includes setup options for:
• General
• Network
• Alarm Options
• Printers
• CCTV
For more on this last option, refer to “Setting Velocity Preferences”
starting on page 46.
For more on the Console options, refer to page 18.
Window
This menu item enables the operator to move between open Velocity
modules or to change the patterns in which the open modules are
displayed.
For more on the Window options, refer to page 19.
Velocity Main Menu
Add-Ins
This menu item enables the operator to designate E-mail writers and
server extensions as required by the installation. For more on this,
refer to “Add-Ins Options” on page 20.
Help
This menu item provides on-line help topics, the Diagnostic window,
and additional information about Velocity including Velocity registration
information. For more on the Help options, refer to page 19.
17
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
File Options
The File option includes these options:
Import/
Export
This option includes these five submenu options:
• CCM (Import Only)
• SAM (Import Only)
• Customizations
• Velocity Data Export
• Velocity Data Import
• SNIB2 (Import Only)
For more on the import/export options, see “Import/Export
Wizards” starting on page 381.
Switch
Operator...
Enables you to switch from one operator to another without
exiting Velocity.
For more on this, refer to “Switching Operators” on page 28.
Restart
Operating
System
{Restart}
Select this option to restart the workstation.
Lock
Workstation
Return to the Windows log on screen with all open programs still
running.
This option should only be made available to qualified operators
since restarting the workstation can result in a loss of current data
and make the system vulnerable for the time required to restart.
For more on this, refer to “Locking Workstations” on page 29.
18
Log On as
Different
Windows
User
Select this option to close Velocity and any other programs that
are currently running and return to the Windows log on screen.
Exit
Offers several options for exiting and logging off Velocity.
Note: The Velocity Service Control Manager along with other TSRs remains
open.
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
Console Options
The console options list is accessed from the Velocity main menu bar. It contains a list
of all currently available Velocity programs:
Bring up the programs listed by selecting the program name.
Many of these options can also be activated by pressing a hot key from anywhere
within the Velocity program. Each hot key is displayed to the right of the option. For
example, to open the Event Viewer, press F7 and the Event Viewer appears.
This list also includes the Preferences... option. This important option enables you to
modify or activate components of the Velocity system. You cannot utilize many aspects
of Velocity without first visiting and using this option.
For more on the modules displayed in this list, refer to “Using Velocity Programs”
starting on page 35.
For more on this last option, refer to “Setting Velocity Preferences” starting on page 46.
Window Options
The Velocity menu bar Window option provides one way to bring open Velocity window
to the front.
The standard options above the divider are:
Velocity Main Menu
Cascade
Arrange open windows in an overlapping pattern from top left to
bottom right, where the last used window is top most, bottom right.
Tile
Horizontal
Arrange open windows edge-to-edge in a horizontal line. If enough
screen area is available, all windows are completely visible.
Tile
Vertical
Arrange open windows edge-to-edge in a vertical line. If enough
screen area is available, all windows are completely visible.
Arrange
Icons
Arrange minimized windows in a vertical array. This is particularly
helpful if windows are behind another window.
Reset to
Defaults
Return window arrangement to the Velocity default. This cancels any
modifications to the Velocity windows you have made.
19
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Below the divider is a list of windows that are currently opened as MDI child windows.
There is a check mark next to the active window. Select a window from this list to make
it active. This can be done in one of two ways:


Select the Window option list, then press the number on your keyboard
corresponding to the number that appears before the open window name. For
example, if you want to display the open window designated as 3, press 3 and that
window appears.
Select the Window option list, then either cursor down to the window you want and
press Enter, or click the window you want. The selected window appears.
The windows that appear in this option list are those set to MDI Child. Modules like
Report Manager, Enrollment Manager, and SQL Database Manager are opened as
parent applications (displayed in the Windows desktop tray) and are not shown in the
Window option list.
Add-Ins Options
When you access the Add-Ins option on the Velocity menu tool bar, you see the
following two options:
This option enables you to:
Add-In
Manager
This feature enables a qualified operator to augment Velocity's
feature set with new Velocity functions without waiting for
upgrades or patches.
Server
Extensions
This feature brings up the Server Extensions dialog box. Use this to
configure systems for serial port writer, E-mail writers, DVR reader,
and Central Stations.
Once you have added new features using the Add-In Manager, the Add-Ins option list
increases to include those options, like the following example:
Add-In programs listed as options
In the preceding example, the add-ins External Application Launcher and Velocity
Remote Desktop have been configured. Velocity add-ins are published to the Hirsch
website as they become available from where they can be downloaded and installed
on a Velocity computer. They are also available on CD or diskette upon request.
For more on these functions, refer to “Add-In Manager” starting on page 406.
20
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
Help Options
When you access the Help option list on the Velocity main menu tool bar, you see
these options listed.
These options are:
Help
Topics
View Velocity's on-line help which is the document you are viewing
now.
For more on this, see “Help Topics” on page 21.
Diagnostic
Window
This is an extremely handy tool for diagnosing problems with the
system. It also enables an operator knowledgeable about
DIGI*TRAC commands to configure individual controllers.
For more on the diagnostic window, refer to page 703.
Note: This should only be used for troubleshooting.
Velocity
Learning
Center
Select this option to open the Velocity Learning Center screen.
This screen provides a portal to a number of Velocity documents,
including:
• Release Notes
• Online Help (alternative route)
• System Planning Guide
• Tutorials (alternative route)
Create
System
Report
The Velocity System Report wizard appears. Use this option to create
a report you can E-mail to Hirsch for further evaluation of a
Velocity-related problem. This report lists all relevant aspects of your
Velocity system.
For more on this, refer to “System Report Wizard” on page 1193.
About
Velocity
This dialog box displays information on the current version of
Velocity including the name of the person possessing the license for
this version of Velocity and the product build number.
From this dialog box, you can press the Register button to register
this version, if needed. For more on registering Velocity, refer to the
Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Click OK to return to the main menu.
Help Topics
Once inside Velocity Help, use the Contents, Index, or Search tabs to locate the
specific topic you need.
To display the relevant topic, just double click the entry. There is also a Glossary tab that
provides you with definitions for terms used in the help file.
Velocity Main Menu
21
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
You can also use the numerous links located throughout the document to jump from
one topic to another as needed.
Notice that topics are arranged in sequences (the yellow window above the web
page), so that you can read about related topics simply by clicking the topic in the
Sequence pane or using the Previous
or Next
button to arrive at the topic
you want.
If you don’t see this window, refer to the note box on the Velocity hot keys page (page
22).
To navigate to the last screen you displayed, click the Back button,
.
In addition, you can jump to related topics using the See Also topics list displayed at the
bottom of most pages.
Velocity Hot Keys
If you're an experienced user, you probably like to keep your hands on the keyboard as
much as possible. Velocity enables you to do this through the use of many function
keys and keyboard combinations. A list of these is shown below.
Open Velocity Programs
Administration
F2
Enrollment Manager
F3
Browser
F4
Graphics
F6
Event Viewer
F7
Alarm Viewer
F8
Status Viewer
F9
Of course, the preceding keys only work as long as Velocity is Windows’ current focus.
Exit Screens/Programs
Exit Velocity
Alt + F4
Exit Velocity modules
Alt + F4 from within:
Enrollment Manager, Report Manager, Graphics
Designer, Customization Manager, SQL Manager,
Scheduling Agent, and CCTV Viewer.
It does not work with Administration, Alarm Viewer,
Event Viewer, and Status Viewer.
Exit a dialog box or
prompt
Esc from within dialog box or prompt for:
Enrollment Manager, Report Manager, Customization,
Status Viewer, Scheduling Agent, and CCTV Viewer.
It does not work in Administration, Alarm Viewer,
Event Viewer, Graphics Designer, and SQL Manager.
22
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
Moving/Manipulating Within a Screen/Program
Move one field forward
Tab
Move one field
backward
Shift + Tab
Activate a function
Enter
Move cursor up
Up arrow key
Move cursor down
Down arrow key
Move cursor left
Left arrow key
Move cursor right
Right arrow key
Printing Report
Print the report
Ctrl + P
Badge & Graphic Designer contains a separate set of hot keys. For these, see “Designer
Hot Keys” starting on page 449.
Status Line
The bottom line on the main Velocity screen is the status line.
This line contains the following sections:
This Field:
Displays:
Current User
Current Velocity operator.
Active Alarms
Current number of active alarms.
Double click this icon to bring up the Alarm Viewer screen which
provides details about the active alarms. For more on the Alarm
Viewer, refer to “Alarm Viewer” starting on page 417.
Ack Alarms
Current number of acknowledged alarms.
Double click this icon to bring up the Alarm Viewer screen which
provides details about the acknowledged alarms. For more on the
Alarm Viewer, refer to “Alarm Viewer” starting on page 417.
Off Normal
Current number of off-normal points. This indicates hardware that
has been configured but not yet enabled.
Double click this icon to bring up the Off Normal Points screen. For
more on this, refer to “Off Normal Points” starting on page 24.
Velocity Main Menu
23
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Download
Monitor
Monitors downloads as they occur.
Threat Level
This field indicates the current threat level for the system. If
Velocity detects no threat, the level is 00.
Date
Current date at this computer.
Double click this icon to bring up the Download Monitor screen
which provides details of all downloads occurring at that moment.
For more on this, refer to “Download Monitor” on page 134.
The default format is month/day/year; however, this defaults to
whichever format you specify in Control Panel (Date & Time).
Time
Current time at this computer.
The default format is a 12-hour clock with AM or PM; however, this
defaults to whichever format you specify in Control Panel (Date &
Time).
Off Normal Points
The Off Normal Points dialog box provides a quick list of disabled points.
Two off-normal points
In most cases, off normal points describe two types of activities:


points associated with a controller, port, input, or expansion input that is temporarily
disabled for maintenance
points associated with a controller, port, input, or expansion input that has been
programmed off-line and is connected but not yet enabled
In both cases this usually means the 'Enable' checkbox in the device (point) definition
is currently deselected (unchecked).
Each off-normal entry is listed by name, type, and address.
System Icons
The components displayed in both the System Tree and Components windows can
include these icons and the elements they represent:
This
icon:
indicates:
Alarm Response
Credential Template
CCTV Port
24
Velocity Main Menu
MAN007-0211
CCTV Switcher
CCTV or DVR Camera
Command Set
Controller (including the M1N, M2, M8, M16, or MSP)
Dial-Up Location
Door. This door is only enabled when the box to the left is checked. If
unchecked, Velocity considers the door's constituents (input, relay,
keypad, etc.)
Door Group
DVR Camera
E-mail Writer
Expansion Input (Red = Active, Black = Inactive)
Expansion Relay (Red = Active, Black = Virtual)
Folder. One or more elements of the tree are contained under this
topic.
Function Group
Holiday
Input
Operator
Person Template
Reader
Relay
Role
Serial Port Writer
SNET Port. The physical link between the host PC and the controller
using the serial SNET protocol.
Trigger Action Manager
XBox. The device that enables multiple controllers to communicate
with Velocity using the XNET protocol.
XML Writer
XNET Port. The physical link between the host PC and one or more
controllers through an XBox using the XNET protocol.
Workstation
Velocity Main Menu
25
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Navigating Velocity
Navigating Between Modules
Velocity modules are of two types and can be accessed in three different ways:


One Velocity module, SQL Database Manager, is a separate entity. This program can
be opened from the Windows desktop as well as within Velocity. You can toggle
between open modules by using either the Windows option on the Velocity menu
bar or pressing the Ctrl + Tab key combination.
Five other Velocity modules—Report Manager, Enrollment Manager, Customization
Manager, Badge & Graphic Designer, and Task Scheduler—can only be opened from
within Velocity. You can toggle between open modules by pressing the Alt + Tab
key combination or by clicking the appropriate icon in the Windows system tray.
You can dock or undock some Velocity modules by right clicking in the window's title
bar. Dockable modules are:




Administration
Alarm Viewer
Event Viewer
Status Viewer
Using the Mouse and Keyboard
While most of the mouse and keyboard methods in Velocity are the same as most
other MS Windows products, Velocity has a few differences as well.
Mouse Functions
The mouse can be used to move items around the screen or select options from
pop-up menus. In general, these functions are active within Velocity:
Point
Move the mouse and the cursor it controls to a word, phrase, icon, link,
or other window function. In many cases, if you hold the mouse over a
link or option for more than three seconds, a short message pops up
telling you what the option or link does.
Click
Point your mouse and press the left mouse button. If this is an active
area of the screen, this procedure selects and activates the feature or
program.
Right Click Point the mouse and press the right mouse button. If this is an active
area of the screen, the user will see a pop-up option list displaying one
or more options.
Drag
Point and click an item (normally an icon or object) on the desktop.
Then, with the left mouse button held down, pull the selected item to
another part of the screen. Then release the mouse button to leave the
item in the new location. If this is text, the action selects and highlights
the text specified by the dragging motion.
Keyboard Functions
These are functions that use keys on the keyboard to enter information. The keyboard
can also be used to exit windows, activate programs, or perform functions.
26
Navigating Velocity
MAN007-0211
Some functions that are performed repeatedly utilize the Control (Ctrl) or Alt (Alt) key
in combination with other keys. Newer keyboards also possess a Windows key, which
has a Windows symbol on it. This key is used in combination with several letters to
bring up integrated Windows programs. These key combinations are called hot keys,
shortcut keys, or keyboard shortcuts.
For a complete list of hot keys used in this program, refer to “Velocity Hot Keys” starting
on page 22. Cursor keys refer to the up, down, left, and right arrow keys normally
located on the number pad portion of your keyboard.
Using Velocity Fields and Tools
Velocity fields differ little from the fields you use throughout MS Windows. A brief
introduction to the fields and tools should help you use them successfully.
A few of the common field types are shown here:
Field Icon
Navigating Velocity
Name
Description
Radio Button
This is a toggle button. It is either selected or
cleared; there is no third choice. To select, click in
the circle and dot appears; to clear it, click again
and the dot disappears.
Check Box
Like the radio button, the check box is either
selected or cleared; there is no third option. To
select, click the box and a check mark appears; to
deselect, click again and the check mark
disappears.
Text
Type the required text into this field. The length of
the text string depends on the type of information
required. (Frequently, the required size of the string
is specified next to the field.)
Combo Box /
Option Box
Either type in the required value or click the down
arrow to the right of the box, and a list of possible
options appears. Depending on the type of
information required, you will see all
currently-defined instances of the type displayed. In
lists such as Time Zone options, <Always> and
<Never> are automatically supplied. In addition,
you will often see the <New> option. This indicates
that you can create a new component on-the-fly
from this dialog box without the need to back out
and go to another dialog box before returning to
finish. For example, if you are trying to select a Time
Zone but have not yet defined the one you need,
you can use the <New> option to create a new
time zone that fits your need.
27
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Field Icon
Name
Description
Spin Control
This field is used to increment or decrement a
value as required. Use the up spin control button to
increase the value in the box; use the down spin
control button to decrease the value. You can also
type a value directly into the box. With more
complex versions of this field, you can use the Tab
key or mouse to move from one field within the
box to the next, using the spin control buttons to
change each field value as required.
Slider Bar
Use this tool to move a window or list left or right,
up or down. This can be either vertical or horizontal
depending on the type of list. If a list in a window is
longer than the window can accommodate, the
slider will be vertical; if the list is wider than the
window, the slider will be horizontal. Both
horizontal and vertical sliders appear when a list is
both longer and wider than a window can fit.
Button
These come in many sizes and shapes. Normally
they are used to bring up another window or dialog
box or, as in the case of this example, to confirm
and store the current values for a dialog box and
return to a previous screen. Position your mouse
over the button then left-click. The OK button can
also be accessed by pressing the Enter key on your
keyboard.
Pop-Up Box
The pop-up box is normally activated by the right
mouse button. Right-clicking can bring up a pop-up
box in many places within Velocity. For example, if
you right click on a Velocity module's title bar, the
docking box appears. The option that appears
depends on the field or function closest to the click.
Tool/Button
Switching Operators
Use this option to switch between authorized operators without exiting Velocity.
To switch between operators:
1.
From the menu tool bar, select File > Switch Operator...
The Switch Operator dialog box appears.
2.
28
At the 'User Name' field, enter the name of this operator.
Navigating Velocity
MAN007-0211
3.
4.
At the 'Password' field, enter the password for this operator.
If required, at the 'Domain' pick list, select a domain represented by this operator.
This field is normally only used in single workstation installations that are
authenticating against a domain controller. Select either the local computer
workgroup (default) or the windows domain to which the computer belongs.
5.
Click OK.
The Velocity screen appropriate to this operator appears. Only those rights and
permissions authorized for this operator appear. If a window is open that is not
permitted for the new operator, it is closed automatically.
Locking Workstations
There are many instances when an operator will need to leave his/her post. While
away, they should secure Velocity by locking the computer.
To lock the Velocity workstation:

At the Velocity menu bar, select File > Lock Workstation.
The Windows log on screen appears, listing all currently enrolled users of this machine.
All programs currently running, including Velocity, remain running in the background.

In order to secure your system, you must have a Windows password.
Consult your system or Windows administrator for more on this. A user
without a password is inviting intrusion.
To unlock a locked Velocity workstation:
1.
Click the operator name on the log on screen.
A password screen appears.
2.
Enter a valid password and click OK.
The Velocity program reappears in exactly the same state as when you locked it.
Navigating Velocity
29
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Managing Desktop Space
There are times when Velocity operators will find themselves with multiple Velocity
windows open. Velocity enables an operator to view several windows on the screen at
one time. For example, an operator might be monitoring the Event Viewer, the Alarm
Viewer, and a map-level view of a floor using the Badge & Graphics Designer module
while simultaneously enrolling new employees. This requires that four separate
windows be open at the same time. Even with dual monitors this can become
crowded.
Luckily, Velocity provides the ability to rearrange windows using a number of different
techniques: operators can dock or float multiple windows as well as treat several
windows as child entities within another window or associate specified windows with
specified Velocity modules.
Managing Velocity Windows
Ordinarily, Velocity modules are tied (docked) to the main Velocity screen; however,
this is not always necessary or useful.
To rearrange Velocity windows:
1.

Bring up the Velocity module you want to arrange.
This technique does not apply to dialog boxes or pages within a module,
only to the main screens of certain Velocity modules, including Event
Viewer, Alarm Viewer, Administration, and Status Viewer. This technique
does not work with Enrollment Manager, Graphics, Report Manager,
Customization Manager, SQL Database Manager, or Scheduling Agent.
2.
Right click on the module's title bar.
A pop-up option list appears like this:
3.
Select the option you want.
The available options are:
Docked
Affix to the nearest available corner of the screen on startup.
Modules that can be docked are:
•
•
•
•
Administration
Alarm Viewer
Event Viewer
Status Viewer
• Who’s Inside
Floating
30
Allow to move outside the boundaries of the main Velocity
program. This enables operators to drag the module outside the
Velocity window to a free space where it can be easily viewed,
such as to a second monitor (if dual monitors are configured for
this system).
Managing Desktop Space
MAN007-0211
MDI
Child
Keep the window inside its current module.
For example, if you specify that Alarm Viewer is a child while it is
inside the main Velocity screen, then you cannot move it outside
the Velocity frame. The windows you can set as an MDI child are:
•
•
•
•
Administration
Alarm Viewer
Event Viewer
Status Viewer
• Who’s Inside
Docked
to
Specify where the window should be fixed within the Windows
desktop: top, left, bottom, right. You can specify which corner the
window adheres to using the Docked to... option.
MDI
Child as
Specify whether the current module should be minimized,
maximized, or restored within the parent window. Attempts to
move it outside the Velocity shell will fail.
• If Minimized, the window appears as an icon within the
main Velocity window.
• If Maximized, the window opens at the largest possible size
within the main Velocity screen.
• If Restored, the window appears at its default size within the
Velocity screen.

MDI is the abbreviation for Multiple Document Interface.
4.
5.
When you release the mouse button over your choice, the window is set.
If you selected Docked, select the required docking relationship from the Docked
to list.
If you selected MDI Child, select the required child relationship from the MDI
Child as list.
You can arrange two or more open windows into various patterns using the Window
option on the menu bar. You can also resize Velocity windows as required using normal
MS Windows resizing techniques.
Column Management
One of the most overlooked features of Velocity is column management. This is a
feature built into most Windows products but is frequently not discussed.
Managing Desktop Space
31
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Velocity has many screens that contain columns as shown below:
Prime examples of this are:







32
Enrollment Manager People tree pane
Enrollment Manager Credentials pane
Event Viewer main screen
Alarm Viewer main screen
Customization Manager main screen
Status Viewer main screen
Who’s Inside screen
Managing Desktop Space
MAN007-0211
Sorting By Column Header
When you have a list in a columnated window, you can sort the list according to any
feature in the column. For example, if we wanted to sort the People Tree List by first
name rather than last name, all we would have to do is click on the First Name column
and the list is automatically reordered like this example:
Notice that the list is now ordered alphabetically A - Z by first name rather than last.
Click the First Name column again and the list inverts: you now see the list sorted Z - A
like this:
You can perform this same ordering trick for any column appearing in the table. For
example, if you want to reorder the list by ID, scroll over to the ID column and click the
ID column header. The list is reordered by ID number.
This provides an easy way to rearrange people, credentials, or any other list element by
a category value without using a search filter.
Rearranging Column Headers
In addition to sorting, Velocity also enables you to move column headers from one
position to another in the following modules:




Event Viewer
Alarm Viewer
Status Viewer
This feature is not available in the Enrollment Manager, Customization
Manager, or Who’s Inside.
To do this, simply left click on the column header you want to move and drag it to the
new location.
Managing Desktop Space
33
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
For example, say you want to move the Status column in Status Viewer from its current
position to the left of Address:
To do this, click on the Status column header and drag it to the left until it is on top of
the Address header then drop it. The Status Viewer changes to look like this:
Resizing Columns and Panes
Windows enables you to resize both panes and columns in the same manner. To do
this:
1.
Move your mouse pointer to the column or pane border. The pointer icon
changes.
If it rests over the division line between panes, it changes to this:
depending on whether the pane or column is arranged horizontally or vertically.
If it rests over the division line between columns, it changes to this:
2.
Click your left mouse button and drag the border in whichever direction you need.
Release the mouse button and the column or pane is resized.
34
Managing Desktop Space
MAN007-0211
Using Velocity Programs
Velocity programs (modules) are accessible in one of three ways:



Hint
With the top-level Configuration folder highlighted in the System Tree pane, Velocity
modules are displayed in the Components pane. Double click the required module
to open it.
From the Console Options on the main menu bar. Select the required module to
open.
From the icon bar, click the required icon.
The term Velocity program is used interchangeably with Velocity module in Velocity
Help when referring to the interlinked routines that make up the Velocity suite.
The modules currently available are:
Select this Module:
To:
Velocity Configuration
Configure the Velocity program.
DIGI*TRAC
Configuration
Configure hardware comprising the Velocity system.
Interfaces
Configuration
Configure and use attached CCTV systems, Serial Port
Writer, E-mail Writer, XML Writers, and attached DVRs.
Add-Ins
Learn to operate both the Add-In Manager and the Server
Extension features.
Alarm Viewer
View and manage alarms as they occur throughout the
security system.
Badge & Graphic
Designer
Design and draw badges for Velocity.
CCTV Camera Viewer
Configure and operate a CCTV subsystem connected to
Velocity. This enables you to view live video from the
attached cameras. A CCTV Camera Viewer option
appears in the Components pane when the top-level
Configuration folder is selected in the System Tree pane.
Customization
Manager
Customize the Velocity database and interface for the
specific needs of this client.
DVR Camera Viewer
Open Video Explorer.
The Designer opens in Badge mode.
This option appears in the Components pane when the
top-level Configuration folder is selected in the System
Tree pane.
Enrollment Manager
Enroll people (badge and/or code holders) as well as
create and assign credentials to those enrolled people for
this security system.
Event Viewer
View events as they occur throughout the security system.
Using Velocity Programs
35
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Select this Module:
To:
Graphics
Create map views of security systems throughout the
system. Place alarm and relay points on these maps and
administer them directly from the maps.
Designer opens in Graphics mode.
Report Manager
Generate and create reports on system security and
Velocity operations.
SQL Manager
Manage the Velocity database. This option links directly to
the SQL 2005 Database Manager. If you are using the
run-time version of SQL 2005, SQL 2005 Express, the
management program is SQL Server Management Studio
Express.
Status Viewer
View real-time status of all components connected to this
Velocity system.
Scheduling Agent
Schedule housekeeping for the Velocity system including
credential activation/deactivation and system archiving.
Video Explorer
Display Video Explorer for DVR viewing. The Video
Explorer option appears in the Components pane when
the top-level Configuration folder is selected in the
System Tree pane.
Who's Inside
Track the identity of people inside a designated zone.
These modules enable you to handle every aspect of security.
Advice for Operators
If you are an operator, you won’t need to access the configuration functions in Velocity.
Your main duties involve the following modules:
Use:
To:
See:
Alarm Viewer
View, acknowledge and clear alarms as they
occur.
page 39
The Alarm Viewer appears automatically
whenever a new alarm occurs.
36
Status Viewer
View real-time status of all components
connected to this Velocity system.
page 53
Graphics
View existing maps and, with the proper
permission, respond to alarms and issue
commands using the map icons.
page 67
Enrollment
Manager
Enroll people and assign them credentials.
page 83
Using Velocity Programs
MAN007-0211
Use:
To:
See:
Report
Manager
Generate reports.
page 177
Control
Functions
Monitor and control security functions from
both Graphics and the System Tree pane.
page 203
CCTV
Monitor your CCTV subsystem.
page 231
DVR
Monitor, retrieve, review, and export video from
your attached DVR subsystem.
page 237
Who’s Inside
Monitor a specified area and identify who is
currently inside that area.
page 273
The job of customizing existing reports is
normally an administrator function.
As an operator, you might never have to use these modules:







Velocity Configuration
DIGI*TRAC Configuration
Interfaces Configuration
Badge & Graphics Designer (Badge mode)
Customization Manager
SQL Database Manager
Task Scheduler
Using Velocity Programs
37
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
38
Using Velocity Programs
MAN007-0211
Alarm Viewer
Alarm Viewer is the module in Velocity that enables a qualified operator to view alarms
as they occur, react to them as required, and dispose of them as needed.
This section includes the following topics:









Opening Alarm Viewer (page 40)
Alarm Viewer Main Screen (page 41)
Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity desktop (page 45)
How To Use Alarm Viewer (page 46)
Acknowledging Alarms (page 46)
Clearing Alarms (page 47)
Displaying a Credential (page 47)
Adding Operator Notes (page 48)
Viewing a map from Alarm Viewer (page 51)
39
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Starting Alarm Viewer
Use the Alarm Viewer to view and respond to all alarms Velocity detects on this security
system.
To open the Alarm Viewer, do one of these:




From Velocity, press F8.
From the Velocity desktop, click the Configuration file in the System Tree window
and select Alarm Viewer from the Component window,
.
From the Velocity menu bar, select Console > Alarm Viewer.
From the Velocity main menu status line, double click on either the 'Active Alarms'
or 'Ack. Alarms' status field. The status line displays the number of alarms Velocity
currently detects in either the acknowledged or unacknowledged states.
The Alarm Viewer appears.
40
Starting Alarm Viewer
MAN007-0211
Alarm Viewer Main Screen
The Alarm Viewer screen looks like this example:
This screen is divided into these sections:
Icon bar
Click one of these icons to perform a variety of tasks.
For more on this, see “Icon Bar” on page 42.
Unacknowledged
Alarms pane
This pane shows all the alarms Velocity has detected which
have not yet been acknowledged by an operator. The columns
displayed are defined in “Alarm Viewer Columns” on page 42.
Alarms are listed in order of their priority level. Alarms assigned
the highest priority are shown at the top of the list. Initially, all
alarms have the same level 1 priority. You can change alarm
priority levels through the Customization Manager.
To scroll through the available columns, use the scrollbar at the
bottom of the pane. Like most tables in Velocity you can both
sort the alarms on this list and reorder columns in the table
using Column Management.
Acknowledged
Alarms pane
This pane shows all the alarms Velocity has detected which
have been acknowledged by an operator. The columns
displayed are defined in “Alarm Viewer Columns” on page 42.
To scroll through the available columns, use the scrollbar at the
bottom of the pane. Like most tables in Velocity you can both
sort the alarms on this list and reorder columns in the table
using Column Management.
Comments pane
This pane displays either instructions or notes depending on
which tab is selected. The instructions or notes apply to the
currently-selected alarm.
Instructions
window
When the Instructions tab is selected, it displays any
instructions specified for this alarm.
Notes window
When the Notes tab is selected, the operator can type notes
pertaining to a specific alarm.
This screen is either viewable or hidden from view based on the role assigned to a
specific operator.
Alarm Viewer Main Screen
41
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Icon Bar
There are a number of options you can perform either by using the menu bar options
or right clicking your mouse.
Icon
Click this icon to:
Acknowledge the currently selected alarm.
Clear the currently selected alarm.
Acknowledge all alarms in the unacknowledged alarms pane.
Clear all alarms in the acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms
pane, depending on which pane was selected when the button
was clicked.
Record a note. When you click this icon, the Operator
Comments dialog box appears. Type your note here.
View the current Alarm Viewer properties sheet. Change these
properties if required.
Refresh the Alarm Viewer. This updates the Alarm Viewer
immediately, adding any alarms that have occurred since the
Alarm Viewer was opened.
View on-line help for this topic.
This bar and buttons on it are either enabled or disabled based on the role assigned to
a specific operator.
For more on acknowledging and clearing alarms, see “How To Use Alarm Viewer” on
page 46.
Alarm Viewer Columns
Unacknowledged Alarms Pane
The Unacknowledged Alarms pane contains columns of information pertaining to each
alarm. These columns are:
This column displays the icon appropriate to the current alarm
status. Available alarm status icons are:
—An unacknowledged, unsecured, active alarm.
—An unacknowledged but secure active alarm.
—An RTN (return to normal): the alarm has returned to normal.
If the alarm generated is caused by or associated with a DVR
camera, this icon appears in the alarm's column. You can either
view the current video or replay stored video from the alarmed
camera as required.
For more on this, refer to Play Video and Get Recorded Video.
42
Alarm Viewer Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Count
If you have accepted the default Alarm Stacking enabled in Alarm
Options Preferences, this column displays all occurrences of alarms
for this device that are still unacknowledged. The earliest alarm is
marked as 1 and each subsequent alarm is incremented.
Controller
Time
The current time at the controller site when this alarm occurred.
This can be different from the host's time if the controller and host
are in different time zones.
Host Time
The current time at the Velocity host site when this alarm occurred.
This can be different from the controller's time if the controller and
host are in different time zones.
Description
A brief description of the alarm
Address
The specific location where this alarm took place using the standard
address format.
For more on interpreting the address format, refer to the Velocity
3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Level
Level assigned an alarm. Initially, all alarms have the same level 1
priority.
You can change alarm priority levels through the Customization
Manager (see “How To Use Customization Manager” on page 678).
For more on alarm levels, refer to “Alarm Levels” on page 698.
Alarm ID
The ID generated by Velocity for this alarm. Each alarm type has a
different alarm ID.
To include or exclude any of these columns from the pane, refer to the Column
Headers section of the the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Acknowledged Alarms Pane
The Acknowledged Alarms pane contains these columns of information pertaining to
each alarm. These columns are:
This column displays the icon appropriate to the current alarm
status. Available alarm status icons are:
—An unacknowledged, unsecured, active alarm.
—An unacknowledged but secure active alarm.
—An RTN (return to normal): the alarm has returned to
normal.
If the alarm generated is caused by or associated with a DVR
camera, this icon appears in the alarm's column. You can either
view the current video or replay stored video from the alarmed
camera as required.
For more on this, refer to Play Video and Get Recorded Video.
Alarm Viewer Main Screen
43
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Count
If you have accepted the default Alarm Stacking enabled in
Alarm Options Preferences, this column displays all occurrences
of alarms for this device that are still unacknowledged. The
earliest alarm is marked as 1 and each subsequent alarm is
incremented.
Controller
Time
The current time at the controller site when this alarm occurred.
This can be different from the host's time if the controller and
host are in different time zones.
Host Time
The current time at the Velocity host site when this alarm
occurred. This can be different from the controller's time if the
controller and host are in different time zones.
Acknowledge
Time
The date and time when this alarm was acknowledged.
Workstation
The unique ID generated by Velocity for the Velocity workstation
acknowledging this alarm.
Description
A brief description of the alarm.
Address
The specific location where this alarm took place using the
standard address format.
For more on interpreting the address format, refer to the
Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Acknowledged
By
The operator acknowledging the alarm.
Level
Level assigned an alarm. Initially, all alarms have the same level
1 priority.
You can change alarm priority levels through the Customization
Manager (see “How To Use Customization Manager” on page
678). For more on alarm levels, refer to “Alarm Levels” on page
698.
Alarm ID
The ID generated by Velocity for this alarm. Each alarm type has
a different alarm ID.
To include or exclude any of these columns from the pane, refer to the Column
headers section of the the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
To sort and manage columns on either pane, refer to “Column Management” on page
35.
44
Alarm Viewer Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity Desktop
If you aren't using a multiple monitor setup for your Velocity workstation, you may have
to arrange Velocity modules so you can see them all on the screen. Velocity enables an
operator to reposition the Alarm Viewer on the Velocity desktop using the docking and
floating features.
To position Alarm Viewer:
1.
2.
Resize the Alarm Viewer as you require using the standard window resizing
techniques (such as moving the cursor over the Alarm Viewer corner until the
cursor changes to a two-way arrow then left clicking the mouse key and changing
the window dimensions).
Right click anywhere in the Alarm Viewer title bar.
The dock/float options appear.
3.
Select the docking or floating attributes you need.
This not only resizes the Alarm Viewer screen but imposes the desired limitations of
the screens visibility and movement within the Velocity desktop space.
Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity Desktop
45
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
How To Use Alarm Viewer
While you're in Alarm Viewer, you can perform the following tasks:













Acknowledge an alarm
Acknowledge all alarms
Clear an alarm
Clear all alarms
Add a note to an alarm
View instructions for an alarm
View credential
Replay sound file
Copy to clipboard
Go to the map to see an alarm
Refresh alarms list
Play DVR Video
Replay recorded DVR video
Most of these tasks can be accomplished in one of several ways. For specific
instructions, see the following procedures.
Acknowledging an Alarm
To acknowledge an alarm, do one of these:


In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to
acknowledge. Click the Acknowledge icon from the menu bar,
.
In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to
acknowledge. Right click on the highlighted alarm and select Acknowledge from the
pop-up option list.
The alarm is moved to the Acknowledged Alarms window and the alarm tone for that
alarm is halted.
Acknowledging All Alarms
Use this function to move all alarms currently Unacknowledged to the Acknowledged
Alarms pane.

Don't use this function unless you have inspected each alarm and are
satisfied that none of them requires comment or special response.
To acknowledge all alarms, do one of these:


Click the Acknowledge All icon from the menu bar,
.
In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, right click on one of the alarms you want to
acknowledge and select Acknowledge All from the pop-up option list.
All alarms in the Unacknowledged Alarms pane are moved to the Acknowledged
Alarms pane and the alarm tone for all alarms is halted.

46
You can acknowledge any number of alarms up to the maximum
specified in the 'Maximum Alarms to Display on Refresh' setting (see the
Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide). If you are trying to acknowledge
more than this number of alarms, you must do it in sections.
How To Use Alarm Viewer
MAN007-0211
Clearing an Alarm
Clearing an alarm removes the alarm from the Acknowledged Alarms pane.

Before you clear an alarm, you must first acknowledge it.
To clear an alarm, do one of these:


From the Acknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to clear.
Click the Clear icon,
, from the menu bar.
From the Acknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to clear.
Right click on the highlighted alarm and select Clear from the pop-up option list.
The alarm is erased. A record of it still appears in the Event Viewer.

Don't use this function unless you have inspected each alarm and are
satisfied that none of them requires comment or special response.
Clearing All Alarms
Clearing all alarms removes all alarms from the Acknowledged Alarms pane.

Before you clear all alarms, you must first acknowledge all the alarms.
You cannot clear alarms from the Unacknowledged Alarms pane unless
you have previously unchecked the ‘Require Acknowledge before
Clearing’ box on the Preferences Alarm Options page (see page 50).
To clear all alarms in the Acknowledged Alarms pane, do one of these:


Click the Clear All icon from the menu bar,
.
From the Acknowledged Alarms pane, right click on one of the alarms and select
Clear All from the pop-up option list.
All alarms in the Acknowledged Alarms pane are erased. A record of these alarms are
still kept in the Event Viewer.

Don't use this function unless you have inspected each alarm and are
satisfied that none of them needs to be retained.
Displaying a Credential
When Alarm Viewer records an alarm involving a credential, such as deny access or
incorrect key entry, a qualifier operator can review the credential from within this
module.
To display a credential:
1.
From Alarm Viewer, right click on the alarm in question.
A pop list appears.
2.
Select Display Credential from the pop-up list.
The badge template associated with that credential holder appears.
The credential only appears if you have selected a specific badge template under
console preferences. For more on this, refer to “General Page Preferences” on page 47.
Only that information specified by the badge template appears (see page 494).
How To Use Alarm Viewer
47
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Copying to Clipboard
Use this feature to paste selected alarm entries from the Alarm Viewer into another
program, such as a text editor or E-mail program.
To copy specified alarms to the clipboard:
1.
From either the Unacknowledged or Acknowledged Alarms panes, click to highlight
one or more alarms.
Use Ctrl + click to select a non-contiguous group of entries. Use Shift + click to
select a contiguous range of entries.
2.
3.
4.
Right click on the highlighted alarm(s) and select Copy to Clipboard from the
pop-up option list.
Open another program that can accept a clipboard entry, such as a text editor,
word processor, or E-mail agent.
Paste (Ctrl + V) the alarm text into the program as required.
Operator Notes
When you add a note, it is displayed in the Comments pane on the right side of the
screen. Notes are generally made:



as a response to a specific deviation from an expected alarm
as a required response to a particular alarm
as a description of how a specific alarm was resolved
To add a note to an alarm:
1.
From either the Unacknowledged or Acknowledged pane, do one of these:
• Right click on an alarm you want to annotate and select Add Operator Note.
• Click to highlight the alarm you want to note. Click the Add Note icon from the
menu bar,
.
The Operator Notes dialog box appears like this example:

If you have one or more of the appropriate boxes checked on the
Preferences Alarm Options page, the Operator Comments text box
appears automatically when you try to acknowledge and/or clear
alarms.
The Operator Notes dialog box has three windows:
• The top window displays a brief description of the currently selected alarm.
This field is automatically populated by Velocity.
• The 'Select an Alarm Response' combo box provides a list of previously
defined Alarm Responses.
48
How To Use Alarm Viewer
MAN007-0211
2.
• The bottom window is a text box that provides space for a qualified operator
to enter information about this alarm, when needed.Type the note you need
to make in this text field.
If required, click the 'Select an Alarm Response (Optional)...' combo box and select
a previously defined Alarm Response.
This is an optional feature. The text associated with the selected Alarm Response is
attached to the alarm.
3.
4.
In the bottom window, enter the text you need to describe this alarm and/or the
nature of its resolution.
When you're finished, press Enter or click OK.
Once a note is entered for an alarm, whenever the alarm is selected, the date, time,
operator and note type appear in the upper pane under the Notes tab like the following
example:
No text appears in the lower text box. To view a note you have created for this alarm,
refer to the brief instructions below.
To display the actual note:
1.
2.
Click the Notes tab on the Comments pane.
Select the alarm with the associated note.
The date, time, and operator appear in the upper window of the pane as shown in
the example above.
3.
From the upper window of the Comments pane, click the note you want to display.
The associated note appears in the lower window of the pane like the following
example:
If you have selected an Alarm Response, the text associated with this selection appears
in the lower window.
For more on defining Alarm Responses, refer to “Alarm Responses” on page 337.
How To Use Alarm Viewer
49
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Replaying a WAV File
You can replay a WAV (sound) file associated with a particular alarm using the following
option. WAV files are associated with an alarm using the Options column in the
Customization Manager.
To replay a WAV file:
1.
2.
In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, right click the alarm whose sound file you
want to replay.
From the pop-up option list, select Replay WAV File.
Playing DVR Video
If a video symbol,
, appears in the video column for this alarm, you can view video
from the alarmed camera.
To play DVR video:
1.
Right click on the selected alarm in either the Acknowledged or Unacknowledged
Alarms panes.
A pop-up list appears.
2.
Select DVR Alarm Video > Show Viewer.
The Live Video screen appears showing video from the camera associated with this
alarm for the time specified in the alarm.
Get Recorded Alarm Video
If a video symbol,
, appears in the video column for this alarm, you can replay
video stored by the DVR for the alarmed camera.
To get recorded alarm video:
1.
Right click on the selected alarm in either the Acknowledged or Unacknowledged
Alarms panes.
A pop-up list appears.
2.
Select DVR Alarm Video > Get Recorded Alarm Video.
The Recorded Alarm Video screen appears like this example:
All video selections for the time specified in the alarm window appear here.
3.
Double click the selection you want.
The selected video plays in the Live Video screen.
50
How To Use Alarm Viewer
MAN007-0211
Viewing Instructions for an Alarm
Alarms can have instructions associated with them. These instructions tell the operator
how to proceed, what process to use, or who to call for a specific alarm.
Instructions can be associated with specific alarms through the Instructions column on
the Customization Manager. For more on this, refer to “Creating Instructions” on page
698.
To view instructions for an alarm:
1.
2.
Click the Instructions tab of the Comments pane.
Click on the alarm you want in either the Acknowledged Alarms or
Unacknowledged Alarms panes.
The instructions appear under the Instructions tab on the right side of the screen.
Viewing a Map for an Alarm
Sometimes it's just easier to visualize the location of an alarm if you can see it on a
map. This feature enables the operator to jump from an unacknowledged alarm to an
existing map in order to display the icon representing the currently alarmed
component.
To view a map associated with an alarm component:
1.
Right click on a selected alarm in the Unacknowledged Alarms panes.
A pop-up option list appears.
2.
Select Go to Graphic.
3.
Control the alarm with the graphics module using the instructions found in the
Velocity Operator’s Guide under these topics:
• “Controlling Placed Objects,” starting on page 75
• “Access & Control Functions,” starting on page 203
The program jumps to the Graphic module and displays the alarm on the map.
Refresh Alarms on the Alarm Viewer
Once the Alarm Viewer appears it only displays the alarms it has trapped up to the time
the Viewer was opened. The Refresh List option clears and repopulates the viewer. The
number of alarms it can grab at one time is specified by the number specified in the
‘Maximum Alarms to Display on Refresh’ field (see the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s
Guide).
To add any new alarms that might have occurred while the Alarm Viewer was open,
use this feature.
To refresh the Alarm Viewer:

Click the Refresh List icon,
.
You can also rearrange columns in order to sort information on the page. For more on
this, refer to the “Column Management” on page 35.
How To Use Alarm Viewer
51
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Closing Alarm Viewer
To close Alarm Viewer, perform one of these actions:



52
Click the
button in the upper right hand corner of the screen header bar.
Click the Hirsch symbol in the upper left hand corner of the screen header bar,
and select Close from the drop-down list.
With the Alarm Viewer window selected, press Ctrl + F4.
,
Closing Alarm Viewer
MAN007-0211
Status Viewer
The Status Viewer enables you to quickly review all of the current component settings.
To open the Status Viewer, use one of these methods:




From the components window, double click the Status Viewer option,
From the icon tool bar, click the Status Viewer icon,
.
From the menu bar, select Console > Status Viewer.
Press F9.
.
The Status Viewer main screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Status Viewer Main
Screen” on page 54.
Once the Status Viewer appears, review it as required.




Expand each component group
Review current status for selected groups (page 60)
Perform tasks (page 60)
Define status groups (page 62)
For dial-up connections, status is not available from the Status Viewer unless there is a
current dial-up connection. If Velocity needs to dial up the connection before seeking
status, Velocity will disconnect from the location after two minutes and status will not
be continuously updated.
53
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Status Viewer Main Screen
One possible version of Status Viewer looks like this example:
This viewer includes the following fields and buttons:
Click this button to display only those points currently masked in this
status window. A simplified screen appears like this example:
Notice that the reason for masking each item is displayed in the
third column, 'Reason Masked'.
To display all currently selected points again in the status window,
click the Status Group button. The Masked and Status Group
buttons are mutually exclusive: if one is selected, the other one is
deselected.
Select the class of points from the drop-down list you want to
display. This filters the points displayed. The Masked and Status
Group buttons are mutually exclusive: if one is selected, the other
one is deselected.
Only those points currently defined for this status group appear in
this list.
Select the status group from this drop-down list that you want to
display in the status window.
Only those status groups currently defined for this system appear in
this list. None is the default.
Click this button to display the Status Viewer Properties and either
define a new status group or modify an existing status group.
For more on this, refer to Status Viewer Properties.
status
window
Displays the status of all currently selected points. The columns that
appear change according to the type of component displayed.
For a complete description of the columns and items displayed
here, refer to Status Window Columns below.
Click this button to display Velocity online help.
54
Status Viewer Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Status Window Columns
The columns and items for each component type are described briefly here:
Component
Columns
Explanation
Door Name
Name assigned to this door
Address
Address Velocity generated for this door. For
more on interpreting this address format, refer
to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Status of inputs associated with this door (i.e.
active, inactive, open circuit, etc.)
Alarm
Indicates whether this door is currently alarmed
(Yes) or not (-).
Masked
Indicates whether this door's input is currently
masked (Yes) or unmasked (-).
Enabled
Is this door enabled? (Yes/No)
1ALRM
Status of this door's line module Alarm point. All
LMs have a first point for Alarms.
Doors
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
2RQE
Status of this door's line module RQE point. All
LM2s and LM3s have a second point for RQEs.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
3TMPR
Status of this door's line module Tamper point.
All LM3s have a third point for tamper.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
LM
Type of line module associated with this door,
where:
1 = LM1
2 = LM2
3 = LM3
LM Volts
Voltage level for this door's line module.
Relay
Whether the relay associated with this door is
currently ON or OFF.
2PR
Is this door enabled for two-person rule?
(Yes/No)
Updated
The date and time when the status of this door
was last refreshed.
Input Name
Name assigned to this input
Inputs
Status Viewer Main Screen
55
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Component
Columns
Explanation
Address
Address Velocity generated for this input. For
more on interpreting this address format, refer
to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Current status of this input (i.e. active, inactive,
etc.)
Alarm
Indicates whether this input is currently alarmed
(Yes) or not (-).
Masked
Indicates whether this input is currently masked
(Yes) or unmasked (-).
Enabled
Is this input currently enabled? (Yes/No)
1ALRM
Status of this line module's Alarm point. All LMs
have a first point for Alarms.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
2RQE
Status of this line module's RQE point. All LM2s
and LM3s have a second point for RQEs.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
3TMPR
Status of this line module's Tamper point. All
LM3s have a third point for tamper.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
LM
Type of line module this input uses, where:
1 = LM1
2 = LM2
3 = LM3
LM Volts
Voltage level for this line module.
Updated
The date and time when the status of this input
was last refreshed.
Relay Name
Name assigned to this relay.
Address
Address Velocity generated for this relay. For
more on interpreting this address format, refer
to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Current status of this relay (i.e. active, inactive,
etc.).
Updated
The date and time when the status of this relay
was last refreshed.
Reader Name
Name assigned to this reader.
Relays
Readers
56
Status Viewer Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Component
Columns
Explanation
Address
Address Velocity generated for this reader. For
more on interpreting this address format, refer
to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Current status of this reader.
Code Tamper
Indicates whether this reader is currently
experiencing a code tamper condition (Yes) or
not.
Physical
Tamper
Indicates whether this reader is currently
experiencing a physical tamper condition (Yes)
or not.
Updated
The date and time when the status of this
reader was last refreshed.
Controller
Name
Name assigned to this controller
Address
Address Velocity generated for this controller. For
more on interpreting this address format, refer
to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Current status of this controller (online, inactive,
etc.).
Enclosure
Current status of the door protecting this
controller board. The lock alarm can indicate
one of three conditions: secure (door is closed),
tamper (door is ajar), or blank if the system
does not know.
Enabled
Is this controller currently enabled for Velocity?
(Yes/No)
Terminal
Indicates whether this controller is using a SCIB
to connect to a terminal. This enables it to issue
D*T commands directly to the controller
through an terminal emulate program. (Logged
ON/Logged OFF)
AC Power
The voltage/amperage at which this controller is
running.
UPS Battery
Current status of this controller’s UPS.
(OK/Weak/Failed)
Local
Programming
Whether this controller is currently being
programmed by an attached keypad. (OFF/ON)
Mem
Current state of controller memory. (OK/Parity
Error/etc.)
Controllers
Status Viewer Main Screen
57
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Component
Columns
Explanation
Printer
Current state of the connected parallel printer.
(Offline/Online)
S Printer
Current state of any connected serial printer.
(Offline/Online)
Tamper
Pending
Current tamper state (Pending/Not Pending).
Updated
The date and time when the status of this
controller was last refreshed.
XBox Name
Name assigned to this XBox.
Address
Address Velocity generated for this XBox. For
more on interpreting this address format, refer
to “Address Format” on page 422.
Enabled
Is this XBox currently active? (Yes/No)
Rev
What is the revision number for this XBox as
detected by Velocity?
Updated
The date and time when the status of this XBox
was last refreshed.
Port Name
Name assigned to this port.
Address
Address Velocity generated for this port. For
more on interpreting this address format, refer
to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Current status of the port.
Enabled
Is this port currently active? (Yes/No)
Updated
The date and time when the status of this port
was last refreshed.
XBoxes
Ports
Expansion Inputs
58
XInput Name
Name assigned to this expansion input.
Address
Address Velocity generated for this expansion
input. For more on interpreting this address
format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Current status of the expansion input.
Alarm
Indicates whether this expansion input is
currently alarmed (Yes) or not (-).
Status Viewer Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Component
Columns
Explanation
Masked
Indicates whether this expansion input is
currently masked (Yes) or unmasked (-).
Enabled
Is this input currently enabled? (Yes/No)
1ALRM
Status of this line module's Alarm point. All LMs
have a first point for Alarms.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
2RQE
Status of this door's line module RQE point. All
LM2s and LM3s have a second point for RQEs.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
3TMPR
Status of this door's line module Tamper point.
All LM3s have a third point for tamper.
If no point is detected, a dash appears.
LM
Type of line module this input uses, where:
1 = LM1
2 = LM2
3 = LM3
LM Volts
Voltage level for this line module.
Updated
The date and time when the status of this
expansion input was last refreshed.
Expansion Relays
XRelay Name
Name assigned to this expansion relay.
Address
Address Velocity generated for this expansion
relay. For more on interpreting this address
format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status
Current status of this expansion relay.
Updated
The date and time when the status of this
expansion relay was last refreshed.
Status is not available from the Status Viewer unless there is a current dial-up
connection. If Velocity needs to dial up the connection before seeking status, Velocity
will disconnect from the location after two minutes and status will not be accurate.
Expand or contract each component type as required.


To expand a component type, click the plus button to the left of the group,
. The
plus button becomes a minus button.
To contract an expanded group, click the minus button, . The minus button
becomes a plus button.
Status Viewer Main Screen
59
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Status Viewer: How to Use
To customize the status viewer:
1.
From the main Velocity screen, do one of these:
• From the icon tool bar, click the Status Viewer icon,
.
• From the menu bar, select Console > Status Viewer.
• Press F9.
The Status Viewer main screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Status Viewer
Main Screen” on page 54.
2.
From the 'Status Group' combo box, select one of the available options:
• one of the existing status groups
• None to display no status
The window changes to display all components for the selected status group. If
required, create a new status group.

We strongly recommend that you create status groups as soon as
possible, since viewing the status of 'all points' (the default value) on all
controllers can take a long time. Velocity must poll each point on all
connected controllers before it displays the results.
For instructions on adding, modifying, or configuring a status group, click Create
Status Groups.
3.
4.
If required, customize the column headers that appear on the status viewer.
Expand or contract each component group as required and monitor the current
status of the system.
Polling status of the selected points takes place as soon as you pick the points you
want to view.
To decode messages, refer to “Status Messages” on page 65.
5.
Perform one or more of the right-click tasks available for a selected component.
For more on this, refer to “Status Viewer Right-Click Options” on page 60.
6.

Click
to exit Status Viewer and return to the main Velocity menu.
Before you can view the status of inputs or expansion inputs, first
configure the required inputs to report the required status. To do this,
enable the required reporting features in either the door inputs general
property sheet or inputs/expansion inputs general property sheet under
the 'Enable State Change Reporting' section.
Status is not available from the Status Viewer unless there is a current dial-up
connection. If Velocity needs to dial up the connection before seeking status, Velocity
will disconnect from the location after two minutes and status will not be accurate.
Status Viewer Right-Click Options
Status Viewer provides a variety of options you can perform from this module.
To perform a task:
1.
Right click on a specific component or point that appears in the status window.
An option list appears.
60
Status Viewer: How to Use
MAN007-0211
2.
Select one of these options:
Click this option...
To:
Access Functions
Perform one of the access functions on the
selected device.
Only doors support this function.
Control Functions
Perform one of the control functions on the
selected device.
Only those functions available to the
device/point appear in the sublist. For example,
a door supports a full set of control options
while an expansion input or relay supports only
some. All other categories of points do not
support control functions at all.
Refresh
Consult the controller for the most up-to-date
information on the selected device/point.
Configure Device
Bring up the properties sheet for the selected
device/point. For example, if you select this
option for a reader, the reader properties sheet
for that reader appear.
The qualified operator can change values on the
property sheet and modify the device/point as
required. When you're finished, click OK to
return to the Status Group screen.
Status Viewer: How to Use
61
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Creating Status Groups
When you first open Status Viewer, you have a choice of only one group: All. This
displays the status of all devices on all controllers throughout your entire system. This
often provides a very large and daunting status list to the operator. In order to limit the
number of devices shown in Status Viewer, you must create one or more status groups.
To create a status group:
1.
From the Status Viewer, click the Configure Status Group button,
tool bar.
, on the menu
The Status Viewer Properties dialog box appears with the Status Groups page
showing. For more on this, refer to “Status Groups Page” on page 63.
2.
From the 'Status Group' combo box on the Status Group property sheet, select the
<New> option.
The Available pane is populated with all available devices. The Selected pane is
emptied.
3.
4.
In the Status Group text box, enter the name you want for the new status group.
From the 'View as' section, click the radio buttons for the component type you
want displayed in the Available pane.
Only the component type selected here is displayed in the Available pane.
Select All to display all available system components in the Available pane.
5.
6.
From the 'Available' pane, select those system elements you want to view on the
Event Viewer for this Status Group.
• Ctrl + click to select a non-contiguous group of elements.
• Shift + click to select a contiguous range of elements.
Click the right arrow button,
, to move all the highlighted components in the
'Available' pane to the 'Selected' pane.
Click the double right arrow button,
pane back into the 'Available' pane.
7.
, to move all components in the 'Selected'
Remove components from the 'Selected' pane by highlighting one or more in the
'Selected' pane then click the left arrow button,
, to move those components
back into the 'Available' pane.
Click the double arrow button,
, to move all components from the 'Selected'
pane back into the 'Available' pane.
8.
When you've selected all the components you want to view for this Status Group,
click the Column Headers tab to display the Column Headers page.
For more on this page, refer to “Column Headers Page” on page 64.
Use this page to customize the arrangement of the columns on the Status Viewer
page.
9. Make changes as required on the Column Headers page.
10. Click OK to return to the Status Viewer.
The configuration for this status group is automatically saved.
62
Creating Status Groups
MAN007-0211
Status Groups Page
The status groups page looks like this:
It includes these combo boxes, buttons, and windows:
Status
Group:
Click this combo box to select the status group you want to display.
If you want to create a new status group, select <New>.
Click this button to delete the currently displayed status group from
the system. A message appears asking you whether you are sure
you want to delete this item. Click Yes to delete the displayed status
group.
View as:
Click the radio button that describes the components you want to
view on the Status Viewer during the specified status group.
Click All to display all relevant components.
Available
This window displays all the components you specified to show in
the 'View as' section. Select from this window and the selection
appears in the 'Selected' window.
Selected
This window displays all the components you selected from the
'Available' window and included using one of the right arrow
buttons.
Click this button to select only those components you have
highlighted in the 'Available' window. They now appear in the
'Selected' window.
Click this button to select all the components appearing in the
'Available' window. All the components now appear in the 'Selected'
window.
Creating Status Groups
63
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this button to remove one or more highlighted components
from the 'Selected' window and return them to the 'Available'
window.
Click this button to remove all displayed components from the
'Selected' window and return them to the 'Available' window.
For information on the Column Headers page, see the next topic.
Column Headers Page
When you select the Column Headers tab from the Status Viewer Properties dialog
box, a screen like this example appears:
Use this page to define which columns appear on the Status Viewer for the specified
Status Group.
To customize the Status Viewer for this specific status group:
1.
From the 'Object' combo box, select the object whose properties you want to
define.
The properties specific to the selected object appear in the lower window.
2.
Check the boxes of all those properties you want displayed on the Status Viewer
for the selected object.
Only checked items appear as columns for that object on the Status Viewer; all
unchecked items do not appear on the Status Viewer.
3.
4.
5.
Rearrange the displayed columns as required.
• Click the Move Up button to move a selected item up in priority. Each click
moves the selected item one column left on the Status Viewer. The nearer the
top an object appears in the 'Check an item...' window, the farther to the left it
appears on the Status Viewer.
• Click the Move Down button to move a selected item down the list. Each
click moves the selected column to the right by one column on the Status
Viewer. The nearer the bottom of the window an object appears, the farther to
the right it appears on the Status Viewer.
Repeat Steps 1 - 3 for each object you need to customize this status group.
When you're finished, click OK to return to the Status Viewer.
Changes to the look of the Viewer for this Status Group are reflected on the screen.
64
Creating Status Groups
MAN007-0211
Status Messages
Here is a complete list of status messages currently displayed by the Status Viewer
together with their meaning:
Message
Meaning
Possible Response
Active
This device is currently active
or actuated.
None required.
Inactive
This device is currently inactive
or de-actuated.
None required.
Open Circuit
Velocity has detected that
there is no DTLM input.
Check to make sure the DTLM
is connected properly.
Secure
No alarm, no tamper, and
relay OFF.
None required.
Note: A door can have a Secure
status even if it is being
tampered with, so it's
important to monitor the
Status and Alarm Viewers.
Unlocked
Relay ON.
None required.
Masked
Input is masked.
None required.
Door open
Switch open.
None required.
Short
Velocity has detected a short
in the circuit.
Check the circuit and
connections between the
controller and this device.
Noisy
Velocity has detected unusual
static or noise on this line.
Check the circuit and
connections between the
controller and this device.
Out of spec
Velocity has detected that the
voltage on this line is currently
not within acceptable limits.
Check the circuit and
connections between the
controller and this device.
Relays have two possible normal states:


Energized (LED On)
De-energized (LED Off)
Inputs have two possible normal states:


Normally Open
Normally Closed
Creating Status Groups
65
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
66
Creating Status Groups
MAN007-0211
Graphics Designer
This section provides instructions on using those features in Graphics Designer
generally performed by operators.
Although Designer can also be used to design badges and maps, these features are
only available to administrators. For more on these features, refer to the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Only a few qualified operators are assigned the role(s) necessary to enter Design
Mode, design a drawing, design a badge template, and place icons on that drawing. A
few more operators may have the role(s) required to control the objects that are
placed on a map.
Most operators possess a role enabling them to enter Graphics and perform the
following tasks:








Display drawings
Pan and zoom drawings
View linked maps
Monitor the status of all icons (objects) on the map
Control objects on a map
Acknowledge and clear alarms from a map
Execute command sets
Display credential information
67
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Displaying a Drawing
Unlike most programs, Designer opens all existing drawings when the module is
opened. Your task is not to open the drawing but rather to select it from the drawing
list. In effect, there is no Open function, nor is there a Close function as there is with
most programs.
The reason for this is that all drawings and graphics in Designer are stored in Velocity's
SQL database rather than in separate files. This guarantees that your graphics and floor
plans are stored in the same manner as your personnel data and cannot be readily
accessed by an unwanted user.
To select and display an existing drawing:
1.
From the menu tool bar, select Modes > Graphic.
All drawings currently stored in the Velocity database appear on the canvas with
their own drawing tab displayed.
2.
Do one of these:
• From the drawing selection tab bar, click the tab that corresponds to the
drawing you want to display.
• From the Directory pane, expand the Drawings folder until the drawing you
want appears. Double click the drawing you want.
• On the Navigation Icon Tool Bar, click the
button to see the previous
drawing in the drawing list. Click the
button to see the next drawing in the
drawing list.
The drawing appears in the canvas window.
Switching between Drawings
Whenever you open Designer you automatically open all drawings. These drawings are
displayed in a stack on the canvas.
Hint
You can tell how many drawings you have by looking either at the drawing
selection tab bar at the bottom of the canvas or in the Directory pane under the
VSO folder.
To switch between drawings, do one of these:



At the drawing selection tab, click the tab that corresponds to the drawing you want.
In the Directory pane, expand the tree until the current drawing appears. Click on
the drawing in the drawing tree.
On the Navigation Icon Tool Bar, click the
button to see the previous drawing in
the drawing list. Click the
button to see the next drawing in the drawing list.
The drawing appears in the canvas window.
68
Displaying a Drawing
MAN007-0211
Panning Drawings
Panning is the act of moving the center of a map or drawing from one spot to another.
Panning is used for maps that are larger than the Graphics window can accommodate.
For example, if the Graphics window is showing the northeast corner of a floor and you
want to see the southeast corner, use the Pan function to move the map's viewing
frame.
To pan a map:
1.
2.
3.
Panning Drawings
Go to Live Mode.
Bring up the drawing you want to pan.
Do one of these:
• Right click in the canvas. A hand cursor icon appears. With the right button
pressed, pull the canvas frame in whichever direction you require.
• Open the Pan and Zoom Pane. In the Pan and Zoom pane, use your mouse
to move the drawing around on the canvas.
69
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Viewing Linked Maps
The Graphics module enables the qualified operator to drill down from a main map to
more detailed maps or drill up from a detail map to a general map.
To view a linked map:
1.
2.
Make sure Designer is in Live mode.
Move your mouse across the canvas to the Link object,
.
The map to which this object is linked appears in the text box. The normal cursor
pointer changes to a pointing finger.
3.
Click the left mouse button.
The map jumps to whichever map is currently linked to that location.

70
This procedure only works if a qualified operator or administrator has
previously imported the required maps then linked them.
Viewing Linked Maps
MAN007-0211
Monitoring Placed Objects
Most operators have permission to monitor the state of the icons on maps. When an
alarm occurs, the affected icon on the map displays a message like this example:
In general:






door open = alarm contact is active
green border around door = RQE has not been pushed
red door = tamper switch
yellow background = noisy, shorted, out of spec, or open circuit
yellow door = contact in open state
red background = DOTL
Icons show their states with a combination of shapes and color as shown below:
Icon
Type
Icon
Description / States
Special
This indicates that this map is linked to another map either as a
submap or an overview of the current map. Click this icon to
see the linked map. The name of the map linked to this map
appears in the text box.
This object indicates that it is associated with a command set.
Click this icon to execute the command set. The name of the
command set appears in the text box.
Indicates either the AXIS Digital Camera Viewer or the Quick
Link Viewer. Click on this object and the corresponding viewer
appears.
Controllers
The controller's memory battery is secure.
The controller's memory battery is bad.
The controller's memory battery is bad and the unit is in alarm.
Monitoring Placed Objects
71
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Icon
Type
Icon
Description / States
Doors (For more on door contacts, refer to Inputs.)
Top view. Door is closed. RQE normal. Alarm tamper secure.
Input unmasked. Door relay OFF.
All alarm points are normal.
Top view. Door is open. Contact is open (alarm is active). RQE
has been pushed.
Top view. RQE is active.
Top view. Door Tamper alarm is active.
Top view. Door input masked.
Top view. Door relay ON.
Front view. Door is closed and locked.
Front view. Door is unmasked and/or unlocked.
Front view. Door is open and unlocked.
Front view. Door masked and unlocked.
Readers
ScramblePad Reader is currently being used and is active.
Prox Reader is currently being used and is active.
Finger Reader is currently being used and is active.
Inputs
Line Module input is open or active and unmasked.
Line Module input is open or active and masked.
72
Monitoring Placed Objects
MAN007-0211
Icon
Type
Icon
Description / States
Line Module input is closed and unmasked.
Line Module input is closed and masked.
Motion sensor is closed or unmasked.
Motion sensor is masked.
Motion sensor is open and active.
Relays
Relay or expansion relay is an annunciator and is inactive. No
power is currently applied to this circuit.
Relay or expansion relay is an annunciator and is energized.
Power is currently applied to this circuit.
Relay or expansion relay is inactive. No power is currently
applied to this circuit.
Relay or expansion relay is active. Power is currently applied to
this circuit.
XBox
XBox is online and active.
Cameras
Indicating a dome camera. Click on this camera icon to bring up
the CCTV Viewer or DVR Viewer showing video input from that
camera.
Using the CCTV Viewer or DVR Viewer you should be able to
control this camera as required.
Indicating a fixed camera. Click on this camera icon to bring up
the CCTV Viewer or DVR Viewer showing video input from that
camera.
This camera cannot pan, tilt, or swivel.
Central Stations
Indicating a fire alarm receiver. A red border indicates alarm or
tampering.
Monitoring Placed Objects
73
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Icon
Type
Icon
Description / States
Indicating a fire alarm account, such as a building or campus. A
red border indicates an alarm in this account.
Indicating a fire alarm area. A red border indicates an alarm is
detected in this area.
Indicating a smoke or fire detector. A red border indicates an
alarm is detected at this detector.
Indicating a fire-pull station. A red border indicates that this
station was activated.
Indicating an intrusion. A red border indicates that this intrusion
detector was activated by a breaking window or unauthorized
entry.
Most operators should not have the permissions or rights needed to control placed
objects.
In addition to the predefined VIOs, you can also create new VIOs and customize
behavior for them.
74
Monitoring Placed Objects
MAN007-0211
Controlling Placed Objects
An operator qualified to view drawings such as backdrops and maps in Velocity can use
these maps for two main tasks:


Monitoring placed object status
Controlling placed objects
The second of these activities is described below.
Once VIOs are placed on maps they can be controlled in a number of ways:






acknowledge alarms
clear alarms
enter a note
perform access functions
perform control functions
refresh the point's status
To control an placed object:
1.
At the appropriate map, right click on the placed object you want to control.
A pop-up menu appears. The number and type of options you see here depend
on the type of device represented by the placed object.
For example, if this is an input, you will only see functions that deal with inputs.
All objects include the Acknowledge Alarms... and the Clear Alarms... options.
2.
Select the option you require.
Each of these options is explained below.
Select this
option:
Acknowledge
Alarms...
To do this:
Acknowledge this alarm.
When Velocity detects more than one alarm associated with
the same point at the same time (for example, Out-of-spec
and Open-Too-Long), selecting this option causes the Alarm
Selection dialog box to appear. Select the specific alarm you
want to acknowledge.
You can also acknowledge an alarm through the Alarm
Viewer. For more on this, refer to “Acknowledging/Clearing
Alarms” on page 76.
Clear Alarms...
Clear the acknowledged object.
When Velocity detects more than one alarm associated with
the same point at the same time (for example, Out-of-spec
and Open-Too-Long), selecting this option causes the Alarm
Selection dialog box to appear. Select the specific alarm you
want to clear.
You can also clear an alarm through the Alarm Viewer. For
more on this, refer to “Acknowledging/Clearing Alarms” on
page 76.
Controlling Placed Objects
75
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Select this
option:
To do this:
Access
Functions >
Perform one of three access functions on the placed object's
associated device.
A submenu appears:
Select one of the available functions. This performs the
specified access function on the device represented by the
selected placed object.
For more on these access functions, refer to Access, Alarm,
and Control Functions.
Control
Functions >
Perform one of several control functions on the placed
object's associated device for inputs or outputs.
A submenu appears:
Select one of the available control functions. This performs
the specified control function on the device represented by
the selected placed object.
For more on these control functions, refer to “Access &
Control Functions” on page 203.

If you have a version of Velocity that supports Central Stations, you
cannot acknowledge or clear these alarms. Fire alarms must be
acknowledged or cleared from the local fire alarm control panel.
Acknowledging/Clearing Alarms
When an icon on a map becomes alarmed, its appearance changes as shown in
“Monitoring Placed Objects” on page 71.
If this occurs, you can do one of five things:





Acknowledge a selected alarm
Acknowledge all currently displayed alarms
Clear a selected alarm
Clear all currently displayed alarms
Enter a note for a selected alarm
Each of these operations is explained below.
76
Controlling Placed Objects
MAN007-0211
To acknowledge a selected alarm:
1.
Open the Alarm Queue pane and investigate the current status of the alarmed
device.
If an object is alarmed, a message also appears at the placed object on the canvas
indicating the nature of the alarm as shown in this example:
The alarm should beep just as it would in the Alarm Viewer.
2.
Perform the measures appropriate to ensure that the site is secure.
This normally entails checking the area indicated by the icon or following the
instructions indicated for the type of alarm this is. Instructions on how to handle
particular types of alarms are frequently included in the lower pane of the Alarm
Queue pane.
Once the area has been secured, you can return the icon to its unalarmed state by
acknowledging the alarm.
3.
Acknowledge the alarm in one of two ways:
• In the Alarm Queue pane, either right click on the alarm object and select
Acknowledge from the drop-down list, or click to select the alarm then click
the Acknowledge Selected icon,
, from the Alarm Queue icon bar.
• From the canvas, right click on the alarmed point. Select Acknowledge
Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm associated
with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears like the example
below. Select the alarm you want to acknowledge from the list and OK.
Once acknowledged, the object is grayed out, reflecting the acknowledgement.
The alarm is simultaneously acknowledged on the Alarm Viewer and the beeping
stops.
To acknowledge all alarms:
1.
Open the Alarm Queue pane and investigate the current status of the alarmed
devices.
If an object is alarmed, a message also appears at the placed object on the canvas
indicating the nature of the alarm as shown in this example:
Controlling Placed Objects
77
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The alarm should beep just as it would in the Alarm Viewer.
2.
Perform the measures appropriate to ensure that the site is secure.
This normally entails checking the area indicated by the icon or following the
instructions indicated for the type of alarm this is. Instructions on how to handle
particular types of alarms are frequently included in the lower pane of the Alarm
Queue pane.
Once the area has been secured, you can return the icon to its unalarmed state by
acknowledging the alarm.
3.
Acknowledge all alarms in one of two ways:
• In the Alarm Queue pane, click the Acknowledge All icon,
, from the Alarm
Queue icon bar.
• From the canvas, right click on the alarmed point. Select Acknowledge
Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm associated
with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears like the example
below. Select all the alarms on this list by clicking the Select All button then
click OK.
To clear a selected alarm:
1.
2.
Acknowledge the alarm as described above.
Clear alarms in one of two ways:
• From the Alarm Queue pane, either right click on the alarm you want to clear
and select Clear from the drop-down list, or click to select the alarm then click
the Clear Selected icon,
, from the Alarm Queue icon bar.
• From the canvas, right click on the alarmed or acknowledged point. Select
Clear Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm
associated with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears, like the
example shown above. Select the alarm you want to clear from the list and
OK.
The alarm is cleared from the Alarm Queue pane.
To clear all alarms:
1.
2.
Acknowledge the alarm as described above.
Clear all alarms in one of two ways:
• From the Alarm Queue pane, click the Clear All icon,
, from the Alarm
Queue icon bar.
• From the canvas, right click on the alarmed or acknowledged point. Select
Clear Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm
associated with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears, like the
example shown above. Select all the alarms on this list by clicking the Select
All button then click OK.
All alarms are cleared from the Alarm Queue pane.
To enter comments about an alarm:
1.
78
Open the Alarm Queue pane and acknowledge the alarm as described above.
Controlling Placed Objects
MAN007-0211
2.
In the Alarm Queue pane, do one of these:
• Right click on the acknowledged alarm. Select Add Note from the pop-up list.
• Select the acknowledged alarm then click the Add Note icon,
, from the
Alarm Queue icon bar.
The Operator Comments dialog box appears like this example:
The name of the currently selected alarm object appears.
3.
4.
In the text field, enter a note to describe information about the alarm.
When you're finished, click OK.
The comments appear below the acknowledged alarm, like the following example:
Icons present themselves for acknowledgment automatically according to the queue
configuration. This enables the operator to acknowledge alarms whether they appear
on a single map or on multiple maps without having to bore down or zoom out of map
hierarchies.
Suspending Alarm Switching
Velocity alerts the operator to alarms by queueing them in an order set by the Alarm
Options page of the Preferences option (see “Alarm Options Preferences” on page 50
in the Velocity Administrator’s Guide). When new alarms come in, the alarm stack is
reshuffled in accordance with the priority or chronology of the alarm.
While this is an obvious and efficient way to view alarms in the Alarm Viewer, it does
not always make for top efficiency in Graphics, since Velocity automatically jumps to
the highest priority alarm object, even if that object is on a different map. This means
that before you actually finish examining a current alarm on one page, Velocity may
jump to another map in order to draw your attention to a newer alarm.
For example, say you are trying to view video associated with an alarmed point at Door
2 and a second alarm comes in at Door 1. Because you have set up Door 1 as either
later or higher priority than Door 2, the Door 1 alarm point is instantly activated and the
Door 2 point is passed over. Use the Suspend Alarm Switching option to turn off the
alarm jumping that Velocity ordinarily does and enable the operator to finish his current
investigation before turning to the later alarm point.
Controlling Placed Objects
79
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To suspend alarm switching:


At the menu tool bar in Designer Graphics, select View > Suspend Alarm
Switching.
At the icon tool bar in Graphics mode, click
.
A check mark appears next to this option. Alarm switching is suspended. To reenable
this function, choose this option again and the suspend alarm switching feature is
toggled off.
80
Controlling Placed Objects
MAN007-0211
Executing Command Sets
If a command set is placed on a map, you can execute it using this procedure.
To execute a command set:
1.
2.
3.
Make sure you are in Live Mode.
Display the map or backdrop where the command set exists.
Move your cursor across the canvas to the place where the command set object
exists.
The cursor arrow changes to a finger.
4.
Click the command set object.
The program automatically executes the command set indicated.
Executing Command Sets
81
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Show Credential Information
This feature enables a qualified operator to automatically display the name,
photograph, and signature of the person who has just entered/exited a door.
Before qualified operators can use this feature, a door must be enabled to use this
function.
To enable this feature within Graphics:
1.
2.
Open a graphic that is populated with one or more door objects.
Right click on the door for which you want to show credential information.
A pop-up list appears.
3.
Select Show Credential Information.
From now on, this door is enabled for automatic display of credential information
whenever a credential is used on that door.
When a credential is used on the enabled door, the credential pop-up appears. This
pop-up information can include name, ID, and photograph as well as the time and date
when the credential associated with this person was last used.

Before a photo will display, the enrolled person defined for this system
must have photographs assigned to their Personal Information form
through Enrollment Manager.
From that point on, when any person enters or exits this door, a window is displayed
on the screen. If no photo is selected for the person in question, only the default
credential information appears.
82
Show Credential Information
MAN007-0211
Enrollment Manager
Use the Enrollment Manager to add card and code holders to the system. Essentially
this process involves combining a credential (user profile) with a photograph and/or
signature to create an access privilege for a unique user.
The result of the enrollment process is:



a badge that can used to gain access to the facility via a reader.
a code that can be used to gain access to the facility via a keypad.
both a code and badge that gains access to the facility via reader/keypad.
To find basic information on using Enrollment Manager:
Topics
See page:
Opening Enrollment Manager
84
Enrolling a New Person
97
Finding a Person
106
Previewing a Badge
142
Printing a Badge
144
Creating a Credential
146
83
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Opening Enrollment Manager
To start Enrollment Manager:
Method 1
1.
2.
Open Velocity. The Velocity screen appears.
Do one of these:
• From the Velocity icon tool bar, click the Enrollment Manager icon,
.
• From the Velocity system tree window, select the top level folder,
Configuration. Move to the Components window and double click Enrollment
Manager,
.
The main Enrollment Manager screen appears.
Method 2
1.
2.
Open Velocity. The Velocity main screen appears.
From the menu bar, select Console > Enrollment Manager.
The main Enrollment Manager screen appears.
Method 3
1.
2.
Open Velocity. The Velocity main screen appears.
Press F3.
The main Enrollment Manager screen appears.
84
Opening Enrollment Manager
MAN007-0211
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
The Enrollment Manager screen looks like this example when you first bring it up:
This screen involves these panes and fields:
Menu bar
This menu bar provides many options for features within the
Enrollment Manager. For more on this, refer to “Enrollment
Manager Menu Bar” on page 87.
Tool bar
This bar includes two items:
• Search (see page 106)
• Explore (see page 120)
Person
Group pane
The pane in which person groups are created, modified, and
displayed.
The Everyone person group can not be deleted or added to.
People Tree
pane
This pane initially possesses four elements: the Add New Person
option, the Add Person from Template option, and the
Unassigned Credentials directory.
Once you have assigned persons to the system, each person also
appears.
For more on this, refer to “People Tree Pane” on page 89.
Quick Find
field
Use this field to perform limited searches of people within the
system by last name only.
For more on this, refer to “Quick Find” on page 113.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
85
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Credential
pane
This pane lists all credentials currently assigned to this person. In
addition, both the Add New Credential and Add New
Credential from Template options appear in this area as shown
in this example:
You can perform several tasks from this window by right clicking a
credential after it has been assigned.
The Credentials pane also contains a scrollbar at the bottom which
can be used to scroll through all of the available columns. To
arrange the columns or credential list, refer to “Column
Management” on page 35.
Personal
Information
pane
This pane displays all currently defined information for whichever
person is selected. For more on this, refer to “Personal Information
Pane” on page 90.
Form tabs
The Personal Information form consists of up to 13 tabs: one
general page, 10 pages of UDFs, one page of Person Groups, and
one page of Additional Images. For more on this, refer to “Personal
Information Pane” on page 90.
Photo
Capture
button
Click this button to bring up the video capture screen.
Signature
Capture
button
86
For more on this, refer to “Capturing a Photo” on page 128.
Once a picture occupies this frame, you can either email the image
or save it to another location by right clicking on the image. For
more on these topics, refer to “E-mailing a Photo” on page 137
and “Saving a Photo to Another Source” on page 138.
Click this button to bring up the signature capture screen.
For more on this, refer to “Capturing a Signature” on page 126.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Selection
buttons
Click on one or more of these buttons to:
• Add a new credential (see page 147)
• Assign an existing credential (page 101)
• Preview a badge (page 142)
• Print a badge (page 144)
In the row below this, there are three possible buttons:
Apply — click this button to move information entered in the
Personal Information Form to the Velocity database.
Undo — click this button to undo the most recent personnel
entries. All fields are blanked.
Scan — click this button to start the attached scanner or PIV reader
and populate the current Personal Information Form automatically
with the detected information.
For more on this feature, refer to “Scanning Enrollment Data” on
page 139.
Status field
This field displays information about the current employee
database including:
• Number of People currently enrolled
• Number of Credentials currently assigned
• Number of Credentials currently unassigned
• Number of Guest Credentials currently defined
Enrollment Manager Menu Bar
The Enrollment Manager has a menu bar with these options:
Each option is discussed on the following pages.
Two of these options display other menu options:
Option
Sub-Option
File
Batch Enroll Credentials—this enables you to enroll a large number
of people at the same time using batch enrollment methods.
For more on this, refer to “Batch Enroll Card Credentials” on page 123.
Close—Exit Enrollment Manager and return to the main Velocity screen.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
87
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Option
Sub-Option
View
Show Last Access for Credentials— when checked, this displays the
date and time in the Credential window's ‘Last Access’ column as well
as the ‘Last Door’ column indicating the last door for which this
credential was used. This is a toggle option.
Show UDF Summary—when checked, this option displays data
entered for the first 14 UDFs in the People Tree pane. (You must scroll
to the right in the People Tree pane in order to see these additional
User Defined columns.) This is a toggle option. By default, this is
unchecked. When this option is unchecked, the load time for several
thousand users has been reduced from minutes to a few seconds.
Note: Neither of these options takes effect until you have refreshed the screen,
either by pressing the F5 key or performing some other task.
Tools
Find Person...—this enables you to find a specific person in the
database. For more on this, refer to “Finding a Person” on page 106.
Find Credential...—this enables you to find a specific credential in the
database. For more on this, refer to “Finding a Card Credential” on page
110.
Report Manager...—this enables you to open Report Manager without
leaving Enrollment Manager. For more on this topic, refer to the chapter,
“Report Manager,” starting on page 999 in the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Badge Designer...—this enables you to open Badge Designer without
leaving Enrollment Manager. For more on this topic, refer to the chapter,
“Badge & Graphic Designer,” starting on page 439 in the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Person Filters...—this enables you to limit a search for employees
using previously defined Person Filters. For more on this, refer to
“Person Filters” on page 112.
User Defined Fields...—this enables you to modify a user-defined
field. For more on this, refer to “Changing User-Defined Fields” on page
780 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Device Configuration...–this enables you to configure credential
enrollment stations, signature capture devices, card and passport
scanners, and PIV readers for use with Velocity. For more on this, see
“Device Configuration” on page 787 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s
Guide.
Preferences...–this enables you to change the defaults in Enrollment
Manager for print control, quick find, and credential shortcuts. For more
on this, see “Preferences” on page 898 in the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Help
88
Consult the help file for information on using Velocity.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
People Tree Pane
The People Tree Pane looks like this example:
The pane includes the following elements and options:





Hint
Click the Add Person option to bring up a new Personal Information form. For
more on this, refer to “Enrolling a New Person” on page 97.
Click the Add Person from Template option to bring up the Select Person
Template dialog box. When you select a Person Template from this list, you create a
new Personal Information form with fields already populated with the values
specified in the selected person template. For more on Person Templates, refer to
the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. For more on using Person Templates in
Enrollment Manager, refer to “Person Templates” on page 99.
Click the Unassigned Credentials option to view all currently existing unassigned
credentials in the Credentials pane. These include all credentials that were once
assigned to another user but have since expired or have been de-assigned for
some reason.
By default, all enrolled people appear in this pane. If you select a specific Person
Group (other than Everyone) from the Person Group pane, the people belonging
to that group appear in this pane. For more on Person Groups, refer to “Person
Groups” on page 120.
The scrollbar at the bottom of this pane enables you to scroll through all of the
available columns of information from this pane. While you can't see most of these
fields without scrolling, they are there. Initially, there should be four columns in this
pane corresponding to the basic four possible fields at the top of the Personal
Information form on the General tab. The more UDFs you define, the more
columns can appear. To rearrange the people in this list or to reorder the columns,
refer to Column Management. However, if you select View > Show UDF Field
Summary from the Option Bar, up to 18 columns appear in this pane
corresponding to the 18 fields that appear on the General tab. To suppress these
fields, simply deselect the Show UDF Field Summary option.
Under normal circumstances, you won't need to display all these columns of
information in this narrow pane. However, when you are looking for a specific
person in a long list of people, having access to this much information can prove
extremely useful in finding the right one.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
89
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Person Group Subfolders
Some person groups can become very large indeed and include members that are
diverse enough to be categorized into subgroups. Velocity offers a method for creating
subgroups by creating subfolders under person groups.
To create a subfolder within a person group:
1.
Display the Person Group pane.
All person groups this operator has permission to view will appear in the pane. The
Everybody person group is a special group and can neither be deleted nor have
subfolders added on to it.
2.
Right click on the person group to which you want to add subfolders.
A pop-up option list appears.
3.
Select Add Subfolder.
You are prompted to enter a name for this folder.
4.
In the text box, enter a name for this subfolder and click OK.
The new folder appears under the selected person group.
Just as with person groups, you can:







add members to this folder (see page 121)
edit persons within this folder (see page 98)
create a sub-subfolder under this folder
rename this folder
delete this folder
search the folder (see page 107)
use a person filter to search the folder (see page 112)
Personal Information Pane
There are three tabbed property sheets shown on this dialog box:




90
General property sheet
Tab1 — Tab10 property sheets
Person Groups property sheet
Additional Images property sheet
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
General Property Sheet
The general page of the Personal Information pane looks like this example:
Basic information is supplied on this page:
ID
This is a read-only field generated by Velocity. Each new person
has a unique ID.
Record Last
Updated
This is a read-only field generated by Velocity indicating the date
(MM/DD/YYYY) when this record was last updated.
Windows Control Panel determines the date format.
Name—This is a group of required fields that appear near the top of the panel. All
the other fields are replaceable.
Prefix
Select a prefix for this person from the pull-down option list.
Options include: Mr., Mrs., and Ms.
First Name
This is a required field. Type a first name for this person.
Middle Name
Type a middle name or initial for this person.
Last Name
This is a required field. Type a last name for this person.
Suffix
Select a suffix for this person from the pull-down option list.
Options include: Sr. and Jr.
User Defined
Fields
Type or select in each field. You can specify what each field
means using the User Defined Setup option. Using this option
you can also assign UDFs to one of the additional UDF tabs.
For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Each of these fields can be linked to a databound text object
placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic Designer.
For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Add New
Credential
Click this button to bring up the Credential dialog box. Make
changes as required to this form. The credential is associated
with that person.
If you want to apply an existing Credential Template to this
person, double click the Add New Credential from Template
option in the Credentials pane above this panel.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
91
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Assign
Credential
Click this button to assign an existing credential to this person. A
list of currently available credentials appears. Select one of these
and the Credential dialog box for that credential appears. That
credential is now assigned to that person.
Preview
Badge
Click this button and the person's badge appears. This only
happens if you have already assigned a badge template on the
Credential dialog box.
For more on creating badge layouts, refer to Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Print Badge
Click the Print button to print the badge. For more on this, refer
to “Printing a Badge,” starting on page 144.
Double click this button to capture or acquire the user's
photograph. The Image Preview dialog box (see page 134)
appears.
The image defined here can be linked to a databound image
object placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic
Designer. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
If you need to define additional images, select the Additional
Images tab.
Double click this button to capture or acquire the user's
signature. The Image Preview dialog box appears (see page
133).
The signature defined here can be linked to a databound image
object placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic
Designer.
92
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
TAB1 - TAB10 Property Sheets
A TAB page of the personal information form looks like this example:
TAB 1 TAB 10
By default, Tab 1 displays UDF 15 - 32; however, you can
increase this number as needed. While you can display up to
999 UDFs on the Tab 1 page, you can also assign fields to any
of the additional Tab pages as required. For more on this, refer
to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Each field here can be linked to a databound text object placed
on a badge template.
Groups Property Sheet
This tab enables a qualified operator to add this person to one or more person groups.
The Groups tab of the Personal Information form appears between the TAB 10 tab and
the Additional Images tab. It includes all the person groups currently defined by
Enrollment Manager.
To add a person to a person group from this tab:
1.
Click this tab.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
93
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
A page like this appears:
2.
Check each person group or person group subfolder to which you want to add this
person.
If you made a change by checking or unchecking on the person groups or
subfolders, the Apply button is activated.
3.
Click Apply.
The next time you open one of the modified person groups, the person is included in
that group's list.
Additional Images Property Sheet
This sheet only appears after you have defined a new person and clicked Apply, or
selected an existing person from the People Tree pane.
The Additional Images tab provides an image that looks like this example:
This page includes the following fields and buttons:
Image
Placeholders
A window listing all the image placeholders currently defined by
the Additional Images page of the User Defined Setup screen.
When you select a placeholder from this list, the Update
Image... button is activated.
94
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Update
Image...
Click this button to import or capture an image. The process is
identical to that used to capture/import the main photograph on
the General page.
The image defined here can be linked to a databound image
object placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic
Designer.
For more on this, refer to “Inserting a Databound Image” on
page 514.
Remove
Image
Click this button to remove the selected image from the Current
Image frame.
Current Image
This window displays the captured or imported image. If you
need to remove it, click the Remove Image button.
Description:
A text box where you can enter a title or other information about
the added image.
For more on this, refer to “Additional Images” on page 136.
If you need to customize the look of this form, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s
Guide.
Personal Information Form
The personal information form appears in the Enrollment Manager's Personal
Information pane whenever you select a pre-existing credential or create a new user.
Initially the form appears in the Enrollment Manager like this example:
The form includes vital security information about the new user such as name, address,
telephone number, employee number, social security number, and so on.
Fields can be customized and changed using the User Defined Fields tool.
In addition to the General tab, the form also includes two other tabs:

TAB 1 - TAB 10 tabs—By default, TAB 1 displays UDF 15 – 32; however, you can
increase this number as needed. While you can display an infinite number of UDFs
on the TAB 1 page, you can also assign fields to any of the additional TAB pages as
required.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
95
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
These pages are only populated if you have defined more than fifteen user-defined
fields using the User Defined Fields... tool. TAB 2 – 15 remain blank unless a
qualified operator assigns UDFs to them. A tab can only be opened, if the operator
currently viewing this screen has permission to open it. In this way, a valuable piece
of information, such as a person's social security number, can be isolated on a UDF
tab which can be made inaccessible to most operators.



96
Groups tab — This tab enables you to add this enrolled person to one or more
existing person groups. For more on this, see “Groups Property Sheet” on page 93.
Additional Images tab — this tab enables you to add other images to a person's
profile, such as side views, hand views, etc. For more on this, refer to “Additional
Images” on page 136.
If you need to customize the look of this form, refer to Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s
Guide.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Enrolling a New Person
Velocity uses the generic term ‘Persons’ to refer to all people who must access a facility,
including employees (part-time and full-time), contractors, and personnel working for
companies that supply services.
To enroll (add) a new person:
1.
Open Enrollment Manager as detailed in “Opening Enrollment Manager” on page
84.
The Enrollment Manager screen appears.
2.
From the People Tree pane, click Add New Person.
A blank Personal Information form appears in the Personal Information pane.
3.
Supply information to the existing fields as required.
At a minimum, you must type in the new person's first and last name.
4.
Enter the required information to any fields listed on this page.
To customize a user-defined field, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
5.
6.
7.
If you need to fill out more fields than can be accommodated on the General
page, click the TAB 1 — TAB 10 as required.
Enter values for any user-defined fields appearing on these additional pages.
Click the Apply button.
Notice that several folders appear in the Credentials pane.
8.
Double click the photograph frame to import or capture a photograph.
The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a
photograph, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133.
9.
To capture or import a signature, double click the signature frame,
located below the photo frame.
,
The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a
signature, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133.
10. If you need to add or capture any additional images, click the Additional Images
tab.
The Additional Images page appears.
11. Select any placeholders you need from this page then import or capture these
additional images as needed. The import and/or capture process is identical to the
one used on the General page.

Before you can include additional images, you must first define the
requisite placeholders using the User Defined Fields option. For more on
this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
12. Assign a credential to the new person or create a new credential for this person,
using one of these procedures:
Enrolling a New Person
To assign:
Do this:
A new credential
Double click the Add New Credential button on the
form, or double click the Add New Credential folder
in the Credentials pane.
97
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To assign:
Do this:
A credential template
to a new credential
Click the Add New Credential from Template
folder in the Credentials pane.
The Select Credential Template dialog box appears.
Select the template you want to use and click OK.
An existing,
unassigned credential
Click the Assign Credential button on the form.
The Credential dialog box appears.
13. Fill out or change the Credential dialog box property sheets as required. At a
minimum you must:
• if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN
• if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code
• assign a valid door group or function group
14. When you're finished, click OK.
You are returned to the Personal Information form. The newly-assigned credential
appears in the Credential pane.
15. Perform required tasks in the Credential pane.
16. If you are creating a badge for this person, click the Preview Badge button to view
the way the final badge will look.

In order for this feature to work, you must have assigned a Badge
Template on the Credential dialog box.
17. Click the Print Badge button to create a badge for this person.

In order for this feature to work, you must have a badge printer
connected to and configured for this Velocity workstation.
If you need to create a new badge for a new credential, you can access the Badge
Designer through the Tools menu option. You can also access the Report Manager
through the Tools menu option.
If you need to change the fields appearing on the form, see the Velocity Administrator
Guide.
Editing Multiple Persons
This feature enables the qualified operator to change one or more values on a person's
Personal Information Form for multiple people.
To edit multiple persons:
1.
2.
3.
98
Select multiple people from the People Tree pane.
Right click within the highlighted area.
Select Edit Persons.
Enrolling a New Person
MAN007-0211
The Multiple Person Edit form appears like the example below:
This screen includes most of the elements of the Personal Information Form,
including the UDF values. In addition, notice that a note appears below UDF fields
indicating the number of people currently selected for changes.
4.
5.
Check each box to the left of each field you need to change for all selected
persons, then supply a new value in the text or pick list.
Click Apply or OK.
The value in each checked field is changed for those people selected.
For example, if you want to move three people from Research and Development to
Administration, you would check the Division field and select Administration from the
pick list. When you click Apply or OK, Velocity automatically reassigns the selected
people to the Administration division.
Person Templates
Use Person Templates to expedite the task of assigning information to people being
enrolled. Simply apply an existing person template to a new person and the field values
assigned to the person template populate the relevant fields for that person.
To use a person template to enroll a new person:
1.
From the Enrollment Manager's Person Tree pane, double click the Add Person
from Template option.
The Select Person Template appears like this example:
Only those person templates currently defined for this system appear in the
window.
2.
Enrolling a New Person
In the person template window, click to select the template you want to apply to
this new person.
99
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
3.
Click OK.
A new Personal Information Form appears. Fields on that form are populated with
values taken from the selected person template.
For example, if you defined a person template like this example:
then selected that person template when enrolling a new person like this:
those values entered in the selected person template are used to automatically
populate the Personal Information form for the new person, like this:
100
Enrolling a New Person
MAN007-0211
Assigning a Credential to a Person
To assign a credential to a person:
To assign:
Refer to:
An existing credential to a person
“Assigning an Existing Credential to a Person”
on page 101.
A new credential to a person
“Assigning a New Credential to a Person” on
page 103.
A credential template to a new
credential
“Assigning a Credential Template to a Person”
on page 104.
A person to an unassigned
credential
“Assigning a Person to an Existing Credential”
on page 103.
Once a person has been assigned one or more credentials, the credentials appear in
the Credential window above the Personal Information form, like this example:
You can perform a number of tasks from this window by right clicking the credential.
Once you've assigned one or more credentials to this person, capture a photograph or
signature as required.
For more on creating credentials, refer to “Credentials” on page 146.
Assigning an Existing Credential to a Person
To assign an existing credential to a person:
1.
2.
From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to
assign an existing, unassigned credential.
From the Personal Information form, click the Assign Credential button on the
form.
The Assign Credential to Person dialog box appears like this example:
Enrolling a New Person
101
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
3.
Search for a specific credential by selecting one of these radio buttons:
Card Stamp
Number:
If you select this radio button, enter the card stamp number
of the credential you are looking for in the text box to the
right of this radio button.
Once you click Find, the credential associated with this card
stamp number appears in the lower window.
MATCH Code:
If you select this radio button, enter the MATCH code of the
credential you are looking for in the text box to the right of
this radio button, or swipe the card associated with this
credential at the Enrollment Station.
Once you click Find, the credential bearing this MATCH
code appears in the lower window.
PIN
If you select this radio button, enter the PIN number for
which you are searching in the active text box.
Once you click Find, the credential bearing this PIN code
appears in the lower window.
Show all
Unassigned
Credentials
4.
If you select this radio button, all unassigned credentials are
displayed in the lower window.
Once you click Find, all unassigned credentials are
displayed in the lower window.
Click Find.
All credentials matching the search criteria are displayed in the lower window, like
this example:
If you need to see when an unassigned credential was last used, scroll over to the
'Last Access' column in the Credentials window. If this time and date does not
appear, select the View > Show Last Access for Unassigned Credentials
toggle option from the menu tool bar.
5.
From the dialog box's lower window, click to select the unassigned credential you
want to assign to this person.
Double click on a selection to edit the credential. The credential properties dialog
box for that credential appears. Edit the credential as required. When you're
finished, click OK to return to the Assign Credential to Person dialog box.
6.
102
Click Assign.
Enrolling a New Person
MAN007-0211
The credential is assigned to the person whose name appears in the title bar of
this dialog box.
The existing credential is assigned to the designated person.
Assigning a Person to an Existing Credential
To assign an unassigned credential to a person:
1.
From the Enrollment Manager screen, select Unassigned Credentials from the tree
pane.
All currently unassigned credentials appear in the credential pane like the following
example:
2.
From the credential pane, right click on the unassigned credential you want to
assign to a person.
A drop-down option list appears.
3.
Select Assign from the drop-down option list.
The Assign Person to Credential dialog box appears with a list of all currently
defined people.
4.
5.
Select the person to whom you want to assign the selected credential.
Click OK.
The credential is now assigned to the selected person.
Assigning a New Credential to a Person
To assign a new credential to a person:
1.
2.
From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to
assign the new credential.
From the Personal Information form:
• click the Add New Credential button on the form or
• double click the Add New Credential folder in the Credentials pane.
The Credential dialog box appears.
3.
Enrolling a New Person
Fill out the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum:
• if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN
103
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
4.
• if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code
• assign a valid door group or function group
When you're finished, click OK.
You are returned to the Personal Information form.
Assigning a Credential Template to a Person
To assign an existing Credential Template to a Person:
1.
2.
From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to
assign the new credential.
From the Credential pane on the Personal Information form, double click the Add
New Credential from Template folder in the Credentials pane.
The Select Credential Template dialog box appears like this example:
3.
Select the template you want to use and click OK.
The Credential dialog box for that template appears.
4.
5.
Add and change the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum:
• if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN
• if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code
• assign a valid door group or function group
When you're finished, click OK.
You are returned to the Personal Information form.
Unassigning Credentials
To unassign a credential currently associated with a person:
1.
From the Enrollment Manager screen, select a person from the tree pane.
All currently assigned credentials appear in the credential pane.
2.
3.
From the credential pane, right click on the credential you want to unassign. An
option list pops up.
Select Unassign from the drop-down option list.
The credential disappears from the person's credential pane and is moved to the
Unassigned Credentials file.

Unassigning a credential does not change the function of the credential.
Downloading Credentials
Before new or modified credentials can take effect, they must be downloaded to their
controller(s). This is routinely handled whenever Enrollment Manager is opened or
closed; however, you can force a download using the following technique.
To force a download of one or more credentials:
1.
104
From the people tree pane, select the person whose credential(s) you want to
download.
Enrolling a New Person
MAN007-0211
The person's statistics appear on the Personal Information form and all credentials
currently assigned to this person appear in the credential pane.
2.
Right click the credential you want to force download.
A list of options appear.
3.
Select Force Download.
The selected credential is immediately downloaded to the relevant controllers.
To force the downloading of multiple credentials, refer to “Downloading Multiple
Credentials” on page 105.
Downloading Multiple Credentials
This is a shortcut for downloading all current credentials to their respective controllers.
To download all credentials:
1.
From the people tree pane, select all the people whose credentials you want to
download.
To select a range of people, use the Shift + click combination; to select a
non-contiguous group of people, use the Ctrl + click combination.
2.
3.
From the people tree pane, right click the highlighted group. Options pop up.
Select Display Credentials...
The Credentials - Multiple People window appears like the following example:
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enrolling a New Person
Select one or more of these credentials.
Right click the highlighted group. A group of options pop up.
Select Force Download.
Click Close to close this window and return to the main Enrollment Manager
screen.
105
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Finding a Person
It can be difficult to find a specific person in the Enrollment Manager once you have a
few hundred employees, contractors, and part-timers to keep track of. To help you find
a person quickly, Enrollment Manager includes a quick find feature.
To find a person:
1.
Open Enrollment Manager.
The Enrollment Manager screen appears.
2.
Do one of these:
• From the menu bar, select Tools > Find Person in All Groups...
• From the icon tool bar, click the Search icon,
.
The Search All Groups dialog box appears. For more on this screen, refer to “Search
Groups Screen” on page 108.
3.
Click the 'Field' pick list and select the field you want to use for data in this search.
All fields currently defined on the Personal Information form appear in this list.
4.
Click in the first 'Function' pick list and select the first term of the argument.
This is a simple 'is' or 'is not' term.
5.
Click in the second 'Function' pick list and select the second term of the argument.
If you select is greater than or less than as a search argument, a check box
appears.
6.
7.
If appropriate, check the 'or equal to' box to extend the range of the argument.
Click in the Value field and enter an appropriate value for the argument you
specified.
If you are specifying an exact match using the equal to argument, a list of all data
equivalents for the specified field appear. Select one or more of these.
For example, if you specified Last Name in the 'Field' pick list and is equal to in the
'Function' pick lists, all relevant last names appear in the 'Value' field.
If you specified a Like condition and are trying to find a variation of the value you
entered in the 'Value' pick list, you can use one of several wildcards including %, _,
[ ], and [^].
8.
Click Add.
The full argument appears in the Search window.
9.
Click Search.
Enrollment Manager searches for and finds all persons matching the criteria you
specified.
10. In the Person Groups pane, click the Search Results icon,
.
The results of the search appear in the People Tree pane.
11. To return to Enrollment Manager, click Cancel.
To help you find a last name quickly, Enrollment Manager also includes a quick find
feature. For more on the Quick Find feature, refer to “Quick Find” on page 113.
106
Finding a Person
MAN007-0211
Search Groups
This feature enables the qualified operator to search through one or more selected
groups using a specified search term for resulting matches.
To search a single group:
1.
At the Person Group pane, right click the group you want to search.
A pop-up list appears.
2.
Select Search Group.
The Search Group screen appears.
This dialog box is exactly the same as the Search All Groups screen and acts
identically. For more on this, refer to “Search Groups Screen” on page 108.
3.
4.
5.
Create one or more arguments as required.
Click Search.
In the Person Group pane, click to highlight the
icon.
A list of all relevant search results appears in the Person Tree pane. These results apply
only to the currently selected Person Group.
To search all existing groups:
1.
At the Person Group pane, right click the top-level (root) of the tree.
For example, in the following example, you would right click on the HIRSCHTEST
root.
A pop-up list appears.
Finding a Person
107
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
2.
Select Search All Groups.
The Search All Groups screen appears.
For more on this, refer to “Search Groups Screen” on page 108.
3.
4.
5.
Create one or more arguments as required.
Click Search.
In the Person Group pane, click to highlight the
icon.
A list of all relevant search results appears in the Person Tree pane. These results apply
only to the currently selected Person Group.
Search Groups Screen
The Search Groups and Search All Groups screens appear when you select the Search
Groups or Search All Groups right click option from the root item of the person
group pane.
This screen looks like this example:
108
Finding a Person
MAN007-0211
This screen includes the following fields and buttons:
Field
Description
Field:
Select the field you want to use for this search. Choose from any of
the available fields, default or UDF.
All fields currently displayed on the Personal Information form
appear in this list.
For example, if you wanted to search the person database by the
last name, you would select the Last Name option from the ‘Field’
pick list.
Function:
Supply the first and second elements of the search argument you
want to use for searching this person list.
The two possible values for the first element appear in this pick list:
is – The person you are searching for is the second element.
is not – The person you are searching for is not the second
element.
The possible values for the second element appear in this pick list:
equal to –‘ The person you are searching for has a value that is
identical to the selected field value.
less than – The person you are searching for has a value less than
that you specified in the 'Value' field.
greater than – The person you are searching for has a value
greater than that you specified in the 'Value' field.
starting with – The person you are searching for has a value that
starts with that you specify in the 'Value' field.
like – The person you are searching for has a value that is similar to
the selected field value.
For example, if you specified a value of 'Smith%' in the 'Value' field,
Enrollment Manager searches for a value like 'Smith' such as
'Smithon' or 'Smithers'.
If you don't use wildcard characters in the Like condition, it behaves
like the equal to condition.
If you select either less than or greater than as a second search
argument, a check box appears to the right of the 2nd search
argument pick list.
or equal to – If you select either less than or greater than, this
check box appears. Check this box to indicate that the search term is
actually less than or equal to, or greater than or equal to.
between – If you select a UDF that is defined as a date type, you
can use this term. Two combo boxes appear into which you can
enter the range of dates between which you want to search.
within – If you select a UDF that is defined as a date type, you can
use this term. Three combo boxes appear: two boxes enabling you
to determine the range of your search and a box specifying the
period (e.g. an hour, 12 hours, a year) for which you are searching.
Finding a Person
109
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Field
Description
Value field
Enter a value for this search in this text window. The functions you
selected above apply to this.
If you selected is equal to as an argument, all values relevant to this
'Field' appear in this window as shown in the following example:
For example, if you specified Last Name in the 'Field' pick list and is
equal to in the 'Function' pick lists, all relevant last names appear in
this field. Click to select one or more values relevant to your present
search.
If you selected either between or within as your 2nd search
argument, two new pick lists appear like this example:
Click on the right arrow to reveal a calendar in order to refine your
search dates.
If you specified an is... like condition and are trying to find a
variation of the value you entered in the 'Value' field, use any of
several wildcards including %, _, [ ], and [^].
Add
Click this button to add this element. If you change the argument
once it is added, the button changes to Update.
Search
window
All added arguments are displayed in this window. If more than one
argument appears here, then additional conditions, like AND or OR
are added here.
Save...
Click this button to save this argument as a search filter.
For more on search filters, refer to “Search Filters” on page 112.
Search
Click this button to begin the search on the specified group. The
results are displayed in the
folder.
Close
Close this screen and return to Enrollment Manager.
Finding a Card Credential
In large facilities with many people and credentials, it is often difficult to find who has
been assigned a particular credential. In order to expedite the search, use Velocity's
Find Card feature. You can search by either Card Reference Number or MATCH code.
This enables you to cross-reference a card with a person and is particularly useful in the
event that a card is recovered.
To find a card credential:
1.
Open Enrollment Manager.
The Enrollment Manager screen appears.
2.
110
From the Enrollment Manager menu bar, select Tools > Find Card Credential...
Finding a Person
MAN007-0211
The Find Card dialog box appears like this example:
The buttons and fields on this screen include:
3.

Finding a Person
Credential Id
Click to select this radio button, then enter credential
ID in the activated text field.
Card Stamp
Number
Click to select this radio button, then enter card stamp
number in the activated text field.
MATCH Code
Click to select this radio button, then either enter the
MATCH code in activated text field or double click the
Enrollment Station icon,
, and swipe the credential
through it; the number appears in the activated field.
PIN Code
Click to select this radio button, then enter PIN code in
the activated text field.
Find
Click this button to search the database for the
specified credential.
Edit
Select the credential displayed in the Search results
window and click this button to bring up the credential
properties sheet for that credential. Make modifications
as required.
Search results
window
The search results appear in this window, including all
relevant credential information. To view complete
columns, scroll right.
Perform one of the following operations:
• Click the Credential Id radio button and type in a credential ID number.
• Click the Card Stamp Number radio button and type in the card stamp
number.
• Click the MATCH Code radio button and either enter the code number in the
text field or swipe the credential through the enrollment station. You can only
swipe a card successfully if the enrollment station icon is green, indicating that
the station is functional.
You cannot swipe a card through an enrollment station unless one is
connected to your system and properly configured.
111
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
4.
• Click the PIN Code radio button and type in a PIN code.
Click Find.
The results of the search appear in the Search results window.
If no card credential matching the criterion is found, a message appears indicating
that. Click OK.
5.
To return to Enrollment Manager, click Close.
Search Filters
Creating a search filter is time-consuming, involving the formulation of a search criteria
using the Velocity-specific query language. If you have enrolled a large number of
employees for this system, you may want to define several search filters you can use
repeatedly without having to invoke the Search Group dialog box each time.
To create a search filter:
1.
At Enrollment Manager, invoke the Search Group or Search All Group option.
The Search Group or Search All Groups dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Create a search criteria.
Click Save...
If this search criteria has not already been created, a dialog box like this appears:
The text that appears here initially represents the first line of the search criteria
appearing in the Argument window.
4.
Either accept this name by click OK or enter a new name and click OK.
The new filter is added to the Person Filters index and appears when you bring up
the Person Filters dialog box.
To execute or edit person filters, refer to “Person Filters” on page 112.
Person Filters
Use this feature to find a specific person by matching a selected person group to an
available search filter.
To use a person filter:
1.
From the Person Group pane, click to highlight a person group.
Only one person group at a time can be selected. Only those person groups
currently defined for this system appear in this pane.
2.
112
Do one of these:
• From the menu bar on the Enrollment Manager main screen, select Tools >
Person Filters...
• Right click on person group(s) you want to search and select Execute Saved
Filter on Group...
Finding a Person
MAN007-0211
The Person Filters screen appears like this example:
Any previously-defined person filters appear in the window.
3.
4.
5.
Click to highlight the Person Filter you want to use.
Do one of these:
• Click Execute to initiate a search on the currently selected person group.
• Click Edit to bring up the Search Group screen associated with the selected
Person Filter. Modify the search arguments as required then save the results.
• Click Delete to delete the currently selected person filter. Click Yes to confirm
your decision.
When you're finished, click Close to exit this dialog box and return to the
Enrollment Manager.
Quick Find
The Quick Find field appears between the People Group pane and the People Tree
pane. It enables you to search for a person in the People Tree pane by last name only.
To use the Quick Find feature:
1.
2.
Using the Persons Group and People Tree pane, display the list of people from
which you are trying to find a specific person.
Click in the ‘Quick Find’ text box and start typing.
Each keystroke you enter initiates a search. If results are returned, the Quick Find
text box becomes a drop-down list and all relevant results appear like this example:
If you enter a group of letters for which there is no corresponding last name, the
drop-down list disappears like this example:
3.
4.
Finding a Person
When a list of probable matches appear in the drop-down list, cursor down the list
to the name you're looking for and press Enter.
The Personal Information Form for the selected person appears in the Personal
Information pane.
113
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Wildcard Symbols
Several types of wildcard symbols are supported in Enrollment Manager. They are
shown in the table below:
Wildcard
character
Description
Example
%
Any string of characters.
If you are filtering for specific
license plates, this value:
The percentage sign (%)
indicates that the value
entered in the Value field is
only part of the value
needed.
_
Any single character.
(underscore)
%XYZ%
finds all people with license
plates that contain XYZ in them,
such as 12XYZK, XYZ123,
2XYZ78Y.
If you are filtering for a first
name, this value:
_ean
finds all four-letter names that
end with ean such as Dean,
Sean, and Jean.
[]
(square
brackets)
[^]
(caret)
114
Any single character within
the specified range ([a-f]) or
set ([abcdef]).
If you are looking for a last
name, this value:
Square brackets indicate a
range or set of possible
letters.
finds persons with last names
ending with arsen and beginning
with any single character
between C and P, for example
Carsen, Larsen, and Karsen.
Any single character not
within the specified range
([^a-f]) or set ([^abcdef]).
If you are looking for a last
name, this value:
The caret indicates a value
that excludes the specified
letters.
finds all persons with last names
beginning with de where the
next letter is not l. Acceptable
names might be Degualle,
Demille, or Dequino.
[C-P]arsen
de[^l]%
Finding a Person
MAN007-0211
Multiple People Selection
Velocity 3.1 supports the selection of multiple people and enables the qualified
operator to perform a number of tasks on those selected. These features are
particularly useful for Velocity systems containing large numbers of employees,
expediting the printing and changing of credentials as well as the editing of personal
information.
To select more than one person:
1.
2.
3.
If needed, From the Person Group pane, click the Person Group you want to be
displayed in the Person Tree pane.
From the Person Tree pane, do one of these:
• hold down the Ctrl key and click each person in the list in you want to select.
• click the first person in the list you want to select then hold down the Shift key
and click the last person in the sequence you want to select. All person in
between the first and last selections are selected as well.
With the selected people highlighted, right click anywhere within the highlighted
space.
A screen like this example appears:
Three options appear in the drop-down list:
Edit Persons
This option enables the qualified operator to edit field
values for more than one person at a time. The
multiple person edit screen appears.
Display
Credentials...
This option enables the qualified operator to display
credentials for more than one person at a time. You
can then apply credential tasks to multiple credentials,
if required.
Delete from
system
This option enables the qualified operator to delete
more than one person from the system.
Displaying Credentials for Multiple Persons
This feature enables the qualified operator to display two or more credentials for
multiple persons. Once displayed, these credentials can be manipulated using
credentials tasks.
Multiple People Selection
115
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To display multiple credentials:
1.
2.
3.
Select multiple people from the People Tree pane.
Right click within the highlighted area.
Select Display Credentials...
The Credentials - Multiple People form appears like the example below:
This screen includes information on each credential associated with the selected
persons, include credential ID, Person ID, and other relevant credential values.
4.
5.
Select one or more credentials you want to view:
• Click to highlight a single credential
• Hold down the Ctrl key while you click each line you want to include in this
credential task
• Click the first line then hold down the Shift key and click the last line you
want to include. All lines in between are selected.
Right click in the highlighted area.
A list of options appears in the drop-down list like this example:
6.
Select one of these tasks as required.
For more on this, refer to “Credential Tasks” on page 169.
7.
116
When you're finished, click Close to return to the Enrollment Manager.
Multiple People Selection
MAN007-0211
Modifying an Existing Person
To modify the credential or personal information for an existing person:
1.
From the People Tree pane, click to select the person whose profile you want to
change.
The appropriate Personal Information form appears in the Personal Information
pane with all of the current values displayed.
Hint
2.
3.
If you can't see the person, you can search for him/her using the Finding Person
feature. See “Finding a Person,” starting on page 106.
Change information to the existing fields as required.
If you need to change the person's current credential or create a new credential for
this person, use one of these procedures:
To change:
Do this:
the current credential
Double click the credential you want to change in the
Credentials pane.
add a new credential
using a credential
template
Click the Add New Credential from Template
option in the Credentials pane.
an existing,
unassigned credential
Click the Assign Existing button on the form.
The Select Credential Template dialog box appears.
Select the template you want to use and click OK.
The Credential properties dialog box appears (see page 147).
4.
5.
6.
Fill out or change the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum you
must:
• if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN
• if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code
• assign a valid door group or function group
When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form.
Double click the photograph frame to import or capture a new photograph.
The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a
photograph, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133.
7.
To capture or import a new signature, double click the signature frame,
located below the photo frame.
,
The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a
signature, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133.
8.

In order for this feature to work, you must have assigned a Badge
Template on the Credential dialog box.
9.

If you are creating a new badge for this person, click the Preview Badge button to
view the way the final badge will look.
Click the Print Badge button to create a new badge for this person.
In order for this feature to work, you must have a badge printer
connected to and configured for this Velocity workstation.
Modifying an Existing Person
117
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
If you need to change the fields appearing on the form, refer to the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
Modifying Existing Credentials for a Person
To modify a currently-assigned credential:
1.
2.
From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person whose credential you want
to modify.
From the Credentials pane, double click the currently assigned credential,
or right click the credential then select Properties... from the pop-up option list.
The current credential appears below the Add New Credential selections, preceded
by this symbol,
.
The Credential dialog box looks like this example.
3.
4.
Modify the fields on the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum you
must:
• assign a valid PIN, if you specify a keypad (code) IDF
• assign a valid MATCH code, if you specify a card IDF
• assign a valid door group or function group
When you're finished, click OK.
You are returned to the Personal Information form.
Deleting Persons
You can delete one or more people from Enrollment Manager using these methods.
Method 1
To delete one person from the system:
1.
In the People Tree pane, right click on the person you want to delete from the
system.
An option appears.
2.
Select Delete from system.
You are prompted with a message asking you to confirm you selection.
3.
118
Click Yes.
Modifying an Existing Person
MAN007-0211
The person and all their currently assigned credentials will be removed from the
system.
Method 2
To delete more than one person from the system:
1.
2.
In the People Tree pane, select multiple people.
Right click on the highlighted area.
An option appears.
3.
Select Delete from system.
You are prompted with a message asking you to confirm you selection.
4.
Click Yes.
All persons and their currently assigned credentials will be removed from the system.
Modifying an Existing Person
119
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Person Groups
Using Velocity 3.1, you can now group people enrolled within Enrollment Manager into
logical units called person groups. Person groups (partitioned groups) enables people
to be placed in different role-controlled views. These views determine which persons a
specific operator can see in Enrollment Manager based on the operator’s role.
Hint
This feature is first and foremost a powerful partitioning tool that enables system
configurators to define roles that enable operators to view only specific person
groups.
For example, a mixed use building provides headquarters for two companies. Security
for Company A does not want to oversee employees for Company B nor does
Company B want to view employees for Company A. In order to keep these views
separate, the system configurator sets up one or more person groups for Company A
and one or more for Company B. When the configurator defines roles for the various
operators that will be overseeing security for the two companies, he/she checks only
those person groups relevant to that specific company. Thus, when an operator is hired
for Company B, he is assigned a role that excludes from view all person groups
previously defined for Company A while checking off each person group for Company
B. As a result, when this operator opens Enrollment Manager, he can see all required
person groups for his company but none of the person groups for Company A.
For more on this, refer to “Partitioning” on page 287.
To create a person group:
1.
At the main Enrollment Manager screen, click the
Group pane like this example:
icon to reveal the Person
This pane provides a tree of person groups by workstations.
All currently defined person groups appear below the workstation. By default, the
all-inclusive Person Group, Everyone, appears in the tree.
2.
In the Person Group pane, right click on the workstation icon.
An option list appears.
3.
120
Select Add Person Group.
Person Groups
MAN007-0211
A dialog box like this appears:
4.
In the text box, enter a new person group name and click OK.
The new person group appears in the Person Group pane.
Once you have created a person group, you can move existing people to this new
group or use one of these right click options:
Add Person
Enroll a new person in this group. For more on this, refer to
“Adding People to Person Groups” on page 121.
Add Person from
Template
Enroll a new person in this group using a person template.
For more on this, refer to “Adding People to Person Groups”
on page 121.
This option can only work if the person template has this
person group checked on the groups tab.
Edit Persons
Edit the record of an existing person in this group. For more
on this, refer to “Editing Multiple Persons” on page 98.
This edits all persons in the selected person group.
Add Subfolder
Add a subfolder to this group. For more on this, refer to
“Person Group Subfolders” on page 90.
Rename
Bring up a text box and enter a new name for the selected
group.
Delete
Delete the selected group. Confirm by clicking Yes.
Search Group
Search for members within this group. For more on this, refer
to “Finding a Person” on page 106.
Execute Saved
Filter on Group...
Use a Search Filter (see page 112) to find members of this
group. When you select this option, the Person Filters dialog
box appears (page 112). Select the person filter you need
then click Execute.
You can also add members to a group through the Groups tab of the Personal
Information Form.
Adding People to Person Groups
There are three methods for adding people to an existing person group:
Method 1
This method moves existing persons from another group to this group, by dragging and
dropping.
Person Groups
121
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To drag and drop people from one group to another:
1.
In the Person Group pane, click on the group from which you want to take people.
The members of this group appear in the People Tree pane below. This is the
source group.
2.
3.
4.
From the People Tree pane, click to select one or more persons to add to the target
person group.
With the left mouse key depressed, drag the selected people from the People Tree
pane to the specified Person Group pane and drop them (release the left mouse
key) into the target person group.
Do one of these:
• If you select a person from the default Everyone group, a message like this
appears:
Click Yes to move a copy of the selected person(s) into the new group. These
persons still appear in the Everyone group.
• If you select a person from a previously created person group, a prompt like
this appears:
Click Move to move the selected person(s) from the source person group to
the target person group. Click Copy to move a copy of the selected person(s)
from the source person group to the target person group.
The target group now includes the people you selected.
Method 2
This creates a new person for this group, using one of the right click options.
To enroll a person in a person group:
1.
In the Person Group pane, right click on the group to which you want to add a
person.
A pop-up option list appears.
2.
Select Add Person.
A new Personal Information Form appears in the personal information pane.
3.
Supply values to these fields, as required, and click Apply.
The new person appears in the Person Tree pane.
4.
Assign one or more credentials to this person, as required.
The new person is now enrolled in this person group.
122
Person Groups
MAN007-0211
Method 3
This creates a new person from an existing person template for this group, using one of
the right click options.
To enroll a person in a person group from an existing person template:
1.
In the Person Group pane, right click on the group to which you want to add a
person.
A pop-up option list appears.
2.
Select Add Person from Template.
The Select Person Template appears.
A list of currently defined person templates appears in this window.

The person group must be included in the person template you want to
add.
3.
4.
Click to highlight the person template that describes the new person.
Click OK.
A new Personal Information Form appears in the personal information pane with
the values relevant to the selected template already filled in.
5.
Supply other values to these fields, as required, and click Apply.
6.
Assign one or more credentials to this person, as required.
The new person appears in the Person Tree pane.
The new person is now enrolled in this person group.
Batch Enroll Card Credentials
This feature enables you to enroll a number of card credentials at the same time. ID
numbers are generated sequentially: for example, if you are doing fifteen cards starting
with ID number 6, the last card will be assigned ID number 21.
Before you batch enroll cards, you must:


know the Facility or Site Code for the cards to be enrolled. To obtain the Facility
Code, contact the card provider.
create a credential template for IDF2 - Card.
To batch enroll card credentials:
1.
Open Enrollment Manager.
The Enrollment Manager screen appears.
2.
Person Groups
From the menu bar, select File > Batch Enroll Credentials.
123
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Batch Enroll Card Credentials dialog box appears like this example:
3.
4.
In field 1, 'Number of cards to enroll,' type the number of cards you need to enroll.
In field 2, 'Credential Template,' select the credential template you require from the
drop-down option list.
Only those credential templates designated as using IDF 2 (Card) appear in this
list.
5.
In field 3, 'Type of batch enroll to perform,' specify whether you want to
automatically enroll these cards or perform the enrollment manually.
• If you click the Auto Enroll radio button (the default), perform these tasks:
a. In the 'Select Card Format' combo box, select the format of the cards you are
using to enroll this batch. Standard 26-Bit Wiegand is the default.
b. At the 'Enter Starting Card Data Number', enter the Facility or Site Code
Number followed by a dash (-) or comma (,) followed by the card stamp
number on the first card to be enrolled. (Before starting the batch auto
enroll, make sure the cards are numbered sequentially.)
For example, 27-116225, where 27 is the Facility or Site Code Number, the
dash is the separator, and 116225 is the number on the first card to be
enrolled.
c. Skip to Step 7.
• If you click the Manual Enroll radio button, you must specify the card format
and card number for each card in the batch. Proceed to Step 6.

You can only perform manual enroll of cards if you have an enrollment
station connected to this system. For more on connecting and
configuring an enrollment station, refer to the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
6.
Check the Station Status.
If there is a diagonal red line across the front of the icon, it means that Velocity
does not currently detect an enrollment station attached to the Velocity
workstation.
Click this icon to bring up the Enrollment station dialog box and configure the
connection correctly.
7.
Click the Start button. The batch process begins.
If you specified Auto Enroll, Enrollment Manager automatically generates the
requested number of credentials. The progress of the generation are displayed in
the window to the right of the Start button.
124
Person Groups
MAN007-0211
If you specified Manual Enroll, follow the instructions appearing in the Status
window to the right of the Start button. Coordinate your card swipes through the
enrollment station with Enrollment Manager's recording of each entry until the
requested number of credentials have been completed.
Once the enrollment process is completed, a message displays a confirmation like
this: Successfully added Credential with User ID # and records processed.
A message pops up confirming that the batch enrollment was complete.
8.
9.
Click OK.
When you're finished, click Close. You are returned to Enrollment Manager.
The newly-created credentials appear in the Credentials pane under Unassigned
Credentials.
Person Groups
125
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Capturing a Signature
This feature only works if you have attached a signature tablet to your Velocity server.
For more information on installing and configuring your signature tablet, refer to the
Velocity Quick Installation Guide or your manufacturer's installation guide.
To capture a signature:
1.
Open Enrollment Manager.
The Enrollment Manager main screen appears.
2.
From the person tree pane, either select an existing person or enroll a new person.
The appropriate Personal Information form appears in the Personal Information
pane.
3.
In the Personal Information pane, double click the signature box,
.
This is the box displayed just below the photo capture box.
The Image Preview dialog box appears.
4.
5.
Click to select the Signature radio button.
Click Acquire.
The Signature Capture dialog box appears like the following example:
The fields and buttons appearing on this screen are:
Pen Width
Select the option you require from this pick list. The available
options are:
Fine — the pen width is fine.
Medium — the pen width is slightly broader.
Broad — the pen width is broad.
Click this icon and the color dialog box appears. Select the
color for the signature.
Click this icon and the color dialog box appears. Select the
color you want for the signature background.
Clear
Click this button to clear the signature and start over.
Signature
Entry window
The signature appears in this window as it is entered on the
attached signature pad.
If a signature is currently in the signature window, click Clear to remove it.
6.
Use the attached signature tablet or pad to enter the correct signature.
As the enrollee enters their signature, it appears in the Signature Capture window.
7.
126
If required, modify the pen width, pen color, or background color.
Capturing a Signature
MAN007-0211
By using these additional effects, you can make the signature look like the
following example:
8.
Click Close.
The Image Preview dialog box reappears with the new signature displayed like this
example:
9.
If required, click the
button to increase the size of the signature appearing in
the Preview window. Click the
button to decrease the size of the signature in
the window.
10. Click Save.
The main Enrollment Manager screen appears with the new signature displayed below
the picture frame on the Personal Information Form.
Capturing a Signature
127
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Capturing a Photo
You can capture photos for either the General tab or the Additional Images tab. Both
procedures are detailed on the following pages.
To capture a photograph for the General tab:
1.
Open Enrollment Manager.
The Enrollment Manager main screen appears.
2.
Enroll a new person or select an existing person.
The appropriate Personal Information form appears.
3.
In the Personal Information pane, double click the photo box.
The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on this dialog box, see page 134.
4.
Select the source for this photo.
You have a choice of three image options:
5.
Option
Meaning
Refer to:
Video
Acquire the image from an attached
camera system.
“Video Capture” on
page 129
Twain
Acquire the image from an attached
TWAIN device.
“TWAIN Capture” on
page 131
File
Acquire the photo from a file (jpeg, bmp,
etc.)
“File Capture” on page
133
Click Acquire.
Occasionally, you might have to click Acquire twice before it takes effect.
The rest of the procedure depends on which source you choose. For more on this,
refer to the topics starting on page 129.

While you can install both video capture (for badge photography) and
CCTV on the same Velocity server (even use the same FlashBus video
capture card to connect both feeds), you cannot run both
simultaneously. Run one process or the other.
For example, if you are monitoring your site over CCTV using the Velocity
CCTV Viewer, do not try to capture photos using the FlashBus video card
connection. Conversely, if you are capturing photos, do not try to monitor
CCTV at the same time using the CCTV Viewer.
To capture a photograph for the Additional Images tab:
1.
Open Enrollment Manager.
The Enrollment Manager main screen appears.
2.
Enroll a new person or select an existing person.
The appropriate Personal Information form appears.
3.
From the Personal Information form, click the Additional Images tab.
The Additional Images page appears.
4.
128
From the ‘Image Placholders’ window, click to highlight the placeholder you
require.
Capturing a Photo
MAN007-0211
5.
In the Current Image section, click the Update Image... button.
The Image Preview screen appears.
6.
7.
Select the source for this photo. You have a choice of three sources:
• Video
• TWAIN
• File
Click Acquire.
Occasionally, you might have to click Acquire twice before it takes effect.
The rest of the procedure depends on which source you choose. For more on this,
refer to the following subsections.
Video Capture
If you selected Video as the source, follow this procedure:
1.
Click Acquire.
The Video dialog box appears. For more this, refer to “Video Dialog Box” on page
130.
2.
3.
4.
Make changes as required to the settings.
When you've positioned the person as required, click Freeze.
Click Close.
The Image Preview dialog box reappears. See page 134.
5.
Using the cursor keys, move the picture until the person's face is centered within
the red cropping box.
If you need to fine tune this framing, use the mouse to drag the red cropping box
until the portrait is perfectly framed.
6.
7.
If needed, use the
captured picture.
Click Save.
and
buttons to increase or decrease the size of the
The photo you cropped appears in the photo frame.
Capturing a Photo
129
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Video Dialog Box
An example of the Video dialog box is shown below:
This screen contains these settings:
Signal
This determines the signal standard for this video capture device.
The default is NTSC.
This setting is previously configured during setup.
Input Type
This determines the type of port used to connect the video capture
device to the Velocity workstation.
This setting is previously configured during setup.
Reset
Click this button to return the Signal, Input Type, and to their
original values.
Brightness
Move the slidebars to brighten or darken the image.
The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is
to test them yourself.
Contrast
Move the slidebars to increase or decrease the contrast between
the objects captured.
The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is
to test them yourself.
Hue
Move the slidebars to brighten or darken the image.
The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is
to test them yourself.
Saturation
Move the slidebars to increase or decrease the density of the
individual colors.
The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is
to test them yourself.
Sharpness
Move the slidebars to change the color hues.
The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is
to test them yourself.
130
Freeze
Click this button to freeze the image.
Close
Click this button to return to the Image Preview dialog box.
Capturing a Photo
MAN007-0211
TWAIN Capture
If you selected TWAIN as your source, follow this procedure:
1.
Click Acquire.
The Select Source dialog box appears like this selection.
2.
Click and highlight the source you want then click Select.
The TWAIN setup screen appears. For more on this, refer to “TWAIN Setup Dialog
Box” on page 131.
3.
4.
Make changes as required.
Click Capture.
The Image Preview dialog box reappears. See page 134.
5.
Using the cursor keys, move the picture until the person's face is centered within
the red box. If you need to fine tune this framing, use the mouse to drag the red
box until the portrait is perfectly framed.
6.
If needed, use the zoom in/zoom out buttons to increase or decrease the size of
the captured picture.
Click Save.
7.
The photo you cropped appears in the photo frame.
TWAIN Setup Dialog Box
An example of the TWAIN Setup dialog box is shown below:
Capturing a Photo
131
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The FlashBus TWAIN32 Setup dialog box includes these features:
Keep Aspect
Check this box to maintain the aspect ratio for this picture. The
width and height are maintained in the same ratio as the
original photograph.
Scale
Check this box to change the aspect ratio. Use the Width and
Height slidebars to change the height and width of the
photograph as required.
Remote Grab
Check this box to activate the remote grab feature. This feature
is currently not implemented.
Monochrome
Check this box to convert color images into black and white
images.
Grab
Specifies the type of grab allowed by the capture program. Your
choices are:
Align Even - align even grabbed objects
Align Odd - align odd grabbed objects
Align Any - align all grabbed objects
Adjustments
Move the slidebars to adjust the captured image:
Brightness - brighten or darken the image
Contrast - increase or decrease the contrast between the
objects captured
Saturation - increase or decrease the density of the individual
colors
Hue - change the color hues
The best way to determine how these controls affect an image
is to test them yourself.
Defaults
Click this button to return all adjustment values to their original
value.
Video
Center the image by their X and Y coordinates. For example,
increasing the X center moves the image to the right.
Full Size
Click this button to make the image fill the window.
Flash
This determines what type of flash this TWAIN device has. The
default is None. Other options include:
• Universal
• Strobe
• AutoSync
Check with your TWAIN device to ascertain whether it has a
flash attachment and, if so, what type it is.
Field Delay
132
If the flash attachment requires the device to delay before
capturing the image, use the slider to specify that delay in
seconds.
Capturing a Photo
MAN007-0211
Input Type
This determines what type of input is used to connect this
TWAIN device to the Velocity workstation. Options are:
• RGE
• Composite
• SVideo
• RS170
• Green Sync
Check with your TWAIN device manual to make sure of the
connection type.
Standard
This determines the standard used by this TWAIN device to
capture the photograph. There are two options:
• NTSC
• PAL
Check with your TWAIN device manual for the correct setting.
Capture
Click this button to capture the image and return to the Image
Preview dialog box.
File Capture
If you selected File as your source, follow this procedure:
1.
Click Acquire.
The Open a File dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Browse for the video file you need.
Select the file you need and click Open.
The Image Preview dialog box reappears. See page 134.
4.
Using the cursor keys, move the picture until the person's face is centered within
the red box.
If you need to fine tune this framing, use the mouse to drag the red box until the
portrait is perfectly framed.
5.
6.
If needed, use the zoom in/zoom out buttons to increase or decrease the size of
the captured picture.
Click Save.
The photo you cropped appears in the photo frame.
Image Preview
The Image Preview dialog box enables you to:
Capturing a Photo
133
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide


capture a video image using photo capture software, or
find an existing image
To capture a photograph using photo capture software:
1.
2.
3.
4.
At the Image Preview dialog box, select the image source you require.
Click Acquire.
• If you specified Video or TWAIN, an image appears in the Preview window to
the right.
• If you specified File, the Open A File dialog box appears. Select the image you
want to import to the badge.
With the image displayed in the Preview window, move the cropping box with your
mouse and/or cursor keys. This enables you to frame the image exactly.
Click Save.
The image is imported to the photograph window in the Personal Information
pane like this example:
Image Preview Dialog Box
The Image Preview dialog box looks like this example:
134
Capturing a Photo
MAN007-0211
The Image Preview dialog box includes these buttons and fields:
Image Source
Video
Click this radio button to indicate that Velocity is connected to a
video system.
When you click Acquire, the FlashBus photo capture dialog box
appears. Take the picture.
TWAIN
Click this radio button to indicate that Velocity is connected to a
photo capture system or scanner using the TWAIN protocol.
When you click Acquire, the TWAIN Setup dialog box appears like
this example.
Select the TWAIN device from which this picture will be taken.
Velocity takes the image associated with this system and imports it.
File
Click this radio button to indicate the image is available either on
your hard disk or on a diskette. When you click Acquire, Velocity
prompts you with the Open a File dialog box. Find the specified file
and import it.
The image can be in one of 21 accepted image formats including
JPG, GIF, TIF, PCX, TGA, and WMF.
Signature
Click this radio button to capture a signature.
When you click Acquire, the Signature Capture screen appears.
Acquire...
Click this button to either take a picture using the photo capture
equipment or, if file is selected, search for an existing image using
the Open a File dialog box.
If you selected the Signature radio button, clicking this button takes
you to the Signature Capture screen.
Save
Click this button to save the image and send it to the badge.
Help
Click this button to see this screen.
Close
Click this button to ignore the image and return to the previous
screen.
Preview
This window displays the results of the image or signature
acquisition. You can manipulate the size of the image by using the
magnifying glass buttons to the right of this window. You can crop
and frame the image using the cropping box.
Click this button to increase (zoom in) the image size. Each time
you click this button it increases the image size by 20%. The
percentage of magnification (relative to the original 100%) of the
image is displayed above this button.
Click this button to decrease (zoom out) the image size. Each time
you click this button it decreases the image size by 20%. The
percentage of magnification (relative to the original 100%) of the
image is displayed above this button.
Capturing a Photo
135
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Additional Images
This page displays images added to the Personal Information form. This enables
qualified operators to enroll persons and include more than one image identifying
them. This image can show side views or additional front views of the employee as
well as other identifying images.
Before you can access images, you must first define the person placeholders in the
User-Defined Fields option.
Once you have created the required placeholders, do the following:
1.
At the Personal Information pane, click on the Additional Images tab.
The Additional Images page appears like this example:
2.
3.
From the 'Image Placeholders' window, click to select the first image you want.
Click the Update Image... button.
4.
Capture the image as you would the photo on the General page.
The Image Preview dialog box appears. See page 134.
The image appears in the 'Current Image' frame like this example:
5.
If needed, click in the 'Description' field and enter a title or description of the image
you just captured.
To remove the currently displayed image, simply click the Remove Image button. The
image disappears.
136
Capturing a Photo
MAN007-0211
E-mailing a Photo
Security occasionally requires a suspicious employee to be tracked by members of the
security staff or some outside agency. To expedite this, Enrollment Manager includes
the ability to e-mail an image of the employee database to one or more individuals or
organizations.
To e-mail a photo:
1.
From Enrollment Manager, bring up the employee in question.
The designated person's personal information form appears with a picture of the
person in question.
2.
Right click on the image you want to send.
A pop-up option list appears like this example:
3.
Select Email Picture...
4.
Select the size you want to send.
A dialog box like this appears:
Make all pictures
smaller
Click this radio button to make the image smaller.
Keep the original
sizes
Click this radio button to retain the original size.
Show more
options...
Click this link and select one of the predetermined
sizes from the available additional options.
When you're finished, you can click the Show
fewer options... link to toggle to the smaller
dialog box.
5.
Capturing a Photo
Once you've chosen the size of the image you want to send, click OK.
137
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
An email form appears like this example:
6.
7.
Fill out the form as required.
When you're finished, click Send.
Saving a Photo to Another Source
You can save photos captured within the Velocity security system and copy them to
another source using this feature.
To save a photo to another source:
1.
From Enrollment Manager, bring up the employee in question.
The designated person's personal information form appears with a picture of the
person in question.
2.
Right click on the image you want to save.
A pop-up option list appears like this example:
3.
Select Save Picture As...
4.
Use the fields to navigate to the required destination drive and directory.
The Save As... dialog box appears.
If required, rename the image.
5.
Click Save.
The image is saved to the specified directory with the given name.
138
Capturing a Photo
MAN007-0211
Scanning Enrollment Data
Use the Scan button to populate the Personal Information Form with relevant
information from either a scanner or a PIV reader.

Before you can use this function, you must have a scanner or PIV reader
configured for use with this Velocity computer. For more on this, refer to
the Velocity 3.1 Administrators Guide.
You can use this procedure to:




Insert information from some other source, such as a business card or license, into
pre-mapped UDF fields on the Personal Information Form.
Add pictures to the Additional images tab of the Personal Information Form.
Add a signature to the Personal Information Form.
Import data from a smart PIV card via PIV reader or RUU-201 Verification Station to
appropriate fields on the Personal Information Form.
To import data from a scanner:
1.
2.
Open Enrollment Manager.
Enroll a new person or click a name in the People Tree Pane to display information
on an existing person.
The Personal Information Form for that person appears.
3.
Click the Scan button.
The Verify Scanner Data screen appears.
For more on this screen, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
With the 'Auto launch on paper detect' feature enabled, the ScanShell 800 can
start scanning automatically when paper is detected in the paper tray. (This does
not apply to the ScanShell 1000 that cannot auto-detect paper.) Once scanned,
the Verify Scanner Data screen will appear with the results displayed. Go to Step 6.
With all other devices, you must click the Scan button before scanning begins.
4.
5.
Capturing a Photo
From the Document Type: pick list, select the type of card you want to scan.
There are several possible options:
• Business Card
• License/ID (OCR)
• License/ID (Bar Code)
• Passport
If you select the License/ID (OCR) option, the License Settings section appears.
Select the Region, Country, and State specific to the license or ID you are scanning.
139
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
6.
7.
Click Scan Document to begin the scanning/reading process.
Review the gathered data to make sure it is properly sorted.
If you have enabled 'Auto accept scanned data' for either the ScanShell 800 or
1000, Step 6 is bypassed. Results are automatically accepted.
8.
When you're satisfied with the results, click Accept.
The information populates the Personal Information Form.
To import data from a PIV reader:
1.
2.
Open Enrollment Manager.
Enroll a new person or click a name in the People Tree Pane to display information
on an existing person.
The Personal Information Form for that person appears.
3.
Click the Scan button.
The Verify Scanner Data screen appears.
For more on this screen, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click the PIV Reader tab if it is not already selected.
From the Type: pick list, select the PIV card type you want to read. There are
several possible options:
• DESFire FIPS201
• FIPS201 Contactless
• FIPS201 Contact
• DoD (legacy) CAC
Click Read PIV Card to begin the scanning/reading process.
Review the gathered data in the Output Window.
When you're satisfied with the results, click Accept.
To import data from an RUU-201 PIV Verification Station:
1.
2.
Open Enrollment Manager.
Enroll a new person or click a name in the People Tree Pane to display information
on an existing person.
The Personal Information Form for that person appears.
3.
Click Scan.
The Verify Scanner Data screen appears.
4.
Click the RUU tab, if it is not already selected.
Make sure the status field is green and displays 'Online'. There is only one option
at present for this device: FIPS201 Contact.
140
Capturing a Photo
MAN007-0211
5.
6.
Insert the PIV card whose information you want to scan into the RUU-201.
Click Connect to begin the scanning/reading process.
The RUU-201 reads the relevant information on the inserted card and dumps that
information into the Output window.
7.
8.
Review the gathered data in the Output window.
When you're satisfied with the results, click Accept.
The information populates the Personal Information Form. Data is mapped from the
relevant PIV fields to the selected UDF fields.
Capturing a Photo
141
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Previewing a Badge
While you can immediately print a badge from Enrollment Manager, it's often a good
idea to preview it before you do.
To preview a badge:
Method 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enroll the new person.
Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential.
Complete the credential and close it.
Do one of these:
• In the credential pane, right click the credential whose badge template you
want to print and select Badge > Preview... from the pop-up list, or
• Select and highlight the credential you want to use then click the Preview
Badge button below the Personal Information form.
The Print Preview screen appears with the final badge layout incorporating all the
field information as well as the photograph and signature (if supplied). If you have
defined a double-sided badge for this credential, both dialog boxes appear (one
on top of the other). For more on the Print Preview screen, refer to “Print Preview
Screen” on page 142.
5.
Click the Print button.
If the Velocity workstation is connected to a Badge Printer and is correctly configured,
the badge is printed.
Method 2
This option enables you to preview a badge without closing the credential dialog box.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enroll the new person.
Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential.
Complete the credential.
On the general page of the credential dialog box, click the Print Preview button,
.
The Print Preview screen appears with the final badge layout incorporating all the
field information as well as the photograph and signature (if supplied). If you have
defined a double-sided badge for this credential, both dialog boxes appear (one
on top of the other).
5.
Click the Print button.
If the Velocity workstation is connected to a Badge Printer and is correctly configured,
the badge is printed.
Print Preview Screen
To access the Print Preview screen, do one of these procedures:


142
Right click the appropriate credential, select Badge > Preview... from the pop-up
option list.
Select and highlight the appropriate credential then click the Preview Badge
button in the Personal Information pane.
Previewing a Badge
MAN007-0211
A screen like the following example appears:
Use the Print Preview screen to:


inspect the badge before printing
print the badge
This screen includes these buttons:
Click this button to print the displayed badge.
Click to toggle between the front and back of the badge for this
badge template.
For more on double-sided badge printing, refer to “Double-Sided
Badge Printing” on page 145.
Close
Previewing a Badge
Click this button to close the Print Preview screen and return to the
User Configuration dialog box.
143
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Printing a Badge
To print a badge:
Method 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enroll the new person.
Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential.
Complete and assign the credential you need.
Do one of these:
• In the credential pane, right click the assigned credential and select Badge >
Print... from the pop-up list, or
• Select and highlight the credential you want to use then click the Print Badge
button,
, below the Personal Information form.
If the Velocity workstation is connected to a Badge Printer and is correctly
configured, the badge is printed.
The Badge Print Status dialog box (page 144) appears indicating whether the
badge printed successfully or not. It also indicates how many other badges were
printed using this credential.
5.
6.
Click Close to continue.
Method 2
This option enables you to print a badge without closing the credential dialog box.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enroll the new person.
Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential.
Complete the credential.
On the general page of the credential dialog box, click the Print Badge button,
.
You can also print directly from the Print Preview screen.
The Badge Print Status dialog box (page 144) appears indicating whether the
badge printed successfully or not.
5.
Click Close to continue.
Badge Print Status
The Badge Print Status displays the current status of a badge print.
This dialog box shows the credential ID that was printed, the type of badge template
that was using, and to whom the badge was assigned.
144
Printing a Badge
MAN007-0211
If you have selected multiple credentials to print, a dialog box like this example
appears, indicating that multiple badges were printed:
Double-Sided Badge Printing
Before you can print double-sided badges from Enrollment Manager, perform these
two tasks:


Printing a Badge
Make sure your printer is capable of duplex printing. Many badge printers do allow
double-sided printing; however, check your printer documentation to make sure.
Make sure the badge template selected for this person’s credential is defined as
double-sided. The ‘Size page for Double-sided printing’ box must be checked on
the Page Size tab of the Page Setup dialog box in the Badge Designer before this
will work. For more on this, refer the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
145
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Credentials
A credential is a compilation of vital security information that can be applied to a
particular card or code holder. The completed credential is a security profile unique to
that person. A credential serves the purpose of a card, a code, or a code and card.
You can assign more than one credential to an individual.
Credential information can include these values:





















Description
Badge template
IDF
Card information (type, stamp number, data number, MATCH code)
Activation and expiration dates
Code length
PIN
Duress digit
Door group
Function category and function type
Function group
Day/Use/Absentee Limits
2-Person rule specifications
Threat authority
Tag, Alert, and Disable
Passback override
Global credential management
Auto-delete credentials
Special Needs
Maximum print and issue counts
Fingerprint information
Of course, not all credentials possess all this information. Some credentials only define
card holders while other credentials apply to code holders.

A credential is unique. It can only be used by one person at a time.
Once assigned, a credential cannot be shared with another person. Think of it as a
physical card: when a person has that card, it cannot be shared by persons; each
person has his/her own.
When a person leaves a company, the credential is returned to security and is
unassigned. Once unassigned, the credential can be reassigned to another person.

This does not mean that an unassigned credential is disabled.
Particularly in the case of PIN code-only credentials, an unassigned
credential can still be used unless it is disabled.
In order to simplify and speed up the task of creating and assigning a credential,
Velocity includes the Credential Template feature. A credential template includes most
of the values listed above, but without such unique qualifiers as a PIN, duress digit, or
MATCH code that are added on a per-person basis. This enables you to assign a
credential template to a person’s credential then customize that credential.
146
Credentials
MAN007-0211
How to Define Credentials
It's always a good idea to create as many credential templates as you think you'll need
before enrolling persons. Before creating credential templates, you should first create
badge templates, function groups, and doors groups.
To define a credential for a person:
1.
2.
3.
At the main menu, open Enrollment Manager.
From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to
assign the new credential or add a new person.
From the Personal Information form, click the Add New Credential button or
double click the Add New Credential folder in the Credentials pane as shown in
the following example:
The Credential dialog box appears. For more on this, refer to “Credential Properties
Dialog Box” on page 147.
4.
5.
Fill out the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum,
• if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN
• if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code
• assign a valid door group or function group
When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form.
Credential Properties Dialog Box
The Credential Properties dialog box consists of four pages:




General property sheet (see page 148)
Function property sheet (see page 152)
Limits property sheet (see page 153)
Options property sheet (see page 156)
Each page is discussed in the following subsections.
The Credential Properties dialog box is similar to the Credential Template Properties
dialog box. For more on credential templates, refer to “Credential Templates,” starting
on page 230.
Credentials
147
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
General Property Sheet
The General property sheet looks like this example:
The fields on this page are:
ID:
This is a read-only field. Velocity generates an ID number for each
credential created.
When you first add a credential, the value (new) appears. This is
replaced by a generated number when the credential is created
by clicking OK.
Link to:
Check this box to link this credential to the credential specified in
the pick list. This means that if this credential template is
changed, the credentials associated with this template also
change.
For more on this, refer to Credentials - “Credentials: Link to
Template” on page 167.
If this box is not checked, this credential is independent of any
credential template.
Description
Type a brief description of this credential.
Badge
Template
From the drop-down list, select the badge template you need. If
you need a double-sided badge, make sure to select a badge
template designed specifically for double-sided printing.
Only those badge templates already defined are displayed in this
combo box list. Badge templates are created using the Badge &
Graphics Designer. For more on the Designer, refer to the
chapter, “Badge & Graphic Designer,” starting on page 439.
For more on printing double-sided badges, refer to
“Double-Sided Badge Printing,” starting on page 145.
Click this button to preview an example of the badge selected in
the 'Badge Template' combo box above.
Use this operation to review a badge template before assigning it
to a person.
148
Credentials
MAN007-0211
IDF
Select one of the available IDF options from this combo box.
Options are:
• 0 - Badge Only
• 1 - Keypad
• 2 - Card
• 3 - Dual
• 4 - Card + Dual
• 5 - Keypad + Dual
• 6 - Keypad + Card
• 7 - Keypad/Card/Dual
The default is 1 - Keypad.
For more on this, refer to “ID Formats (IDF)” on page 164.
Card
If you select any card option—including card, dual, or card +
code—from the IDF field, this section is activated.
Type:
Select from the drop-down list the type of card this is. Select from
these options:
• Std 26-Bit Wiegand
• Std 27-Bit Wiegand
• Std 28-Bit Wiegand
• Std 29-Bit Wiegand
• One-Field ABA
• Special 1 - 36
• Passthru
The default is Std 26-Bit Wiegand.
For more on card types, refer to “Card Types” on page 236.
Note: If you are using an enrollment station, you don’t have to specify
the type. The enrollment station automatically detects the card
type and supplies it in this field.
Stamp #
This optional field is most often used for record-keeping. Enter
the hot stamp number appearing on this card. This is the number
that is already imprinted on this card (normally on the back).
Data
Type the data appearing on this card. This number is often the
same as the hot stamp number (though not on Hirsch cards).
If this workstation is connected to an enrollment station, simply
slide the new card through the enrollment reader; the number
automatically appears in the 'MATCH' field.
Credentials
149
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
UDF...
Click this button to concatenate currently selected UDF fields and
populate the 'Data' and 'MATCH' fields with the result. The
Concatenate UDFs screen appears.
This is generally only used when the Passthru option is selected
for the Card Type.
Note: Only UDFs that are a numeric type are selectable for
concatenation.
This button is only active when you select an IDF that specifies a
Card. If you select IDFs 0 (Badge Only) or 1 (Code Only), this
button is not active.
MATCH
Do one of the following:
• Enter numbers in the 'Data' field and Velocity automatically
generates a number for this field.
• Type in the MATCH number from the cross-reference list
provided by Hirsch for all cards (except PVC cards used for
photo badging).
• Enroll the new card through the attached enrollment station.
This field is automatically populated.
This is an 8 - 16 digit number.
Note: If you enter a MATCH code that has already been used, the
program will prompt you. If the system has been enabled for
override, a message appears asking you whether you want to
override and reuse the code. If you have the proper permission,
you can override and reuse the code; however, you cannot
override an existing code unless the original has been deleted.
Enrollment
Station Status
This icon indicates whether the enrollment station is working
properly or not.
If the station is connected and working correctly, you will see a
normal black and white icon with a green dot,
.
If Velocity does not detect an enrollment station, you see a black
and white icon with a red dot,
.
Activation/Expiration Date
Activate:
The date and time when this credential becomes valid.
At the date field, use the down arrow,
, to the right of this
combo box to display a calendar. Select the month and day on
which this card/code is activated. You can click the
and
buttons to go from month to month. Use the up and down
cursor keys to change the date. The current time is automatically
supplied. To change this, click in the time fields and enter new
values as required.
Alternatively, in the combo box to the right, select from a list of
common date ranges, such as 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, etc. This
automatically enters a value in the preceding field. Modify the
values to the left combo box as required.
150
Credentials
MAN007-0211
Expire:
The date and time when this credential is no longer valid. If the
person possessing this credential attempts to use this credential
after the expiration date, Velocity refuses the attempt.
If you want to activate this feature and change the date that
appears in this field:
1. Check the 'Expire' box to the left of the field.
2. To the right of the field, click the browse button,
.
The Set Expiration Date dialog box appears. Refer to
“Credentials: Set Expiration Date” on page 166.
3. Specify the date you want to use, either a specific date or a
UDF date.
4. Click OK.
On
Expiration:
This field is activated when the 'Expire On' checkbox is selected.
Three options are available:
• Disable - click this radio button to indicate that this card/code
is disabled on expiration. The card/code is stored in the
database and cannot be reused.
• Delete from Controllers - click this radio button to indicate
that this card/code is deleted from all controller memories.
The card/code is stored in the database and cannot be reused.
• Disable and Unassign - click this radio button to indicate
that this card/code is disabled and unassigned at expiration.
The card/code is stored in the database and can be reused by
selecting the credential from unassigned, assigning the
unassigned credential to a person, then reactivating it.
Code
If you select any code option—including code, dual, or card and
code—from the IDF field, this section is activated.
Length:
Use the spin control buttons,
long this code can be.
, to specify how many digits
The range is 3 - 15 digits. The default is 4 digits.
PIN
Either type in a new PIN code in the field or click Auto to
automatically generate a number.
Note: If you enter a PIN that has already been used, the program will
prompt you. If the system has been enabled for override, a
message appears asking you whether you want to override and
reuse this PIN. If you have the proper permission, you can
override and reuse the PIN.
Auto
Click this button to automatically generate a new PIN code.
Duress Digit:
Use the spin control buttons to specify a duress digit for this
credential. Available duress digits are 1 - 9.
The default is 0 indicating that no duress digit is required for this
code.
For on this, refer to “Duress Digits” on page 165.
Credentials
151
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Function Property Sheet
The Function property sheet looks like this example:
Use this property sheet to define one or more actions that should be performed when
this code/card is presented.
Function
Group
Click this radio button to assign a function group to this credential.
The function group combo box to the right of this radio button is
activated. Select from the combo box list of existing function groups
or select <New> to create a new function group.
Use this option when you need multiple actions to occur for this
credential. Multiple functions are defined through the Function
Groups feature.
For more on this, refer to “Function Groups” on page 267.
Function(s)
Click this radio button to assign one or more functions to this
credential. The buttons to the right of the Function(s) windows are
activated.
Function
window
When you click the Function(s) radio button, this window is
activated. This window contains a list of all access or control
functions defined for this credential. While more than one function
can appear in these windows, two or more functions (whether
access or control) cannot be listed for the same controller.
Note: A credential can only define a single function per controller.
152
Add...
Click this button to add a function to this credential. The Define
Function dialog box appears. Select the function you require and it
is displayed in either the Access or Control Function window.
Edit...
Click this button after selecting a function from either the Access
Function or Control Function window to edit the function. The
Define Function dialog box appears. Modify the function as needed.
Delete
Click this button after selecting a function from either the Access
Function or Control Function window to remove that function from
the window.
Credentials
MAN007-0211
Limits Property Sheet
The Limits property sheet looks like this example:
Use this property sheet to enable a variety of limits on this credential including global
person (credential) management, day/use/absentee limits, and two-person rule.
The options available on this screen are:
Apply
Credential
Management
Globally
Click this box to indicate that the credential management limits
specified here are shared amongst all controllers connected to
the same XBox. Before this feature can be applied, you must first
check the 'Enable global credential management' box on the
Controller Properties Setup page (see page 153) for each
affected controller.
For example, if a person using this credential exceeds the use
limit at one door, that information is shared with all other
controllers on the same XBox. This makes it impossible for the
credential to be used at another door even if it is controlled by
another controller.
For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Threat
Authority
Use the spin control buttons to increase or decrease the threat
level for this credential. At the specified threat level, the
credential is no longer honored and access is no longer allowed.
The default, 0, indicates that no threat level has been set for this
credential.
For more on threat levels, refer to page 224.
Day/Use/Absentee Limits
No Limit
Click this radio button to indicate that there are no limits for this
credential.
This is the default value for a credential.
Credentials
153
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Day Limiting
Click this radio button to specify that this credential expires after a
specified number of days. The 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' spin
control field is activated.
Specify the limit in the 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' field to the
right.
For more on this, refer to “Day Limiting” on page 173.
Use Limiting
Click this radio button to specify that this credential expires after a
specified number of uses. The 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' spin
control field is activated.
Specify the limit in the 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' field to the
right.
For more on this, refer to “Use Limiting” on page 173.
Absentee
Limiting
Click this radio button to specify that this credential expires after a
specified number of recorded days absent (days this card and/or
code were not used). The 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' spin
control field is activated.
Specify the limit in the 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' field to the
right.
For more on this, refer to “Display Credential Information” on
page 172.
Day/Use/
Absentee
Count
Use the spin control buttons to increase or decrease the number
of days, uses, or absences this credential is allowed before it
expires. The units specified here depend on the limiting radio
button:
• if you select Day Limiting, the count is in days
• if you select Use Limiting, the count is in uses
• if you select Absentee Limiting, the count is in days absent
The allowed range is 1 - 254 days, uses, or absences. The default
value is 0, no limit.
Auto-Delete
Credential
Click this box to indicate that when the limit is reached as defined
by the fields above, this credential is automatically deleted from
the controller's memory.
If you have checked the 'Apply Credential Management Globally'
box, all instances of this credential on all attached controllers are
deleted.
Note: If this option is not checked, when the limit is exceeded, the
credential is disabled.
For more on this feature, see “Auto-Delete” on page 175.
154
Credentials
MAN007-0211
2-Person Rule
This section specifies how the 2-person rule is applied to this
credential. Doors are enabled for 2-Person Rule using the Door
General Properties page.
Timers and time zone disable parameters are specified on the
Controller Passback property sheet.
For more on this, refer to “Two-Person Rule,” starting on page
108.
Normal
Click this radio button to indicate that the normal 2-person rule
applies to this credential. This person can access a 2-Person
Rule-enabled door with any other person possessing a Normal,
A/B Rule “A”, or A/B Rule “B” designation.
A/B Rule A
Two-Person “A/B” Rule. If one person has an A/B Rule “A”
specified in the limits for their credential, they need to find
someone with an A/B Rule “B” or a 'Normal' designation in order
to unlock a 2-Person Rule-enabled door.
This is particularly useful for supervisor/trainee access privileges.
For more on this, refer to “Rule Variations” on page 110.
A/B Rule B
Two-Person “A/B” Rule. If one person has an A/B Rule 'B'
selected in the limits for their credential, they need to find
someone with an A/B Rule “A” or a 'Normal' designation in order
to unlock a 2-person rule-enabled door.
This is particularly useful for supervisor/trainee access privileges.
For more on this, refer to “Rule Variations” on page 110.
Executive
Override
Two-Person Executive Override. This allows the holder of this
credential to override the two-man rule. It only takes this
credential to unlock the door even if the door normally requires
two people.
For more on this, refer to “Executive Passback Override” on page
173.
Credentials
155
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Options Property Sheet
The Options property sheet looks like this example:
This page controls a variety of options influencing the way Velocity responds to a
specific credential.
Actions
Tag
Click this box to indicate the credential is tagged. For more on
this, refer to “Tagging” on page 175.
Alert
Click this box to indicate the credential causes an alert. For more
on this, refer to “Alert” on page 174.
Disable
Click this box to disable all actions while this credential is being
used.
Passback
Executive
Override
Click this box to designate that this credential allows executive
override. For more on this, refer to “Executive Passback Override”
on page 173.
Special Needs
Special
Needs
Access Time
Extension
156
Click this box to designate that this credential allows an unlock
extension beyond the normal unlock interval for special needs,
such as wheelchair access or partial delivery.
Credentials
MAN007-0211
Current Issue
Status
Enables an operator to document the current status of this
credential. This is particularly helpful if the credential has been
lost, destroyed, or stolen for some reason.
Either enter an issue into this combo box or select one of the
status options from the drop-down list. The default issue list
options include:
• Lost
• Stolen
• Destroyed
This is an information field and does not disable the credential.
Print Control
Enable Print
Control
Check this box to enable print control. Print control is a feature
that restricts the number of badges that can be printed using this
credential.
If this credential is not associated with a badge template, this
section has no relevance.
Attempts:
A read-only field indicating the number of attempts that were
made to print the badge based on this credential.
This count and the Confirmed count will be identical unless you
check the Display print confirmation box below.
Confirmed:
A read-only field indicating the number of badges based on this
credential that were actually printed. This number cannot exceed
the prescribed Max field.
This count and the Attempts count will be identical unless you
check the Display print confirmation box below.
Max:
Enter the maximum number of badges that can be printed for
this credential. Velocity will not allow either the Attempts or
Confirmed counts to exceed the value entered here unless the
operator printing the badge is assigned to a role that allows
overriding of print control.
Display Print
Confirmation
Check this box to enable confirmation when a badge based on
this credential attempts to print. This means that whenever an
operator prints a badge based on this credential, Velocity
prompts the operator to indicate whether the badge printed
correctly. If the operator indicates that the badge did print
properly, both the Attempts and Confirmed fields are
incremented by one. If the operator indicates that the badge did
not print properly, only the Attempts field is incremented.
Issue Control
Enable Issue
Control
Credentials
Check this box to enable issue control.
157
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Count:
A read-only field indicating the number of times this credential
has been issued. This figure cannot exceed the Max count you
enter.
Max:
Enter the maximum number of times this credential can be
issued. Velocity will not allow the Count field to exceed the value
entered here.
Reissue
Click this button to reissue this credential.
Issue
Comment
Table
A list of issues appears in this table. The first issue indicates the
initial issue of the card. Subsequent entries indicate that the
credential was reissued.
Each issue is identified by its issue number, the reason for its
issue, and the date of its issuance. To review or edit an entry in
this table, double click on the entry and the Reissue Credential
dialog box appears.
Define Function Dialog Box
The Define Function dialog box looks like this example:
The combo boxes on this screen are:
Function
Category:
From the pull-down option list, select the type of function you
need performed. These include:
• Access
• Relay
• Alarm
• Password
• Special
The combo boxes in the bottom half of the screen change
depending on which category you select.
Function:
Depending on which function category is selected in the
'Function Category' combo box, select from a list of available
functions in this option list.
For more on this, see “Functions” on page 243.
158
Credentials
MAN007-0211
Door Group:
If you select Access, Password, or Special (Alarm Cancel, Watch
Log, and Time Log only) from the 'Function Category' combo
box, this combo box appears. Select a door group from the
available options. All currently-defined door groups appear in
this list.
To create a new door group for this purpose, select <New>. The
Door Group Configuration dialog box appears.
For more on this, refer to “Door Groups” on page 259.
Controller:
If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo
box, this combo box appears. Select the controller that the
specified control zone affects.
Control Zone:
If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo
box, this combo box appears. Specify the control zone that
specifies the relay(s) or input(s) and its behavior. Both Standard
and Master control zones are included in this list.
Before a control zone can be effective, you must first define it.
For more on control zones, refer to “Control Zones” on page
111.
Add
If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo
box, this button appears. Click this button to add the currently
displayed controller and control zone to the list in the window
below.
Remove
If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo
box, this button appears. Click this button to remove a selected
function from the function list in the window below.
Credential Biometrics Properties Sheet
When you click the Biometrics tab, a page like this appears:
Credentials
159
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The fields and buttons on this page include:
SC Readers
From the drop down list, select the smart card reader that will
be used to enroll (encode) the MIFARE or DESFire smart
cards. These smart cards are used to store both the user
information and biometrics after initial enrollment.
GUID
Specifies the global unique identifier (GUID) for the card
associated with this credential. The GUID is normally
provided automatically when the card is read during
enrollment; however, if no GUID appears here and you
require a GUID for this credential, click the Generate button
to create one.
Click this button to automatically populate the GUID field
with a GUID number.
First Name
This field displays the first name of the person associated
with this credential.
Last Name
This field displays the last name of the person associated
with this credential.
Panel ID
Enter the Panel ID for this card.
This ID is a sub-identifier or subset of the Site ID and is used
to match encoded user smart cards to any number of field
readers. The Panel ID is loaded into Cogent readers (such as
the Hirsch RUU-GEN and SmartGate) using the reader's
configuration software. The Panel ID itself is assigned by an
administrator or other qualified operator during that
configuration process. The Panel ID is subsequently used to
specify subgroups of readers and cards for a given area or
panel within the site.
A match of both Site ID and Panel ID is required before the
encoded user smart card can work on a given Cogent
biometric reader.
Site ID
Enter the Site ID for this card.
This ID is used to match a given encoded user smart card
with any number of Cogent smart readers (such as the
Hirsch RUU-GEN and SmartGate). The Site ID is
programmed into the readers using the reader's configuration
software. The Site ID itself is assigned by an administrator or
other qualified operator during that configuration process. A
match of Site ID value between the card and reader is
required before the reader allows the card to be read. This
feature is like the Facility Code used for access control
credentials that tie the card to a given site. The Site ID
identifies the overall site relationship of the biometric cards
and readers.
A match of both Site ID and Panel ID is required before the
encoded user smart card can work on a given Cogent
biometric reader.
160
Credentials
MAN007-0211
PIN
Enter the PIN for this card. This PIN need not be the same as
the PIN entered on the General page.
Issued
Specify the day and date on which this card was issued.
Expires
Specify the day and date on which this card expires.
CSN
This is a read-only field. The Card Stamp Number is hard
coded on a CAC card and automatically populates this field
when the card is read during enrollment.
Left Hand
Click the appropriate box to indicate the finger on the left
hand you want to scan. The box turns green. Click Enroll
Template 1 button. For more on this, see “Writing Fingerprint
Data to a Credential” on page 162.
Click this button to start the finger scan on the selected finger.
Right Hand
Click the appropriate box to indicate the finger on the right
hand you want to scan. The box turns green. Click Enroll
Template 2 button. For more on this, see “Writing Fingerprint
Data to a Credential” on page 162.
Click this button to start the finger scan on the selected finger.
Writing Fingerprint Data to a Credential
With the advent of smart cards, it is now possible to write biometric information,
specifically fingerprint data, to a card. The amount of fingerprint information you can
write depends on the memory capacity of the card. In general, 1 MB cards allow you to
write one finger print, whereas 2 MB and 4 MB cards enable you to write two
fingerprints to a given card.
To write a fingerprint to a card:
1.
Connect a fingerprint reader (sensor) to the Velocity server or workstation via a
USB connection.
As a USB device, the fingerprint reader should self-configure and be automatically
recognized by the operating system once it is plugged in. If the operating system
has any problems recognizing the reader, consult your fingerprint reader
installation guide for information.
2.
3.
Launch Velocity.
Open the Enrollment Manager.
The Enrollment Manager main page appears.
4.
5.
Double click the name of the person whose fingerprints you want to attach to their
credential.
From the credential pane, either click an existing credential or click Add New
Credential to create a new credential.
The Credential Properties screen appears. If you are creating a new credential, fill
out the appropriate information for the first four pages as you would normally do.
6.
Click on the Biometrics tab.
The Biometrics page appears.
Credentials
161
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
7.
From the 'SC Readers' pick list, select the fingerprint reader you want to use to scan
the fingerprints.
Only fingerprint readers previously attached to and configured for this Velocity
computer appear in this list.
8.
9.
Fill out the required fields, including these:
• Panel ID
• Site ID
• PIN
In the Left Hand section, click to select the finger whose print you want to take.
The selected box turns green.
10. Click the
button.
A screen like this appears:
11. Follow the instructions above the window. Normally, these instructions follow this
order:
• Place finger on sensor...
• Remove finger from sensor...
Generally it takes two passes before the sensor can fully capture a fingerprint. As
the scanning is completed, the finger print appears in the window.

162
Make sure you are scanning the finger you specified. If you have trouble
reading a fingerprint, rub the finger you are using next to your nose or
some other part of your face where there is some oil, then place your
finger on the sensor again.
Credentials
MAN007-0211
The Finger Enrollment dialog box disappears and the Biometric page reappears like
this example:
12. To enroll a right hand fingerprint, repeat Steps 9 - 10 using the Right Hand section
and click the
button.
13. Once you have captured the fingerprint(s) you require, place the card to which you
want to write the biometric credential on an attached card reader/writer.
14. Click Write.
The fingerprint and associated credential data is written to the selected card. When
the card reader has finished writing data to the selected card, a message like this
appears:
15. Click OK.
16. Click OK again to return to the Enrollment Manager main screen.
ID Formats (IDF)
Hirsch has created seven different ID formats (IDFs) each of which qualifies the person
for a different access level and, depending on the door encountered (Card only, Code
only, or Dual Technology), requires a different series of steps to enter or exit.
Each IDF is defined in the following table, indicating how each IDF would respond to a
specific door configuration:
Dual Reader
(Normal
Operation)
Dual Reader
(Card + Code
only)
ScramblePad
Only
Card Reader
Only
IDF 1: Keypad
Only
Enter PIN
Enter PIN
Enter PIN
N/A
IDF 2: Card
Only
Present card
Present card
N/A
Present card
IDF 3: Dual
Present card,
enter PIN
Present card,
enter PIN
N/A
N/A
IDF 4: Card +
Dual
Present card,
enter PIN
Present card
N/A
Present card
IDF 5: Keypad
+ Dual
Present card,
enter PIN or
code only
Enter PIN
Enter PIN
N/A
ID Format
(IDF)
Credentials
163
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
ID Format
(IDF)
Dual Reader
(Normal
Operation)
Dual Reader
(Card + Code
only)
IDF 6: Keypad
+ Card
Present card or
enter PIN
IDF 7:
Keypad/Card/D
ual
Present card,
enter PIN
ScramblePad
Only
Card Reader
Only
Present card or
enter PIN
Enter PIN
Present card
Present card or
enter PIN
Enter PIN
Present card
At a dual-technology reader—a device possessing both a card reader and a
keypad—qualified individuals with both keypad-only and card-only access can be
served in addition to people with Dual Code (Card + Code) access.
People using dual codes must swipe their cards through a reader then enter their PIN
at the keypad before access can be given.
During times of high traffic volume, Hirsch has created a Card or Code Only Time Zone
(CCOTZ) feature. This means that at certain dual readers for specific times of the day,
the controller will allow either Code Only or Card Only access to those persons enrolled
for that feature.
To use this feature, a person must be enrolled as either Card Only or Code Only and
Dual Access; then during a predefined time zone (CCOTZ) the qualified person can use
just the one code or card to enter even though at other times, both card and code are
required to enter. At the same time, even while in CCOTZ mode, persons enrolled as
Dual, Card Only, or Code Only, will still have access using their normal access methods.
In Velocity, all IDFs generate only one record. Velocity can support very large user
numbers.
Duress Digits
If a qualified person is being forced to open a door against his/her will, the person can
indicate this coercion by entering an extra ‘duress’ digit. By entering this digit, the
controller permits access while issuing a silent alarm, immediately alerting the Velocity
operator to the situation.
In order to use a duress digit, the controller must first be enabled for this feature and a
duress digit must be specified.

Only use this feature if an operator will be monitoring the system.
Duress digits are entered at the keypad immediately after the qualified person’s PIN
code. For example, a person at a ScramblePad might enter this code:
START 184059 #
where 18405 is the person’s normal PIN number and 9 is the duress digit.
Setting Up Duress Digits
To set up duress digits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
164
In the system tree pane, reveal the controller and right click.
Select Properties.
Select the Setup tab.
Under ‘Options’, check the ‘Enable Duress Alarm Mode’ box.
Select OK to save.
Credentials
MAN007-0211
6.
7.
8.
9.
Open the Enrollment Manager.
Double click Add New Credential.
In the ‘Code’ section, select a Duress Digit.
Save the credential.
Using Duress Digits With Code Extension Digits
If you have enabled a person for a duress digit as well as qualified them for a function
group, the duress digit comes after the user code while the function group extension
digits come after the asterisk.
For example, if a person with the PIN 111 is defined for a duress digit of 9, this person
would enter a duress code like this example:
1119
However, if the person wants to express a duress digit while also specifying function
group controls (1 in this case), he/she would enter the duress digit, the asterisk, then
the extension digit like this:
1119*1
For information on using extension digits, refer to “Defining Code Extensions” on page
272.
Credentials: Set Expiration Date
The Set Expiration Date dialog box looks like this example:
The Set Expiration Date dialog box includes these fields:
Expire on
Date:
Click to select this radio button if you want this credential to
expire on a specific date at a specific time. The date and time
field to the right is activated.
This radio button cannot be deselected unless a UDF date type
field is available.
At the date field, use the down arrow,
, to the right of this
combo box to display a calendar. Select the month and day on
which this card/code is activated. You can use the arrow keys to
go side to side or up and down for values.
The current time is automatically supplied. To change this, click
in the time fields and enter new values as required.
Alternatively, in the combo box to the right, select from a list of
common date ranges, such as 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month, and
so on. This automatically enters a value in the preceding field.
You can then modify the values in the left combo box as
required.
Credentials
165
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Expire on UDF
Data:
Click to select this radio button if you want this credential to
expire on a date specified by a value in a UDF field. The time
when the expiration takes place is always the end of the last
minute before midnight (11:59 PM) on the date designated by
the UDF.
For example, if you have defined a UDF for ‘Anniversary’, this
indicates that anyone given this credential will have it expire on
the last second of 11:59 PM on the employee's anniversary.
This field is only activated if one or more UDFs with a type 'Date'
are defined in Enrollment Manager.
At the pick list field, use the down arrow,
, to display a list of
all currently-defined UDFs with a type ‘Date’. Select the UDF with
the type 'Date' you want to serve as the expiration date.
Click OK when you're finished to return to the Credential Properties General page. The
expiration date you specified now appears in the 'Expire' field.
Credentials: Link to Template
When the 'Link to:' field is checked and a pre-existing Credential Template is selected
on either the Credential Templates Option Properties page or the Credential Option
Properties page, certain fields on an individual credential can be changed when the
credential template to which it is linked changes.
An example of this field in its context appears below.
If the 'Link to:' box is checked, all fields associated with the specified Linked Template
will be disabled (read-only) on the Credential Properties Option sheet. Unchecking the
'Link to:' box from Linked Template option activates these read-only fields allowing
qualified operators to override the template settings. When the OK button is pressed, a
dialog asking for confirmation of the override is displayed.
This enables a qualified operator to change values of associated credential retroactively
just by changing the credential template to which these credentials are linked.
Only certain fields on the Credential Properties sheet are affected by the 'Link to:'
feature. These are:


166
Activate/Expiration Date fields on the General tab
Access and Control function sections on the Function tab
Credentials
MAN007-0211


Day/Use/Absentee Limits section on the Limits tab
Print / Issue Control sections on the Options tab
All other fields and sections are user-specific and cannot be changed by changing the
underlying credential template.
For example, say you want to change the expiration date for all credentials associated
with a specific template. The old way required you to go through each credential
separately and make the change to the affected expiration fields. Using the 'Link to:'
feature, however, you can change the expiration date in the linked credential template
and the new expiration date ripples down through all linked credentials.
If the 'Link to:' checkbox is cleared, a confirmation message box appears, asking you to
confirm the clearing of the box. If you confirm the change, the credential is unlinked
from the template and the credential fields may be edited; however there is no further
connection to the template the credential was linked to.
If you change the name of the credential template in the 'Link to:' pick list, a message
appears asking you to confirm this selection. If you confirm the change of template, the
credential fields associated with the old template are changed to reflect the new values
from the new template.
If a qualified operator edits a template that has existing credentials linked to it then
presses OK, a confirmation dialog appears listing all credentials linked to the template.
If you confirm this change, all linked credentials are changed according to the new
values in the template.
Credentials: Concatenating UDFs
You have several possibilities for entering data in the Credential 'Data' and 'MATCH'
fields:



You can enter specific numbers taken from the blank card
You can create and enter a number of your own
You can generate numbers automatically composed of UDFs
Steps for using this third approach are discussed here.
To concatenate a value for both the 'Data' and 'MATCH' fields:
1.
Make sure you have one or more UDFs already defined through the User Defined
Setup feature.
Each UDF must be one of these qualifying types: Number, Auto-unique,
Unique, or Auto-sequential.
2.
3.
Create a new or edit an existing credential or credential template.
At the General page of the Credential Properties sheet, select an IDF that includes
a card.
The UDF... button is activated.
4.
Credentials
Click the UDF... button.
167
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Concatenate UDFs dialog box appears. All currently defined UDFs appear in
the window.
5.
6.
7.
Check each UDF you want to use to concatenate a value.
Using the Move Up and Move Down buttons, list the available UDFs as you
require. This determines the order in which the values are hashed to make the
relevant Data and MATCH values.
Click OK.
From now on, each person assigned this credential will have the values entered for the
specified UDFs combined to generate a unique 'Data' and 'MATCH' field value. The
'Data' field value is preceded by <UDF> to indicate that this value is a concatenation. A
concatenated value only appears once values for the required fields are supplied.
Credentials: Reissue
Click the Reissue button on the Credential Options properties sheet to indicate the
current credential has been reissued for some reason. The Reissue Credential dialog
box appears like this example:
The fields on this dialog box include:
Date
A read-only field that indicates the current date.
Issue #
A read-only field indicating the issue number. This increments by
one each time a new issue is entered.
Reason
Select from the available options in the drop-down list. These
include:
• Lost
• Stolen
• Destroyed
Comment
168
Enter commentary on reasons for the reissue.
Credentials
MAN007-0211
Click OK when you're finished. The new reissue appears in the issue table as shown in
the example below:
Credential Tasks
Use the Credential pane in the Enrollment Manager to perform several tasks on one or
more specified credentials.
To perform credential tasks:
1.
From the people tree pane, select the person(s) on whose credential(s) you want
to perform a task.
To select multiple persons, either use the Shift + click combination to select a
contiguous group, or Ctrl + click to pick multiple people.
If you have only selected one person, that person's Personal Information form
appears with all associated credentials displayed in the credentials pane. Go to
Step 5.
If you have selected multiple people, proceed to Step 2.
2.
3.
If you have selected multiple people, right click on the highlighted group. An option
list appears.
Select Display Credentials...
The Credentials – Multiple People window appears like this example:
4.
5.
Credentials
Select one or more credentials.
Do one of these:
• If this is a single person, right click a credential displayed in the Credential
pane.
• If this is multiple credentials, right click the selected credentials in the
Credentials – Multiple People window.
169
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
A drop-down option list appears like this example.
6.
Select one of the options from this list:
Badge
Select this option to display several sub-options that apply to
the display and modification of the badge. Three options are
available:
Preview... to display the Badge Preview dialog box.
Print to print the current badge associated with this
credential.
Edit... to start Badge Designer and display the currently
assigned Badge Template for this credential. If more than one
credential is selected, this option is inactive.
Tag
Select this option to tag the specified credential. A check
mark appears before the option. It can be deactivated at any
time by re-selecting the checked option.
For more on this, refer to “Tagging” on page 175.
Alert
Select this option to alert the specified credential. A check
mark appears before the option. It can be deactivated at any
time by re-selecting the checked option.
For more on this, refer to “Alert” on page 174.
Disable
Select this option to disable the specified credential. The
credential is temporarily disabled and a check mark appears
before the option. It can be reactivated at any time by
re-selecting the checked option.
Forgive
Passback
Select this option to forgive any passback violation for this
credential. The event appears in the Event Viewer.
This option is particularly useful in an emergency, when a
passback violation must be forgiven in order to get people
out of a passback area as quickly as possible.
For more on this, refer to “Forgiving Passback” on page 174.
170
Credentials
MAN007-0211
Override
Code Tamper
Select this option to override any code tamper alarm
associated with this credential. The event appears in the
Event Viewer.
This allows a credential that has been disabled because of
code tamper to be reused after an operator confirms that an
authorized user made a mistake.
Reset Limit
Count
Select this option to reset the limit count for this credential to
the default value. The event appears in the Event Viewer.
This essentially awards an extension to the credential holder.
Force
Download
Select this option to force an immediate download of this
credential's information to the relevant controllers.
For more on this, refer to “Downloading Credentials” on page
104 or “Downloading Multiple Credentials” on page 105.
Unassign
Select this option to unassign this credential from the current
person. The credential disappears from the Credential pane
and is added to the Unassigned Credentials queue in the
Enrollment Manager's Credential Tree pane.
For more on this, see “Unassigning Credentials” on page
104.
Delete
Select this option to delete the credential from the Velocity
database. A prompt appears asking you to confirm your
choice. Click Yes and the credential is permanently removed
from the database.
Properties...
Select this option to display the Credential Properties dialog
box for this credential. See “Credential Properties Dialog Box”
on page 147.
If more than one credential is selected, this option is inactive
Display Credential Information
Credential information can be displayed manually, through the Display Credential
option in either Alarm Viewer or Event Viewer, or automatically through the Show
Credential Information options in Graphics. Auto display credentials can also be
enabled for all doors through the Auto Display Credentials option under the Door
General Properties sheet.
The credential information window pops up whenever a person enters or exits a
designated door. When a door is enabled for this feature, the Credential window pops
up automatically, displaying information relevant information on the person holding the
credential. To display a photo of the person at the door, a qualified operator must first
assign a badge template that includes a photograph placeholder in either general door
properties or general preferences.
This window can appear whenever Velocity issues either an Access Grant or Access
Denied within the following modules:



Credentials
Alarm Viewer
Event Viewer
Graphics
171
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
There is one pop-up window allowed per door on a drawing board in Graphics. If more
than one credential window is displayed on a graphic drawing board at the same time
(for multiple doors), the windows will arrange themselves so as to be visible at the
same time.
The credential pop-up only shows the last action performed on the door.
You can restrict the use of this feature by enabling or disabling the 'Default Display
Credential' permission on the Graphics Role page.
Absentee Limiting
Absentee Limiting, also called Absentee Rule, sets the maximum number of
consecutive days a person may be absent – and therefore not use their ID to enter a
secure area or perform a control function – before the credential(s) used by that
person is disabled or deleted from the database.
A person can possess more than one credential each of which may specify a different
absentee limit.
For example, if Rachel Smith is only allowed six absences from work when her badge
(credential) is issued and Velocity detects that she has been absent seven times in a
row, her credential is disabled and she can no longer use that card to gain admittance
to the specified area (door group). If Rachel Smith uses her badge before the absentee
limit is reached, the count is reset.
Absentee Limiting is enabled and the number of absences are specified through the
Limits property sheet on either the Credential dialog box or the Credential Template
dialog box.
Use Limiting
Use limiting, also referred to as use count, sets a maximum number of uses an
authorized credential can perform in order to enter a secure area or perform a control
function.
Velocity allows up to a maximum of 255 uses. Once the use count expires the person
is disabled or optionally deleted.
For example, Mr. Brown is a temporary employee who has been assigned a credential
that gives him access to the research lab. Since Mr. Brown's contract calls for him to
finish his job within thirty days, his credential entitles him to only sixty accesses (one
entry and one exit per day) before the credential is invalidated. (If Mr. Brown is a
smoker, ratchet up the use count.) After thirty working days (assuming he doesn't miss
any days due to injury or illness), Mr. Brown's card no longer allows him to enter the
lab.
Day Limiting
Day limiting sets a maximum number of days an authorized credential can access an
assigned area before access privileges are withdrawn.
Up to a maximum of 255 days can be allowed. Once the day limit expires the
credential is disabled or optionally deleted.
172
Credentials
MAN007-0211
For example, Mr. Brown is a temporary employee who has been assigned a credential
that gives him access to the research lab. Since Mr. Brown's contract calls for him to
finish his job within thirty days, his credential entitles him to only thirty days before the
credential is invalidated. After thirty calendar days, Mr. Brown's card no longer allows
him to enter the lab.

Day Limiting covers the same territory as Temporary Days.
Executive Passback Override
When a person is granted executive passback override privileges it means passback
limitations don't apply to this credential or person. No passback violation messages will
be issued and an access-grant always works.
For example, John has two-way access to his office and to the Lobby main door. But if
he tailgates behind someone into the lobby, he can't get into his office. If an operator
awards him (or anyone else) with the Executive Override option, his tail-gating or any
other passback infringements are automatically forgiven; access is granted.
Executive override of passback is accomplished through the Options property sheet of
either the Credential dialog box or the Credential Template dialog box.
Forgiving Passback
There are times when it is necessary to forgive passback, such as when an emergency
requires that everyone leave the building immediately. If passback is enabled for an
area or a credential, Velocity normally records this emergency access as a validation
and may not let the person back into the area once the emergency is over. To avoid
this situation, the operator can forgive passback, either for an individual credential, as
shown below, or for an entire area, as explained in Forgive Users.
To forgive passback for a person:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Enrollment Manager.
Select the person whose passback you want to forgive.
From the Credential pane, right click on the credential with the passback enabled.
Select Forgive from the pop-up option list.
Forgiving Users
There are emergencies, such as fire or earthquake, when you must effect a rapid
evacuation of a facility no matter what access privileges the persons inside hold. To
perform a rapid evacuation, Velocity provides the Forgive Users features. This instructs
controllers to overlook all current passback and occupancy restrictions in the interests
of a speedy exit from the endangered area.
This function can be accomplished in two ways:


By a qualified operator from a Velocity workstation
By a qualified operator or person from a specific reader/keypad
To forgive all persons from a Velocity workstation:
1.
2.
From the System Tree pane, expand the DIGI*TRAC Configuration folder until the
effected controller appears.
Right click the controller.
A list of options appears.
3.
Credentials
Select Download > Forgive Users from the list.
173
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The instructions are immediately downloaded to the specific controller. No access is
denied to evacuating personnel, no matter the current state of their credentials.
To forgive all persons from a specific reader/keypad:
1.
2.
3.
From the Enrollment Manager, create a credential or credential template that
includes the Special Function Indexed Command - Forgive All Users.
Assign this credential or credential template to a qualified person.
After an emergency, one of the people possessing this special credential enters a
code or card at the reader guarding the entrance/exit to the evacuated area
(passback zone).
All violations recorded during the evacuation from this passback zone are forgiven.
Alert
When Alert is enabled, a special audio alert sounds at the keypad where a person
enters a code/card that is specified as an alerted credential. This audio alert can also
occur when the code triggers a control zone that is alerted.
Alert is disabled (unchecked) as the default state.
Use Alerts for messaging in order to notify a person or group of people that some
special condition exists as they use their code. For example, a message is waiting for
them or an unscheduled meeting is taking place. The alert is a series of four “beeps”
and a flashing LED on the ScramblePad where the transaction takes place.
Alerts only sound at the keypad where the code is entered.
Tagging
When you enable tagging, it automatically sends a special Tag Alarm to the Alarm
Viewer each time the person with this credential uses the code/card, regardless of
whether access was granted or denied. This alarm can also be issued when the
card/code triggers a tagged control zone.
When tagging is checked it is enabled. When tagging is unchecked it is disabled.
Disabled is the default.
Tagging can be enabled for controllers, credentials, control zones, master control zones,
door groups, and master door groups.
Auto-Delete
Use this feature to automatically delete a credential from the database whenever it
reaches one of these user limits:



use limit
absentee limit
day limit
This keeps the maximum amount of memory available for adding new people;
however, this can also prevent a person from being identified when he/she attempts
access after they have been disabled by reaching a pre-defined user limit.
Normally, a credential is disabled.
The auto-delete credential setting is selected by checking the Auto-Delete Credential
check box on the Limits property sheet of either the Credential dialog box or the
Credential Template dialog box.
174
Credentials
MAN007-0211
A similar feature is Expire on: which enables the operator to specify a day and time
when the credential expires. At that time, this feature allows the operator to disable the
credential, unassign the credential, or delete it from the relevant controller. The feature
is available through the General page on either the Credential dialog box or the
Credential Template dialog box.
Credentials
175
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
176
Credentials
MAN007-0211
Report Manager
Use the Report Manager to generate reports on Velocity's activity. The Report Manager
comes with more than sixty standard reports for instant generation of reports dealing
with every aspect of your facility's security. Report Manager also includes sophisticated
sorting and filtering tools that enable you to customize reports to your specific
requirements.
The Report Manager currently supports reports for these topics:





Customization Reports (3 reports)
DIGI*TRAC Configurations (19 reports)
History Logs (13 reports)
Person Information (27 reports)
Velocity Configuration (24 reports)
You can create additional report groups and reports as required.
Most report types a customer might desire are available as standard. However, for
those installations that require customized reports, Report Manager also imports
reports created using Crystal Reports, the industry-standard report formatter and
generator.

You cannot open Report Manager until you have selected a report
printer in Preferences. If you attempt to do this, an error message will
appear.
177
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The following flowchart below may help you understand how to use Report Manager.
The subjects covered in this chapter include:
178
Topic
Refer to:
Opening Report Manager
page 179
Report Manager Main Screen
page 180
Generating a Report
page 183
Customizing an Existing Report
page 190
MAN007-0211
Opening Report Manager
Before you can open any reports or use the Report Manager, you must first select one
of the printers attached to this system as the report printer on the Printers page of
Preferences. If you try to open Report Manager without this selection, you get an error
message and Report Manager won't open.
To open Report Manager:
1.
2.
Open Velocity. The Velocity screen appears.
Do one of the following:
• Click the Reports icon on the Icon bar,
.
• From the Components window, double click the Report Manager module.
• From the Velocity option bar, select Console > Report Manager.
The main Reports Manager screen appears like the following example:
For details on the Report Manager main screen, refer to the next topic, “Report
Manager Main Screen” on page 180.
Opening Report Manager
179
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Report Manager Main Screen
The main Report Manager screen looks like this example:
The screen contains a number of parts each of which is explained below.
Menu tool bar
This includes three options and associated sub-options.
For more on this, refer to “Report Manager: Menu Bar” on page
181.
Icon tool bar
This bar gives you access to the basic Report Manager functions.
For more on this, refer to “Report Manager: Icon Tool Bar” on
page 182.
Use Report
Default
Criteria and
Sorting
Check this box to use the default criteria and sorting settings for
each page. The program automatically generates a report based
on the default ordering and criteria.
To customize an existing report by creating new criteria and
sorting, leave this box unchecked. The fields below the box are
activated.
You cannot customize reports unless this box is unchecked.
Criteria page
This page enables you to select all the database fields or select
one or more fields on which to report.
For more on this, refer to “Criteria Page” on page 193.
Sorting page
Click the Sorting tab to display this page. This page enables you
to sort criteria by columns.
For more on this, refer to “Sorting Page” on page 195.
Selected
Criteria List
pane
This pane displays all criteria selected (added) by the Criteria
and Sorting pages. You can change the criteria for either
selecting or sorting the information you need right in this pane.
For more on this, refer to “Selected Criteria List Pane” on page
196.
180
Report Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Report Tree
pane
This pane displays all currently available reports. Simply select a
report from the list and then either print it or use the Criteria and
Sorting pages to customize it, if required.
An expanded version of this pane is shown in the following
example:
You can also add a new report folder to this tree, add a new
report, and import externally created reports to populate the
report group.
Report Manager: Menu Bar
The Report Manager menu bar includes these options:
File
Print Preview
Bring up the Print Preview Screen for the currently selected
report. This option is also available through the icon tool
bar.
Print (Ctrl + P)
Print the currently displayed report to a predetermined
printer. This option is also available through the icon tool
bar.
Exit
Exit Report Manager.
Edit
Reports
The suboptions are:
Delete – Delete the currently selected report group.
Rename – Rename the currently selected report group.
New Report Definition File... – Create a new report
definition file.
Edit Report Definition File... – Edit an existing report
definition file.
Import Report and Report Definition File – Import an
existing report and its associated definition file.
Export Report and Report Definition File – Export an
existing report and its associated definition file to a backup
location.
Refresh
Report Manager Main Screen
Refresh data for the currently displayed report. All values
are immediately updated.
181
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Preferences...
Access the Report Manager preferences page.
For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s
Guide.
Help
Help Topics
Consult the online help for Report Manager.
Version
Find the version number of this module.
Report Manager: Icon Tool Bar
The Report Manager icon bar includes these functions:
Print the report.
Preview the report before printing.
Add a report group.
Add a new report.
Import a report and report definition file.
Export a report and report definition file.
Add a new report definition file.
Edit an existing report definition file.
Delete report.
182
Report Manager Main Screen
MAN007-0211
Creating a Report
This section describes how to create and print a report.

Before you can open any reports or use the Report Manager, you must
first assign a printer as the report printer on the Printers page of
Preferences. If you attempt to do it without this assignment, you get an
error message.
To create and print a report:
1.
Open Report Manager.
The Report Manager main screen appears.
2.
From the Report Tree pane, select one of the existing reports.
The criteria for that report are loaded into the Criteria page.
3.
4.
5.
Select one of these options:
• To specify a report with the full complement of criteria defined by the default
report, check the 'Use Report Default Criteria and Sorting' box.
• To customize your report further—including or excluding components and
fields as well as defining precise criteria for this report—leave the 'Use Report
Default Criteria and Sorting' unchecked then customize the report.
When you're finished, do one of these:
• Click the Preview button,
. The Preview screen appears as described on
page 198.
• Select File > Preview from the menu bar to review the finished report
before printing it. The Preview screen appears as described on page 198.
• Double click the report in the report tree.
Do one of these:
• From the Print Preview screen, click the Print button,
.
• From the main Report Manager menu bar, select File > Print.
The report is printed.
Add a New Report
To add a new report:
1.
2.
Import the file you want to use from another source—such as Crystal Reports or
Report Manager export.
From the report tree pane, right click the Report Group into which you want the
new report placed.
An option list pops up.
3.
Creating a Report
Select Add > Report...
183
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Add Report dialog box appears like this example:
By default, the dialog box selects the \Reports subdirectory.
4.
If required, select another directory.
Most of the time, you will want to store all reports in the default directory.
5.
6.
At the 'File name' combo box, either enter a new name or specify an existing
name.
Click Open.
The new file is added to the report tree in Report Manager.
Once this is done, you can customize the report as required.
List of Existing Reports
Velocity currently supports these reports:
Customization Reports
Components
Customization
All Components settings currently recognized by Velocity as
specified in Customization Manager.
Events
Configuration
All event settings—such as alarms, RTNs, events, and
software—currently recognized by Velocity. This includes not
only DIGI*TRAC hardware events but also integrated device
events, such as DVR and CCTV events.
Point
Customizations
All point customizations performed by qualified operators
using Customization Manager.
DIGI*TRAC Configuration
184
Controller Master
Control Zone
All settings for all master control zones by controller.
Controller
Passback Zone
Occupancy
All settings associated with controller passback zone
occupancy settings.
Controller
Standard Control
Zone
All settings for all standard control zones by controller.
Controllers
Brief summary of all controllers on this system.
Creating a Report
MAN007-0211
Controllers with
Detail
All attributes defined for each controller in the system,
including ID, name, description, address, model number,
general setups, and miscellaneous setup parameters such as
alarm relay timer settings.
Basically anything entered in the Controllers configuration
dialog box is reflected on this page.
Doors
Brief summary of doors associated with each controller on
this system.
Doors with Detail
Complete description of all settings for each door in system.
Expansion Inputs
Brief summary of inputs defined for or recognized by the
system.
Expansion Inputs
with Detail
Complete description of all settings for each expansion input
in the system.
Expansion Relays
Brief summary of all expansion relays defined for or
recognized by the system.
Expansion Relays
with Detail
Complete description of all settings for each expansion relay
in the system.
Inputs
Brief summary of all inputs defined for or recognized by this
system including the module type and all other settings
defined by the Input Configuration dialog box.
Inputs with Detail
Complete description of all settings for each input in the
system.
Network Layout
Description of each site defined for this system,
cross-referenced by server and port. This includes most of the
information specified in the System Tree pane.
Printers
Brief summary of each printer recognized by the system.
Readers
Brief summary of each reader defined for or recognized by
this system including all settings defined by the Reader
Configuration dialog box.
Readers with
Detail
Complete description of all settings for each reader in the
system.
Relays
Brief summary of each relay defined for or recognized by this
system including settings defined by the Relay Configuration
dialog box.
Relays with Detail
Complete description of all settings for each relay in the
system.
History Logs
Acknowledged
Cleared Alarms by
Operator
Creating a Report
All acknowledged and cleared alarms cross-referenced by the
operator who acknowledged or cleared them.
185
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Active Alarms by
Date
All unacknowledged/uncleared alarms cross-referenced by
date.
Active Alarms by
Date with
Comments
All unacknowledged/uncleared alarms cross-referenced by
date with comments.
Alarm Log by Date
Complete log of all alarms, both acknowledge and
unacknowledged, cross-referenced by date
Alarm Log by Date
with Comments
Complete log of all alarms, both acknowledge and
unacknowledged, cross-referenced by date with any
comments entered by the operator for individual alarms
All Events Log by
Category
Complete list of all events ordered by category (e.g. event
type).
All Events Log by
Date
Complete list of all events logged by the system, ordered by
date.
All Events Log by
Date
Complete list of all events logged by the system, ordered by
date.
Note: It has been reported that after restoring a 2003 server
database on a SQL 2008 server, the All Events Log by Date
report will not open. To fix this, simply delete or rename the
Velocity LDF files from the Microsoft SQL Server/MSSQL/data
subdirectory. The appropriate LDF files will be regenerated
and the report should open without difficulty.
External Events
Log
List of all external events logged by Velocity.
Internal Events Log
List of all internal events logged by Velocity.
Operator Log
List of all events recorded by operators, sorted operator.
Transaction Log
List of all transactions recorded by the system.
Transaction Log by
Transaction Type
List of all transactions recorded by the system and sorted by
transaction type.
Person Information
186
Active Credentials
with User-Defined
Fields 1-2-3
List of all active credentials including the first three
user-defined fields.
Credential Current
Issue Status
Lists the current issue status for all credentials registered by
the Enrollment Manager for this system including credential
number, last access date, net address, and so on. The card
and code numbers are not included here.
Credential Current
Issue Status (with
UDF 1-2-3)
Lists the current issues status for all credentials with UDF 1, 2,
or 3 registered by the Enrollment Manager for this system.
Creating a Report
MAN007-0211
Creating a Report
Credential Reissue
History
Lists the reissue history for each existing credential.
Credential Status
Lists the current status for each existing credential.
Credential Status
with Codes and
Cards
Lists the current status for all credentials registered by the
Enrollment Manager for this system including Code and Card
numbers.
Dossier Style by
Person
List of all persons registered by Enrollment Manager including
their photograph and signature (where available),
cross-referenced by person.
Expired And
To-Be-Expired
Person Access
List of all persons whose credentials have expired or are
about to expire, cross-referenced by Name, Credential ID,
Function, Function Group, Activation Date, Expiration Date
and Door Group.
Expired
Credentials
List of all credentials whose expiration dates have passed
without update or renewal. This does not include the code or
card number.
Expired
Credentials with
Codes and Cards
List of all credentials whose expiration dates have passed
without update or renewal including the code or card
number.
Expired Person
Access Summary
Summary of all accesses granted to each person whose
credential has expired.
Inactive and
Disabled
Credentials
List of all credentials that are now either inactive or disabled.
Last Access by
Person
List of the last access granted for each person, sorted by
person.
Lost Cards
List of all credentials that are recorded as lost. This does not
include the code or card number.
Lost Cards with
Codes and Cards
List of all credentials that are recorded as lost with code or
card number.
Lost Cards with
User-Defined
Fields 1-2-3
List of all credentials that are recorded as lost with their
associated user-defined field values for UDFs 1 - 3.
Person Access and
Function Group
Summary
List of credentials sorted by person and function groups
assigned to each credential.
Person Access and
Function Group
Summary with
Codes and Cards
List of credentials sorted by person and function groups
assigned to each credential. This includes the code and card
numbers for each credential.
187
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Person Access by
Door
List of all accesses granted or denied cross-referenced by
door.
Person Access
Summary
Summary of all accesses either granted or denied for each
credential cross-referenced by persons.
Person Access
Summary with
Codes and Cards
Summary of all accesses either granted or denied for each
credential cross-referenced by persons. This includes the
code and card numbers for each relevant credential.
Person Function
Group Summary
Summary of the function groups to which each credential is
assigned cross-referenced by the people possessing the
credential.
Person Function
Group Summary
with Codes and
Cards
Summary of the function groups to which each credential is
assigned cross-referenced by the people possessing the
credential. This includes the code and card numbers for each
relevant credential.
Person Summary
with UDF 1-2-3
Brief summary of every person defined by the system.
Person Summary
with Codes and
Cards
Brief summary of every person defined by the system
including their code and card numbers.
Who is Inside
Where
List of all people currently identified as inside one or more
defined passback zones.
Velocity Configuration
188
Badge Templates
List of all currently defined badge templates.
Command Sets
List of command sets defined for this system with ID, name,
command type, affected devices, and command string
entered. All information entered in the Command Sets dialog
box is shown here.
Comports
List of COM ports currently defined for and connected to this
Velocity system. This includes controllers, printers, switchers,
cameras, and photo/signature capture devices.
Credential
Templates
List all credential templates currently defined for this system.
Door Groups
List of all defined door groups with basic settings.
Door Groups with
Persons
List of all defined door groups with a list of the persons
assigned to them.
Function Group
Extensions
List of all extensions defined for each Function Group,
cross-referenced by the Function Group.
Function Groups
with Persons
List of functions groups defined for this system
cross-referenced by the persons assigned to each group.
Creating a Report
MAN007-0211
Creating a Report
Functions with
Persons
List of functions cross-referenced by the persons authorized
to use them. Functions are defined by the 'Function' field
under the function page of the credential dialog box.
Holiday Schedules
All holiday schedules as defined by the Holiday dialog box.
Holidays
All holidays defined by the Holiday dialog box.
Linked Credentials
A list of all credentials that currently linked to their credential
templates.
Master Door
Groups
List of all master door groups defined for this system
including all door groups included in this master group.
Master Door
Groups with
Persons
List of all master door groups defined for this system
including all persons associated with each door group
included in this master group.
Operators
List of all operators defined for the system by the Operator
Properties dialog box.
Person Groups
List of all currently defined person groups.
Person Templates
List of all currently defined person templates.
Roles with
Operators
List of all currently defined roles with the operators
(members) to which they are assigned.
Roles with
Permissions
List of all currently defined roles with an exhaustive list of
permissions defined for each.
Time Zones Grand Master
Time Zones
List of all Grand Master Time Zones as defined by the Time
Zone matrix.
Time Zones Master Time
Zones
List of all Master Time Zones as defined by the Time Zone
matrix.
Time Zones Standard Time
Zones
List of all Standard Time Zones as defined by the Time Zone
matrix.
Time Zones Standard Time
Zones in Use
List of all standard time zones currently in use as defined by
the Time Zone matrix.
189
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Customizing an Existing Report
You have the choice of either generating the pre-defined reports that come with
Velocity or customizing the reports by eliminating certain criteria from the final list or
sorting the existing criteria in any manner you need.
To customize an existing report:
1.
Open Report Manager.
The Report Manager main screen appears.
2.
From the Report Tree pane, select one of the existing reports.
The available data fields for that report are loaded into the 'Field' combo box on
the Criteria page.
For example, if you selected Readers from the System Tree pane, the 'Field' combo
box identifies four possible options:
•
•
•
•
Reader Name
Controller Name
Index
Address
The options displayed in the 'Function' combo box vary according to the options
selected in the 'Field' combo box.
3.
From the 'Field' combo box, select one of the available options.
Depending on the report type and option you selected in the 'Field' combo box,
several different combo and text boxes can appear.
4.
Click and select appropriate values in the one or more fields that now appear in
the 'Function' area.
Additional fields and boxes appear depending on the field and arguments
specified.
5.
6.
In the 'is' field, select either is or is not.
In the next field, select one of the available arguments, including equal to, less
than, greater than, starting with, or like.
If you specify the 'greater than' or 'less than' argument, an additional field 'or equal
to' check box appears. Check this box to indicate that the argument includes an
equal to clause, such as 'greater than or equal to'.
7.
In the variable window, do one of these:
• If you specify the 'equal to' argument, the variable window expands to
become a pick list from which you select one or more values. Select one or
more options from this list. If this report supports a range of values, you can
click the beginning value then hold down the Shift key and click the last value
in the range. To select non-contiguous values, hold down the Ctrl key while
clicking.
• If you specify the 'starting with' or 'like' argument, enter the value you want
the report to start with or be like.
• If you specify 'greater than' or 'less than', enter the value this criterion will be
greater than or less than. If it is also equal to, check the previous box.
For more on the criteria page, refer to the “Criteria Page” on page 193.
8.
When you're finished with this specific criterion, click the Add button.
The criterion is displayed in the Selected Criteria List pane.
190
Customizing an Existing Report
MAN007-0211
9.
Repeat steps 3 - 8 to add more criteria to this report.
An example of a typical customization process is shown below:
If you have selected one of the UDF reports, like the Person Summary (with UDF
1-2-3) or the Active Credentials With User Defined Fields 1-2-3, an additional
section appears below the variable fields called Select which user defined fields to
appear on the user defined columns, like this example:
10. If the 'Select which user defined fields...' section appears, from the three available
drop-down lists, select up to three user-defined fields you want to appear as
columns in the customized report.
11. If you need to add sorting elements to your report specifications, click the Sorting
tab and the Sorting Page appears.
12. From the 'Field' combo box, select the item (field) by which you want to sort.
The values appearing on the combo box list depend on the type of report you
have selected.
13. From the 'Direction' combo box, select either Ascending or Descending.
This indicates in which direction the selected field is used to sort: from least to
greatest value or vice versa.
For example, if you select 'Input Index' as the sorting point and indicate it should
be used as an Ascending sorting feature, then the Report Manager sorts the report
according to the Input Index, starting from the smallest value and proceeding down
the list to the highest value.
14. Click Add and the Sort Field function is added to the Selected Criteria List.
15. If there are any other sorting criteria you need to add, repeat steps 11 - 13.
Customizing an Existing Report
191
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
An example of the sorting customization process is shown below:
16. Go to the Selected Criteria List pane and click any line (criterion) you need to edit.
• To nest the line as an expression, click in the specific line's open parenthesis
column. A combo box appears. Select the number of parentheses you need
for this expression. To close the nested expression, click in the closed
parenthesis column of the specific line and another combo box appears.
Select the number of closed parentheses you need to satisfy this expression.
• To add an AND argument to include or an OR argument to exclude this part of
the expression, click in the AND/OR column of this line and a combo box
appears. Select either AND or OR.
To
remove a line, select it and press Delete.
17. Continue to edit lines to create boolean expressions as required.
A simple example of this process is shown below:
18. When you're finished, click the Preview button,
, or select File > Print
Preview from the menu bar to review the finished report before printing it.
19. If you need to modify the column header names appearing on this report, modify
the Report Definition File; otherwise, skip this step and continue to the next.
For more on the Report Definition File, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s
Guide.
20. To save the custom report, refer to “Saving Custom Reports” on page 197.
21. To print the report, click the Print button,
, or select File > Print from the
menu bar to print the report.
192
Customizing an Existing Report
MAN007-0211
Criteria Page
The Criteria page is one of two pages displayed at top right on the Report Manager.
Select the page by clicking the Criteria tab. The page looks like this example:
This page contains these fields:
Use Report
Default
Criteria and
Sorting
Uncheck this box to customize the criteria and sorting for this
report. When checked, the default settings for this report are
accepted.
Field
Click this combo box and select from the drop-down list the fields
you want to include in this report. You can only select one field at a
time.
The default for this box is checked.
The fields that appear in this pick list depend on the report you
have selected in the report tree pane. For example, fields included
in the Standard Time Zone report are different from those
displayed for the Network Layout report.
When you select a field, the Function combo boxes are activated.
Function
When you select a field in the Field combo box, the Function
combo box is activated. Depending on the field specified, this
section can display a number of different fields and combo boxes.
Several are listed below:
Click this combo box and select either is or is not from the
drop-down option box. These are the two allowed arguments for
the field to the right. The default argument is is.
Customizing an Existing Report
193
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this combo box to select one of the operators from the
drop-down option list to complete this argument. These operators
include:
• like – the value selected from the Variable window is similar to
the values for this parameter you wanted reported from the
Velocity database.
• equal to – the value selected from the Variable window is
identical to the values for this parameter you want reported
from the Velocity database. If this value is selected, the variable
window expands to include a pick list of all possible values.
• less than – the value selected from the Variable window is less
than the values for this parameter you wanted reported from
the Velocity database. If this option is selected, the additional 'or
equal to' field appears.
• greater than – the value selected from the Variable window is
greater than values for this parameter you wanted reported from
the Velocity database. If this value is specified then an additional
'or equal to' field appears.
• starting with – start with the value selected from the Variable
window and proceed forward using the Velocity database.
The default argument is like.
Variable
window
Once you have selected an option in the 'Field' combo box and
the required options in the 'Function' fields, one or more windows
or combo boxes appear below the argument combo box. This can
be a simple text box like this:
into which values are entered, or more extensive pick lists like this
example:
You are expected to either enter a value in this field or pick one or
more elements from the available pick list.
Once you have supplied this criteria, click Add to display the final
criterion in the Criteria List window.
For example, if you selected Server ID from the Field combo box
for Network Layout, all of the currently defined server IDs would
appear in this window.
Add
Click this button to add the full argument to the list of report items
needed for this customized report.
The new argument appears in the Selected Criteria List window.
194
Customizing an Existing Report
MAN007-0211
For example, say you only wanted to see a report on Server ID1. You would select
Network Layout from the Report Tree pane, then select 'Server ID' from the Field
combo box. All the currently-defined server IDs would appear. Select '1' from the
window and specify in the Function combo boxes 'is' and 'equal to.' Then click the Add
button and the criterion appears in the Selected Criteria List.
You can make a criterion that is still more complex using the arguments in the
‘Selected Criteria List’ window.
Sorting Page
When you click the Sorting tab on the Report Manager screen, the sorting page appears
like this example:
This page contains these fields:
Field
Click this combo box and select from the drop-down list one or more
of those fields you want to sort for in this report. You can only select
one field at a time. When you select a field, the possible values for
that field appear in the variable window.
Fields change according to which report is selected; for example,
fields included in the Standard Time Zone report are different from
those displayed for the Network Layout report.
If you select a criterion in this combo box, the Function combo boxes
are activated. When the All field is deselected, this field is activated.
Direction
Click this combo box and select either Ascending or Descending from
the drop-down option box. Ascending is the default.
If you select Ascending, all items detected in the Velocity database for
the selected field will appear in the report listed from
earliest/smallest/least significant to latest/largest/most significant.
If you select Descending, all items detected in the Velocity database
for the selected field will appear in the report listed from
latest/largest/most significant to earliest/smallest/least significant.
Add
Click this button to add the sort specification to the list of report items
needed for this customized report. The new sort specification
appears in the Selected Criteria List window.
For example, say you only wanted to sort all port type items in the Velocity database
from 1 through the end of its range for a Network Layout report. To do this:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Sorting tab to access the Sort page.
Click the 'Field' combo box and select Port Type.
Click the 'Direction' field and select Ascending.
Click the Add button.
The criterion appears in the Selected Criteria List as a Sort Field selection.
Customizing an Existing Report
195
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Selected Criteria List Pane
Use the Selected Criteria List window to customize a query still more using parentheses
to nest arguments and the AND/OR expression to include or exclude arguments
clauses.
The pane possesses these fields and buttons:
(
Select a specific line then click under the open parenthesis column.
A drop-down option list appears. Select the option you want to insert
one or more parentheses into the selected criteria. The parenthesis
function enables the building of nested arguments. The default is
blank.
Criteria
The entries built through the Criteria and Sorting pages.
To add parentheses or an AND/OR argument to the criterion, click
and highlight the entry.
)
Select a specific line then click under the closed parenthesis column.
A drop-down option list appears as shown below.
Select the option you want to insert one or more parentheses into
the selected criteria. The parenthesis function enables the building
of nested arguments. The default is blank.
AND/OR
Select a specific line then click under this column. A drop-down
option list appears as shown below.
If needed, select an AND or OR argument to the selected criterion;
otherwise, leave blank.
You can customize your query as you like using this pane. The software does not make
assumptions for the user anymore. Meaning they have to know what they are doing or
it won't fly. Primarily, they have to know where and when to add Open and Closed
Parenthesis, and know where and when to add the appropriate AND/OR modifier.
Read the expression in the window like a book: left to right, top to bottom. The criteria
arguments come first followed by the sorting arguments. In the example above, you
can see that the query only returns Inputs that are named 'Input 01' OR 'Input 02'. This
query will then sort the list by the Input Index in ascending order.
196
Customizing an Existing Report
MAN007-0211
The parenthesis are added to show you they can be there. But the reality is, for this
simple query, you don't need them. Report generation will run either way. The
parenthesis function is to allow the building of complicated queries.
Saving Custom Reports
To save a custom report for future use:
1.
2.
Customize the report as required.
Click
to preview the custom report.
The Preview screen appears.
3.
At the Preview screen, click the Export icon,
.
The Export dialog box appears.
For more on exporting reports, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
4.
5.
From the 'Format' combo box, select Crystal Reports (RPT).
From the 'Destination' combo box, select the destination for this file.
Normally this is Disk File.
6.
Click OK.
The Choose Export File dialog box appears.
7.
8.
9.
Navigate to the directory where you want this file to be stored. In most cases, you
will specify the Program Files\Hirsch Electronics\Velocity\Reports directory.
In the 'File name' field, enter a name for this file, such as New Report.rpt.
Click Save.
You are returned to the Preview screen.
Two files are created: the data file, RPT, and the report definition file, tmp. You can
use these two files to import the custom report into Crystal Report. If you need to
re-import this custom report back into Velocity, refer to the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide.
10. Do one of these:
• If you need to print this report, do so now using Step 20 in Customize an
Existing Report then exit the Preview screen. The main Report Manager screen
reappears.
• Exit the Preview screen. The main Report Manager screen reappears.
Customizing an Existing Report
197
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Previewing a Report
To preview a report:
1.
2.
From the Report Tree pane, click to select the report you want to preview.
Do one of these:
• From the icon bar, click the preview icon,
.
• From the menu bar, select File > Preview.
• From the Report Tree pane, double click the report you want to preview.
The Preview Screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Report Preview Screen” on
page 198.
3.
Review the report and, if required, print it directly from the preview screen or
export it.
Report Preview Screen
The Report Manager Preview screen looks like the following example:
The columns that appear on a preview screen depend on the type of report you
generate.
The previous example provides columns of data relevant to controller settings.
198
Previewing a Report
MAN007-0211
Another type of report, such as Active Alarms by Date present radically different
columns and data, as in the following example:
The Preview screen has these tool bar controls:
Click:
To:
Exit the current report preview and return to the Report Manager.
Print the displayed report.
Display the Export dialog box and save this screen to file. For more on
this, refer to “Saving Custom Reports” on page 197.
Refresh the current screen. This incorporates any new information
about the components that have been added to the database since
Report Manager generated the preview screen.
Specify the size of the page displayed on the screen. Select from the
available options.
The default is 100% but you can select another setting to increase or
decrease the size of the page you see.
Go to the first page of this report.
Go to the previous page of this report.
Go to the next page of this report.
Go to the last page of this report.
Halt report generation. This effectively stops the generating process.
Bring up the Search dialog box and search the currently displayed
report for the entered text string.
The report preview screen includes a footer that indicates the page number for this
page, if this is a multi-page report, as well as the total number of pages.
Additionally, you can view and manipulate information on the Report Screen through
various right click options. For more on these, refer to the “Preview Screen Features”
starting on page 200.
Previewing a Report
199
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Preview Screen Features
The preview screen provides several features that can help you in locating data. One
method for locating a specific piece of information in the Velocity SQL database, is to
mouse over the data in the Report Preview screen. The exact location of the
information appears in a yellow pop-up like the following example:
Another method for ascertain information as well as copying information to another
program, is right clicking on the data in the Report Preview screen.
A list of options like this example appears:
Depending on which data you select one of these options appears:
200
Field:
xxx
Indicates the field within the Velocity SQL database where this piece
of information resides.
Copy
Select this option to copy this information to the Windows buffer from
where you can paste it into any other program, such as Word.
Previewing a Report
MAN007-0211
Freeze
Pane
Select this option to create a page partition marker like this example:
You can scroll information that exists below this point but not above it.
This is useful as a way to page-mark information you think is
important for closer scrutiny.
Unfreeze
Pane
Previewing a Report
Select this option to remove an existing page markers.
201
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Printing Reports
To print a report:
1.
2.
From the Report Tree pane, click to select the report you want to print.
Do one of these:
• From the icon bar, click the print icon,
.
• From the menu bar, select File > Print.
• From the keyboard, press Ctrl + P.
The report is printed to the printer specified on the Velocity Preferences printers
page.
You can hide the Velocity logo and put the name of your company at the top of the
page through the Report Manager Preferences page.
202
Printing Reports
MAN007-0211
Access & Control
Functions
Operators normally have the authority to perform many functions affecting security
input and output devices. This chapter describes those functions and tells you how to
do them.
Functions are tasks Velocity can do to connected security devices. Velocity divides
functions into five main categories:
Access Functions




Momentarily Access
Relocking a Door
Unlocking a Door
Extended Unlock
Alarm Functions










Momentary Mask
Mask
Unmask
Cancel Entry Delay
Start Exit Timer
Mask/Cancel Entry Delay
Unmask/Start Exit Timer
Pre-arm Status
Conditional Unmask
Partial Unmask
Control Functions

















Masking Doors
Masking Inputs
Triggering Doors and Relays
Force On Doors
Force On Relays
Release a Door from a Force On State
Release a Relay from a Force On State
Force Off a Door
Force Off a Relay
Force Off Release for a Door
Force Off Release for a Relay
Lock Down a Door
Lock Down a Relay
Lock Down Release for a Door
Lock Down Release for a Relay
Lock Open for a Door
Lock Open for a Relay
203
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide


Lock Open Release for a Door
Lock Open Release for a Relay
Password Functions





System
Executive
Supervisor
Operators
Service
Special Functions






Alarm Cancel
Watch Log
Time Log
Deadman Timer
Indexed Commands
Set Threat Level
These functions are explained more thoroughly in the following sections.
204
Task
See:
Access Functions
page 206
Momentary Access to a Door (Grant Access)
page 206
Unlock a Door
page 207
Relock a Door
page 207
Extended Access
page 207
Alarm Functions
page 208
Trigger a Door or Relay
page 213
Momentarily Mask a Door
page 210
Momentarily Mask an Input
page 210
Mask a Door
page 210
Mask an Input
page 211
Unmask a Door
page 211
Unmask an Input
page 211
Control Functions
page 212
Lock Open a Door
page 214
Lock Open a Relay
page 214
Lock Open Release a Door
page 214
Lock Open Release a Relay
page 215
MAN007-0211
Task
See:
Lock Down a Relay
page 215
Lock Down a Door
page 216
Lock Down Release a Door
page 216
Lock Down Release a Relay
page 216
Force On a Door
page 217
Force On a Relay
page 217
Release a Door from a Force On State
page 217
Release a Relay from a Force On State
page 218
Force Off a Door
page 218
Force Off a Relay
page 218
Release a Door from a Force Off State
page 219
Release a Relay from a Force Off State
page 219
Password Functions
page 220
Special Functions
page 221
Indexed Commands
page 224
205
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Access Functions
Access functions (also called Door functions) apply to only one component: the door.
These functions include:
Function
Description
Comment
Momentary
Access
Actuates the door timer
for a period of time
specified by the door
timer.
Momentary and Trigger are the only two
functions that are timed: going on then
turning off according to a timer set to a
predefined interval. All other functions
are either On or Off. This is the lowest
priority level of relay actuation.
For more on this, go to page 206.
Extended
Access
Unlock the door for an
extended period of time.
The interval during which the door is
unlocked is designated by the Extended
Access Timers in Door Properties.
For more on this, go to page 207.
Unlock
Actuates the relay and
leaves it on until it is
relocked.
This affects only the door/relay at which
it is issued. This is the next lowest level
of relay actuation; only momentary is
lower.
For more on this, go to page 207.
Relock
Relock a relay that has
previously been
unlocked.
This is the necessary twin to unlock. It
must be used to negate the unlock
function and return the door to its
normal resting state. This affects only
the door/relay at which it is issued.
For more on this, go to page 207.
Access Functions: Momentary Access
Use this feature to mask an alarm and momentarily open (pop) the bundled door. The
door will only remain open for a specified number of seconds before it automatically
relocks. This feature is particularly useful when the operator needs to give a visitor or
employee access to a door even if they don’t have valid card or code access.
To momentarily access a door:
Graphics Map
1.
From the Graphics map window, right click the door icon representing the door you
want to momentarily open.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Functions > Access > Momentary Access from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
Right click the bundled door you want to open.
A pop-up option list appears.
2.
206
Select Functions > Access > Momentary Access from the option list.
Access Functions
MAN007-0211
Access Functions: Unlock a Door
Using this access function actuates the relay associated with this door and leaves it on
until it is relocked. This affects only the bundled door at which it is issued. This is the
next lowest level of relay actuation; only momentary is lower.
To unlock doors:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map. A pop-up
menu appears.
Select Function > Access > Unlock from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to unlock. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Function > Access > Unlock from the option list. The door is unlocked.
Access Functions: Relock a Door
Relocking reverses the effect of unlocking and returns the specified bundled door to its
normal (default) operation.
To relock doors:
Graphics Map
1.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Function > Access > Relock from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to relock. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Function > Access > Relock from the option list. The door is relocked.
Access Functions: Extended Access
Extended Access—also called the Special Needs Extended Unlock (SNUX) or Extended
Unlock—prolongs the interval when the door is unlocked. This is used for wheelchairs,
deliverymen, or other requesters who generally take more time to enter or exit a door
than an average individual.
Before you can use Extended Access, you must:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set the door in increments of minutes on the Door General Properties page.
Define a new credential.
From the Credential Properties Function tab, click Add to add a new function.
From the Define Function dialog box, specify Access at the Function Category field
then pick Extended from the Function field.
On the Options tab, check the Special Needs Access Time Extension box.
For instructions on using extended access, see “Examples: Extended Access” on page
944 in the Velocity Administrators Guide.
Access Functions
207
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Alarm Functions
Alarm functions describe a group of operations Velocity uses to control the behavior of
specified alarms and the line modules associated with them.
These functions include:
Momentary
Mask
Momentary Mask momentarily turns off the reporting of all
alarms from any of the line module inputs for the specified door
or input. The door will only remain masked for a specified
number of seconds before it is automatically unmasked.
The time allowed before alarms are unmasked is determined by
the door inputs' Door Mode timer setting.
Masking does not prevent the reporting of line trouble, such as
shorts or open line conditions.
For more on this, go to page 210.
Mask
Mask turns off the reporting of all alarms from any of the line
module inputs for the specified door or input.
Masking does not prevent the reporting of line trouble, such as
shorts or open line conditions.
For more on this, go to page 210.
Unmask
Unmask restores the alarm reporting from all inputs defined for
the specified door or input.
Assign Unmask to a door group with a time zone of 65 (Always)
to prevent time restrictions on the unmasking of masked line
module inputs.
For more on this, go to page 211.
Cancel Entry
Delay
Cancel Entry Timer is used to cancel the entry delay timer and
prevent the reporting of an alarm.
Use an entry delay timer to control access to secure areas where
the ScramblePad is located within the area. The setting for the
entry delay timer is defined at the Entry Delay Time field on the
Door Input Setup Property Sheet.
Start Exit
Timer
Start Exit Timer enables personnel within a secure area to exit
that area without tripping an alarm. However, it stipulates that
the unqualified exit from an area can only proceed for a limited
time. The amount of time allowed is set at the Exit Delay Time
field on the Door Input Setup Property Sheet.
Mask/Cancel
Entry Delay
This function cancels any entry delay value (as specified on the
Door Input Setup Property Sheet) and masks all interior line
modules for general building occupancy.
It can also mask inputs for occupancy of a specific area while
other areas remain unmasked.
208
Alarm Functions
MAN007-0211
Unmask/Start
Exit Timer
This function combines the start exit timer function with the
unmask function and is often used to re-secure either an entire
building or a specified area.
The start exit timer is set by the Exit Delay Time field on the Door
Input Setup Property Sheet
Pre-arm
Status
Pre-Arm Status, also known as ‘Test If Secure’ or ‘Check Secure,’
tests all available inputs within the specified door group and
reports whether they are inactive (secure) or active (unsecured).
If all inputs are secure, the ScramblePad where this inquiry is
made flashes its green LED once for an access grant and twice
for a control. If there are unsecured inputs detected, the
ScramblePad flashes its red LED and beeps—one flash for each
active input.
This function is associated with a credential normally assigned to
an operator or guard who enters the credential at a reader or
ScramblePad in order to enquire about the status of the area
controlled by the device.
Conditional
Unmask
Also known as ‘Unmask If Secure,’ this function unmasks/arms
all inputs in the specified door group, but only if all inputs have
been previously detected as secure.
Partial
Unmask
Also known as ‘Force Arm’ or ‘Arm Around,’ this function
unmasks all inputs in the specified door group that were
previously detected as secure. All unsecured inputs are left
unarmed.
Normally, of course, a system can only be unmasked if every
input within the prescribed area is currently secure. Otherwise,
any attempt to unmask the area would result in an alarm if one
or more of the inputs within the area is currently unsecured. The
Partial Unmask condition enables the Velocity to 'ignore' an
unsecured input and mask all the currently secured inputs it
detects within the area.
For example, if the boss leaves the safe in his office open, this
condition unmasks whatever inputs are already secure in the
vicinity of the safe, such as the door leading into the office and a
motion detector above the safe. In this way, even if the safe is
not closed, the office door can be unmasked and will notify the
system if anyone attempts to enter the office or approach the
safe without permission.
When this condition is used, the ScramblePad where this
credential is presented flashes:
• green LED if all inputs are detected secure
• red and green LEDs if some inputs are secure and others are
not
Alarm functions are configured using the function pages of either credential dialog box
or the credential template dialog box.
Alarm Functions
209
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Alarm Functions: Momentary Door Masking
This function masks a bundled door for a specified number of seconds before rearming
(unmasking) it.
To momentarily mask doors:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon. A pop-up menu
appears.
Select Function > Control > Momentary Mask from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled Door you want to mask momentarily. A pop-up option list
appears.
Select Function > Control > Momentary Mask from the option list.
Alarm Functions: Momentary Input Masking
This function masks a point for a specified number of seconds before rearming
(unmasking) it.
To momentarily mask an input point:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Input icon. A pop-up menu
appears.
Select Function > Momentary Mask from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the input file you want to mask momentarily. A pop-up option list
appears.
Select Function > Momentary Mask from the option list.
Alarm Functions: Masking Doors
Masking input points on a bundled door suppresses the reporting of any alarm points
associated with the door. This is useful when the operator needs to turn off or ignore
an alarm point, such as during building repair or for unalarmed entrance to an area that
is normally alarmed.
The opposite command is unmasking doors.
To mask a door:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map. A pop-up
menu appears.
Select Function > Control > Mask from the option list.
System Tree
1.
2.
210
Right click the bundled Door you want to mask. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Function > Control > Mask from the option list.
Alarm Functions
MAN007-0211
Alarm Functions: Masking Inputs
Masking a set of points suppresses the reporting of an alarm point. This is useful when
the operator needs to turn off or ignore an alarm point, such as during building repair
or for unalarmed entrance to an area that is normally alarmed.
The opposite command is unmasking inputs.
To mask an input:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Input icon on the map. A
pop-up menu appears.
Select Function > Mask from the option list.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the input you want to mask. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Function > Mask from the option list.
Alarm Functions: Unmasking Doors
Unmasking (arming) a bundled door enables Velocity to report conditions that may
occur at the door.
The opposite is masking a door.
To unmask doors:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the Door icon of the door you want to unmask.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Function > Control > Unmask from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to unmask. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Function > Access > Unmask from the option list.
The door remains unmasked until you mask it again.
Alarm Functions: Unmasking Inputs
Unmasking an input enables Velocity to report conditions that may occur at the alarm
point. If a point has corresponding output points then unmasking the alarm point will
automatically enable or disable the output points.
The opposite is Masking an input.
To unmask an input:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Input icon. A pop-up menu
appears.
Select Function > Unmask from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Alarm Functions
Right click the input file you want to unmask. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Function > Unmask from the option list. The input remains unmasked
until you mask it again.
211
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Control Functions
Control functions (also referred to as Output or Relay functions) affect the working of
devices such as doors and door locks not associated with doors, as well as elevator
relays and all other devices that can be turned on or off.
In Velocity there are a large number of control functions:
Function
Description
Comment
Trigger
Actuates the control timer for
every output specified by the
control zone. Once the timer
times out, the relays/outputs are
returned to their default resting
states.
Trigger is a timed control
function, like the Momentary
access function: going on then
turning off according to a control
timer set to a predefined interval.
All other functions are either On
or Off.
A trigger can also be used to
trigger multiple actions in a
Master Control Zone.
For more on this, go to page
213.
Force ON
Force ON
Release
Force OFF
Every relay/output in the control
zone is actuated. The relay
continues to be actuated until
released.
This function can affect both
onboard and expansion relays.
Returns all relays that were
actuated by the Force ON
condition to their default resting
state.
This function can affect both
onboard and expansion relays.
Disables all relays associated
with this control zone.
This control is particularly useful
for x-ray rooms or laboratories
where no access is granted
during an examination or
experiment.
For more on this, go to page
217.
For more on this, go to page
217.
For more on this, go to page
218.
Force OFF
Release
Returns all relays that were
forced off by the Force OFF
control to their default resting
state.
For more on this, go to page
219.
Lock
Down
Disables all relays/outputs
associated with this control zone.
This is particularly useful for
those facilities where absolutely
no one is allowed within an area
for a specified time.
For more on this, go to page
215.
212
Control Functions
MAN007-0211
Function
Description
Comment
Lock
Down
Release
This undoes the Lock Down
command and returns all
relay/outputs associated with
this control zone to the next
highest condition currently in
effect.
For more on this, go to page
216.
Lock
Open
Actuates all relays associated
with this control zone.
For more on this, go to page
214.
Lock
Open
Release
This undoes the Lock Open
condition and returns all
relays/outputs associated with
this control zone to the next
highest condition currently in
effect.
For more on this, go to page
214.
Control Functions: Triggering Doors and Relays
Use this function to actuate a door relay or general-purpose relay for a specified period
of time.
Triggering is a timed function: going on then turning off according to a timer set to a
pre-defined interval.


For door triggering, the timer is set using the 'Door Mode Timer' field on the Relay
Setup page of the Door Properties.
For relay triggering, the timer is set using the 'Control Mode Time' field on the
General page of the Relay Properties dialog box. This also applies to expansion
relays.
To trigger a relay or door momentarily:
Graphics Map
If this is a door:
1.
2.
From the Graphics map window, right click the door icon representing the door you
want to momentarily trigger. A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Trigger from the pop-up menu.
If this is a relay:
1.
2.
From the Graphics map window, right click the relay icon representing the relay
you want to trigger momentarily. A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Trigger from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
To trigger a door:
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to trigger. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Trigger from the option list.
To momentarily actuate a relay:
1.
2.
Control Functions
Right click the relay folder you want to trigger. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Trigger from the option list.
213
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Control Functions: Lock Open for a Door
Locking open a specified door actuates the selected relays/outputs associated with this
bundled door. This is particularly useful for facilities where everyone is allowed to enter
or exit an area for a specified time, such as during an emergency.
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
The door continues to be actuated until released by the Lock Open Release function.
To lock open a bundled door:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Open from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to lock open. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Open from the option list.
Control Functions: Lock Open for a Relay
Locking open a relay (output) actuates the selected relay/output. This is particularly
useful for facilities where everyone is allowed to enter or exit an area for a specified
time, such as during an emergency.
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
The relay continues to be actuated until released by the Lock Open Release function.
To lock open a relay:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the Relay icon on the graphics map you want to
lock open. A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Lock Open from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the relay you want to lock open. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Lock Open from the option list.
Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Door
Lock Open Release reverses the Lock Open command and returns the selected
relays/outputs associated with this bundled door to the next highest condition currently
in effect.
214
Control Functions
MAN007-0211
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
To release a bundled door from the lock open state:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Open Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to release from the lock open state. A
pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Open Release from the option list.
Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Relay
Lock Open Release reverses the Lock Open command and returns the selected
relay/output to the next highest condition currently in effect.
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
To release a relay from the lock open state:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Lock Open Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the relay you want to release from the lock open state. A pop-up option
list appears.
Select Functions > Lock Open Release from the option list.
Control Functions: Lock Down a Relay
Locking down a relay disables the selected relay/output. This is particularly useful for
those facilities where absolutely no one is allowed within an area for a specified time.
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
The relay continues to be disabled until released by the Lock Down Release function.
To lock down a relay:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
Control Functions
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Lock Down from the pop-up menu.
215
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the relay you want to lock down. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Lock Down from the option list.
Control Functions: Lock Down a Door
Locking down a bundled door disables the selected relays (outputs) associated with
that door. This is particularly useful for those facilities where absolutely no one is
allowed within an area for a specified time.
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
The door continues to be disabled until released by the Lock Down Release function.
To lock down a bundled door:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Down from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to lock down. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Down from the option list.
Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Door
Lock Down Release reverses the Lock Down command and returns the relays/outputs
associated with this bundled door to the next highest condition currently in effect.
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
To release a bundled door from the lock down state:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map. A pop-up
menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Down Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to release from the lock down state. A
pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Lock Down Release from the option list.
Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Relay
Lock Down Release reverses the Lock Down command and returns the selected
relay/output to the next highest condition currently in effect.
216
Control Functions
MAN007-0211
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open
Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force
control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access
codes.
To release a relay from the lock down state:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the map. A
pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Lock Down Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the relay you want to release from the lock down state. A pop-up option
list appears.
Select Functions > Lock Down Release from the option list.
Control Functions: Force On Doors
Forcing on a bundled door actuates the relays associated with that door. The relay(s)
continue to be actuated until released by the Force On Release function.
To force on a bundled door:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force On from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to force on. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force On from the option list.
Control Functions: Force On Relays
Forcing on an output actuates a specified relay. The relay continues to be actuated until
released by the Force On Release function.
To force on an output:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Force On from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the relay you want to force on. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Force On from the option list.
Control Functions: Force On Release for a Door
Force on release returns the bundled door that was actuated by the Force On condition
to its default resting state.
To release a force on condition for a bundled door:
Control Functions
217
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force On Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to release from the force on state. A pop-up
option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force On Release from the option list.
Control Functions: Force On Release for a Relay
Force on release returns all relays that were actuated by the Force On condition to their
default resting state.
To release a force on condition on an output:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Output icon on the graphics
map. A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Force On Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the relay you want to release from the force on state. A pop-up option
list appears.
Select Functions > Force On Release from the option list.
Control Functions: Force Off a Door
Forcing off a bundled door disables the relays associated with the door. This control is
particularly useful for x-ray rooms or laboratories where no access is granted during an
examination or experiment.
The door continues to be de-actuated until released by the Force Off Release function.
To force off a bundled door:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force Off from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to force off. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force Off from the option list.
Control Functions: Force Off a Relay
Forcing off an relay (output) disables the selected relay. This control is particularly
useful for x-ray rooms or laboratories where no access is granted during an examination
or experiment.
The relay continues to be de-actuated until released by the Force Off Release function.
To force off a relay:
218
Control Functions
MAN007-0211
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Force Off from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the relay you want to force off. A pop-up option list appears.
Select Functions > Force Off from the option list.
Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Door
Force off release returns all relays associated with a specific bundled door that was
forced off by the Force Off control to their default resting states.
To release a force off condition on a bundled door:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force Off Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Right click the bundled door you want to release from the force off state. A pop-up
option list appears.
Select Functions > Control > Force Off Release from the option list.
Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Relay
Force off release returns all relays that were forced off by the Force Off control to their
default resting state.
To release a force off condition on a relay:
Graphics Map
1.
2.
From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map.
A pop-up menu appears.
Select Functions > Force Off Release from the pop-up menu.
System Tree
1.
2.
Control Functions
Right click the output you want to release from the force off state. A pop-up option
list appears.
Select Functions > Force Off Release from the option list.
219
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Password Functions
Password functions control ScramblePad access to programming mode. Passwords
provide five levels of programming command restriction. Starting from Level 5 and
going down to Level 1, each password level provides increasing types of DIGI*TRAC
commands as specified by the person's credential. Since access to programming and
password manipulation is an operator activity, the credentials that control this function
are usually assigned only to operator's who must use specific DIGI*TRAC commands at
specific keypads.
Hint
Password Level functions are almost never used in Velocity since they involve
programming at the keypad, a procedure which Velocity is designed to circumvent.
For the most part, you can safely ignore these functions.
Any number of persons can be assigned to any password level. Each authorized person
is logged onto the system when programming mode is entered.

Only one operator can be logged on at a time.
The five password levels are:
Priority
Password Level
Restrictions
1
System Password
All Commands
2
Executive Password
All Commands Except Passwords
3
Supervisor Password
All Commands Except Setups
4
Operator Password
All Except Setups & Add or Print Users
With Codes
5
Service Password
All Setups & Print Status, No User
Commands
The Password function is selected through the 'Function Category' combo box on the
Credential Function page. The 'Function' combo box on the same page selects the
priority level this credential supports.
220
Password Functions
MAN007-0211
Special Functions
Special functions enable Velocity to provide sophisticated control of such features as
alarm cancel, the watch and time logs, the deadman timer, threat levels, and indexed
commands.
These include:
Special
Functions
Description
Comments
Alarm
Cancel
Cancel all alarms within the specified
zone. When you select this function,
the 'Door Group' combo box appears.
This function must be
selected in order to use
the DIGI*TRAC
Annunciator.
Select the door group to which this
function applies.
Watch Log
Logs code entry for tracking guards on
their appointed rounds. When you
select this function, the 'Door Group'
combo box appears.
This doesn’t grant access,
only records the guard’s
progress.
Select the door group to which this
function applies.
Time Log
Logs code entry for recording the
arrival and departure times of time log
code holders. When you select this
function, the 'Door Group' combo box
appears.
This doesn’t grant
access; it only records
arrival and departure for
time card purposes.
Select the door group to which this
function applies.
Special Functions
221
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Special
Functions
Description
Comments
Deadman
Timer
Starts a deadman timer at code/card
entry. If the timer expires before the
employee’s next code/card entry, an
alarm is recorded.
This condition allows the
system to track the safety
and security of a user
while a specific task is
being performed.
When you select this function, three
combo boxes appear: Controller,
Control Zone, and Time as shown
here:
1. In the 'Controller' combo box,
select the controller to which this
timer applies.
2. In the 'Control Zone' combo box,
either select an existing control
zone or create a new control zone
<New> during which this timer is
used.
3. In the 'Time' combo box, select the
time in seconds during which this
timer is active.
4. Click Add to display this set of
conditions in the lower window.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 to select
additional conditions if required.
222
Deadman timers are
common in many
industrial applications
such as railroads,
refineries, and other
dangerous or hazardous
locations.
In order to define the
timer, you must have two
user codes: one to start
the timer the other to
stop the timer.
Special Functions
MAN007-0211
Special
Functions
Description
Comments
Indexed
Command
Specifies several subfunctions. Combo
box fields and windows appear like
this example:
If you select one of the
Manual Holidays, this
forces the location where
this credential was used
to accept a holiday
immediately.
Select the subfunction you need.
These options include:
• Manual Holidays 1 - 4
• Unholidays 1 - 4
• Forgive All Users
• Clear Code Tamper
• Count Users This Side
• Count Users Other Side
For more on this, refer to the
subsections starting on page 224.
If you select one of the
Unholidays, this forces
a location where this
credential was used to
deselect a prevailing
holiday.
If you select Forgive All
Users, conditions for all
users within a specific
area (defined by the
location where this
credential was used) are
suspended, enabling
rapid entry or exit.
If you select Clear Code
Tamper, this cancels all
code tamper alarms
registered within an area
defined by the location
where this credential was
used.
If you select Count
Users This Side or
Count Users Other
Side, this causes Velocity
to count the number of
users currently
inside/outside the area
defined by the
reader/keypad where
this credential was used.
Special Functions
223
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Special
Functions
Description
Comments
Set Threat
Level
Sets a security (threat) level at the
reader/keypad where this credential
was used. Combo Box fields and
windows appear like this example:
The range of available
threat levels are 0 (no
threat/all threat alarms
cancelled) to 99
(greatest threat).
When you select this function, the 'Set
Threat Level' field appears. Choose
the threat level required.
Select the controllers where this threat
level applies. Use the << button to
move a highlighted controller from the
All Controllers window to the Selected
Controller window.
Indexed Command: Clear Code Tamper
Use this subcommand to clear all code tamper conditions at specific sites.
To invoke a clear code tamper:
1.
2.
3.
Create or choose a credential or credential template.
Click the Function tab.
Click the Add... button.
The Define Function screen appears.
4.
5.
At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special.
At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands.
The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected
Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows.
6.
7.
8.
9.
At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Clear Code Tamper.
From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose
readers/keypads can accept this command.
Click the
button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers'
window to the 'Selected Controller' window.
Click OK.
Indexed Command: Count Users Other Side
Use this subcommand to count all users currently outside a specific site as defined by
the reader/keypad where this credential is used.
224
Special Functions
MAN007-0211
This command enables a guard to use a special code or card to display on the
ScramblePad display the current count of users on the other side of the area defined
by the reader.
Before you can use this feature, you must first have had the Velocity administrator
configure the specific reader for both ‘Allow User count display’ and ‘Accept control
codes options’ under the ScramblePad Options tab as well as define the Passback
Zone this reader accesses under the Logic tab and enable passback on the Passback
tab for the controller connected to this reader.
To use this command:
1.
2.
3.
Create or choose a credential or credential template.
Click the Function tab.
Click the Add... button.
The Define Function screen appears.
4.
5.
At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special.
At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands.
The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected
Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows.
6.
7.
8.
9.
At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Count Users Other Side.
From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers where this feature
can apply.
Use the
button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers'
window to the 'Selected Controller' window.
Click OK.
Indexed Command: Count Users This Side
Use this subcommand to count and display on the ScramblePad reader display all
users currently inside a specific area as defined by the reader/keypad where this
credential is used.
This command enables a guard to use a special code or card to display on the
ScramblePad display the current count of users on this side of the area defined by the
reader.
Before you can use this feature, you must first have had the Velocity administrator
configure the specific reader for both ‘Allow User count display’ and ‘Accept control
codes options’ under the ScramblePad Options tab as well as define the Passback
Zone this reader accesses under the Logic tab and enable passback on the Passback
tab for the controller connected to this reader.
To use this command:
1.
2.
3.
Create or choose a credential or credential template.
Click the Function tab.
Click the Add... button.
4.
5.
At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special.
At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands.
The Define Function screen appears.
The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected
Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows.
6.
Special Functions
At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Count Users This Side.
225
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
7.
8.
9.
At the 'New Controllers' window, select one or more controllers where this feature
can apply.
Use the
button to move a highlighted controller from the All Controllers
window to the Selected Controller window.
Click OK.
Indexed Command: Forgive All Users
Use this subcommand to forgive all conditions for users at specific readers/keypads.
To invoke the Forgive All Users command:
1.
2.
3.
Create or choose a credential or credential template.
Click the Function tab.
Click the Add... button.
The Define Function screen appears.
4.
5.
At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special.
At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands.
The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected
Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows.
6.
7.
8.
9.
At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Forgive All Users.
From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose
readers/keypads can accept this command.
Click the
button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers'
window to the 'Selected Controller' window.
Click OK.
Indexed Command: Manual Holiday Tables
Use this subcommand to force a holiday schedule (table) at a specific site.
To use this command:
1.
2.
3.
Create or choose a credential or credential template.
Click the Function tab.
Click the Add... button.
The Define Function screen appears.
4.
5.
At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special.
At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands.
The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected
Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows.
6.
At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select the Manual Holiday Table being
forced.
There are four holidays available; however, a holiday is only relevant if it has
already been defined.
7.
8.
9.
226
From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose
readers/keypads can accept this command.
Use the
button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers'
window to the 'Selected Controller' window.
Click OK.
Special Functions
MAN007-0211
Indexed Command: Manual Unholiday Tables
Use this subcommand to deselect a prevailing holiday schedule (table) at a specific
site. There are four Manual Unholiday Tables to choose from.
To use this command:
1.
2.
3.
Create or choose a credential or credential template.
Click the Function tab.
Click the Add... button.
The Define Function screen appears.
4.
5.
At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special.
At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands.
The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected
Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows.
6.
At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select the holiday table you need to
deselect.
There are four holiday schedules available for deselection.
7.
8.
9.
From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose
readers/keypads can accept this command.
Use the
button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers'
window to the 'Selected Controller' window.
Click OK.
Function Priority Levels
Functions involve increasing levels of priority and are illustrated below:
Time Zone functions appear at this
priority level.
For more on this, refer to “Time
Zone Control of Relays” on page
Special Functions
227
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
As shown above, control functions always override Access functions, represented by
the Momentary Unlock, Unlock, Relock and Extended Lock functions. Since access
functions involve opening or closing a single door at the keypad/reader, this level of
function can be defined based on a single door or a door group.
Higher levels of control divide themselves into those control functions which are
considered mid-level and those that are considered high-level. Mid-level control
function—such as triggering or forcing relays—require you to define control zones since
they can involve more than a single relay at the current keypad/door. These
higher-level functions enable the user to control a large number of relays and other
outputs from a local keypad or card reader.
While Force and Lock functions are similar, Lock functions are placed at a higher priority
than Force functions and will override Force commands. This means that you can
construct sophisticated scenarios in which relays are locked open or down even while
they are currently forced on or off. In this way, layers of authority can control relays,
providing overrides and default conditions in the event of emergencies or failures. In
this control stack, each time a high-priority function is withdrawn it can expose an
underlying function still in effect.
For example, all relays in a control zone are forced on until the administrator enters a
Lock Down, which immediately disables all the relays; once the administrator has left
the area, the Lock Down is released and the relays are returned to a Force On
condition. The guard can then open and go through the door. Once the Force On
condition is released by a mid-level guard supervisor, a single door within the
controlled area can be entered by a qualified guard, who could not have opened the
door during the Lock Down.
Lock functions can also override time zones.
For example, all relays in a control zone are forced on until the administrator enters a
Lock Down, which immediately disables all the relays; once the administrator has left
the area, the Lock Down is released and the relays are returned to a Force On
condition. The guard can then open and go through the door. Once the Force On
condition is released by a mid-level guard supervisor, a single door within the
controlled area can be entered by a qualified guard, who could not have opened the
door during the Lock Down.
Lock functions can also override time zones.
Time Zone Control of Relays
People often think of time zone functions as control functions. In the preceding chart,
Time Zone functions would go above Force functions but below Lock functions.
When time zones control relays, they are generally defined as being in one of three
states:
228
Relay State
Description
Actuate
Relays are actuated during a time zone, going on at the start
time of the zone and off at the end time of the zone.
Disable
Relays are disabled during a time zone, becoming disabled at
the start of the zone and ending the disable condition at the end
of the time zone. During the time a relay is disabled, all access
and mid-level control functions, including RQE, are disabled.
Special Functions
MAN007-0211
Relay State
Description
Clear
Clears the current relay states for access and mid-level control
functions at the end of a given time zone. The clear relay state
does not affect relays controlled by a code of higher priority than
a time zone, such as Lock Down and Lock Open. This
automatically reverses a code- or card-activated relay from either
access and mid-level control without manually resetting the
relay.
This feature is most generally used in combination with a
manual Unlock by code or card to ensure an automatic Relock
by time zone.
Special Functions
229
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
230
Special Functions
MAN007-0211
CCTV Viewer
This chapter describes how to use Velocity 3.1 CCTV Viewer.
As an operator, you can use the built-in Velocity CCTV Viewer to perform any function
of which the camera is capable.
This can include:





Pan
Tilt
Zoom
Focus
Brighten/Darken
The CCTV feature is also capable of memorizing and using presets as well as switch
between cameras.

The CCTV Viewer is only available if this system possesses a CCTV
subsystem and an administrator has configured Velocity for CCTV.
231
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
CCTV Viewer
The CCTV Viewer is accessed through either of these procedures:


From a Graphics map, right click the appropriate camera icon and select View...
from the pop-up option list.
From System Tree window, right click on the appropriate camera icon and select
View... from the pop-up option list.
The CCTV Viewer like the following example appears:

The first image you view after bringing up Velocity may be slightly
distorted. Click to another image then click back and the problem is
resolved.
Use this screen to control the movement and actions of the camera. This viewer
contains the following controls:
From the Menu Bar:
File
Two choices are available:
Open Picture...—click this option and the Open dialog box
appears. Select from the available snapshots (captured using the
Grab option) to display in the screen. This is a good way to
review footage.
Close Picture—click this option to close the Viewer.
Command
Presets
Select from one of two options:
• Go to Preset...—The Go to Preset dialog box appears. Select
the preset number you need from the drop-down combo box
list or enter a new number in the text field and press OK. This
selects a pre-defined camera and position from the available
preset options. The preset is determined by the Preset
property sheet on the Camera Properties page. For more on
this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
• Set as Preset...—The Set as Preset dialog box appears. Select
a preset number from the drop-down combo box list or enter
a new number in the text field and press OK. This sets the
current camera and position based as a preset number. The
preset is determined by the Preset property sheet on the
Camera Properties page. For more on this, refer to the Velocity
3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
232
CCTV Viewer
MAN007-0211
Tour
Initiate a series of shots that take you to every camera in the
system. The shots are preset by the switcher. Select from one of
two options:
• Start Tour...—The Start Tour dialog box appears. Enter the tour
number in the text field and press Enter. The switcher begins
sending video based on the pre-defined tour. Only switchers
that support tours can be activated by this option.
• End Tour Mode—End the tour.
Call Camera
to Monitor...
Selecting this menu item displays the Call Camera to Monitor
dialog like this:
Enter the camera and monitor numbers in their respective fields,
then click OK. The specified camera output is displayed on the
selected monitor number.
If you map the monitor to the Viewer, is the same as if you
selected the 'Select Camera…' field. The Viewer displays the new
camera in the current monitor.
Grab
Select to take a snapshot of the currently displayed view. This
snapshot is stored as a JPG file in a designated specified file. The
default folder is \Photos.
You can then review the picture using File > Open Picture.
View
Select this option to change the size of the Viewer. There are
three options:
• Small—3" x 3.75" (the default size)
• Medium—4.25" x 5.5"
• Large—5.5" x 7.5"
This menu option also includes the toggle option Status. When
selected, the status bar appears at the bottom of the CCTV
Viewer. The default is selected.
CCTV Viewer
233
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
From the Tool Bar: (these functions are dependent on the capabilities of the
switcher)
Pan-Tilt: Click this button to pan or tilt.
Zoom: Click this button to zoom in or out.
Focus: Click this button to focus on the currently displayed image.
Iris: Click this button to iris the image.
Auto Pan: Click this button to initiate an automatic pan of the area
within the selected camera's view.
CCTV Camera Configuration: Click this button to display the CCTV
Camera Configuration dialog box.
Lock the Viewer so that no one can access another picture untell
the operator has unlocked it.
The default is unlocked. Click to toggle locked/unlocked.
This feature is only functional when enabled on the CCTV
Preferences page.
From the Keyboard:
234
Insert
Focus in.
Delete
Focus out.
Home
Zoom in.
End
Zoom out.
CCTV Viewer
MAN007-0211
CCTV Viewer Functions
Use the CCTV Viewer to perform the following functions.

Only one of the following functions can be active at a time. Also, these
functions only work if the camera and attached switcher support the
function. For example, if you are trying to pan/tilt a fixed camera, the
command is ignored and an error message appears.
The Zoom and Focus functions also support keyboard shortcuts, as noted.
Pan-Tilt
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Pan/Tilt icon on the Viewer tool bar,
.
Left click on the image in the CCTV Viewer.
Drag the mouse in any vertical, horizontal, or diagonal direction. The farther you
drag, the faster the Pan-Tilt happens.
Let go to stop. This works even if dragged outside the viewer.
Zoom Mode
1.
2.
Hint
Click the Zoom icon on the Viewer tool bar,
.
Perform one of the following:
• Left click and hold on the image in the Viewer to zoom in.
• Right click and hold on the image in the Viewer to zoom out.
Keyboard Shortcuts:
Press the Home key to Zoom In
Press the End key to Zoom Out.
Focus Mode
1.
2.
Hint
Click the Focus icon on the Viewer tool bar,
.
Perform one of the following:
• Left click and hold on the image in the Viewer to focus near.
• Right click and hold on the image in the Viewer to focus far.
Keyboard Shortcuts:
Press the Insert key to Focus In
Press the Delete key to Focus Out.
Iris Mode
1.
2.
Click the Iris icon on the Viewer tool bar,
.
Perform one of the following:
• Left click and hold on the image in the Viewer to open up the iris
• Right click and hold on the image in the Viewer to close down iris.
Auto Pan
Click the Toggle Auto Pan button,
CCTV Viewer Functions
, on the Viewer tool bar.
235
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide


Click this button once and the selected camera begins to pan automatically.
Click the button again and the camera stops panning.
The automatic pan characteristics for a specified camera are determined by the
switcher and the camera.
236
CCTV Viewer Functions
MAN007-0211
DVR/NVR Operation
As more companies migrate to digital video cameras for their surveillance, they are
replacing traditional forms of data capture, particularly VCRs using analog video tape,
with DVRs (digital video recorders) or NVRs (network video recorders) that store
images on hard disks.
For the security professional, DVRs/NVRs offer the advantages of:







Simultaneous video capture from one or more cameras at a central location
Video storage in a space-saving, easily transferable file formats
Longer storage life for videos
Instant review and indexing of captured video
Easier editing of captured video
Perfect duplication of video for distribution or legal presentation
Network accessibility
So, for example, a guard can review a suspicious incident by keying in the exact time
and date without having to review hours of tape. A felonious act caught on video can
then be sent instantaneously via internet to the proper authorities. Since the video is
digital, copying it does not degrade the image.
Because all DVRs/NVRs also incorporate Ethernet connections, video is easily
transferable across LANs or the internet. This means, for example, that an operator in
New York or Los Angeles can almost instantly access and review video from a
DVR/NVR located in Paris or Dhakar.
Velocity now incorporates several interfaces for using DVRs/NVRs including Live Video
and Video Explorer. These interfaces enable qualified operators to view, review, edit,
duplicate, and export video stored by one or more DVRs/NVRs.

DVRs currently supported are American Dynamics, Pelco, Bosch, and
Integral. NVR currently supported is American Dynamics VideoEdge. In
addition, Mate pattern recognition software, Behavior Watch, is
supported on American Dynamics DVRs.
Many other types of DVRs/NVRs (including the Axis DVR) can complement Velocity
surveillance, but they all use their own interfaces and programs.
The Velocity DVR/NVR suite also includes two management tools that help you search
out video events:


All Video Events (see page 265)
Event History Viewer (see page 268)
237
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Operating the DVR
Velocity operators can use a networked DVR/NVR to perform many tasks, either
through the DVR/NVR or through one of the cameras attached to the DVR. Both of
these approaches are discussed below.
Addressing the DVR/NVR and Attached Cameras
Using this technique, you can operate any of the cameras attached to the DVR.
To operate your DVR:
1.
2.
3.
From the System Tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the
DVR/NVR folder appears.
Expand the DVR/NVR folder to reveal all currently-configured DVRs/NVRs.
Right click on the DVR/NVR you want to operate.
Available functions appear in the pop-up list.
4.
Select from these available options:
View Cameras
Connect to the selected DVR/NVR and monitor a live
feed from all cameras presently connected to this DVR.
Generate/Stop
Host Alarm
Generate or stop an alarm from Velocity to DVR/NVR
unit.
Get Alarm List
From DVR
Get the recorded alarm list from the American Dynamics
DVR/NVR unit.
Note: This option only applies to American Dynamics
DVRs/NVRs. Integral DVRs do not store video on your
local hard drive. For a similar Integral feature, refer to the
Get Motion Events List.
Search &
Retrieve
Recorded Video
Search for and retrieve recorded video from the
designated DVR/NVR to your local hard drive for later
play, analysis, and formatting. Normally, you retrieve one
or more video segments from the DVR/NVR then play
the video (Play Local Video).
Note: This option only applies to American Dynamics
DVRs/NVRs. Integral DVRs do not store video on your
local hard drive.
For more on this, refer to “Search & Retrieve Recorded
Video” on page 245.
Play Local Video
Play back video recorded on this computer and export it,
if required, in a number of formats.
Note: This only applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs. For
a similar though not identical Integral feature, refer to
Get Motion Events List.
For more on this, refer to “Play & Export Local Video” on
page 246.
238
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
Get Motion
Events List
Get the recorded motion events list from the Integral
DVR/NVR unit.
Note: This option only applies to Integral DVRs.
For more on this, refer to “Get Motion Events List” on
page 256.
Time
Synchronization
Synchronize DVR/NVR unit time clock with Velocity. For
more on this, refer to “Time Synchronization” on page
258.
Diagnostics
These are programmer functions and should not be used
by operators.
Delete
Remove this DVR/NVR from the Velocity. Select this
option and a message appears. Click OK and the selected
DVR/NVR is deleted.
Rename
Rename this DVR. Select this option and the DVR/NVR
name is highlighted with a cursor at the first position.
Enter a new name.
Properties
Display and/or set up the properties of the
currently-selected DVR.
Addressing a DVR/NVR Camera Directly
You can address only one of the DVR-attached cameras and operate that specific
camera.
To operate a specific DVR-attached camera:
1.
2.
3.
From the System Tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the
DVR/NVR folder appears.
Expand the DVR/NVR folder to reveal all currently-configured DVRs/NVRs.
Click to highlight the DVR/NVR connected to the camera you want to operate.
All currently attached cameras appear in the Components pane.
4.
In the Components pane, right click on the camera you want to operate.
Available options appear in the pop-up list.
Select from these available options:
View Camera
Connect to the selected camera and monitor a live feed
from it.
Generate/Stop
Host Alarm
Generate or stop an alarm from Velocity host to this
camera. For more on this, refer to page 252.
Camera Control
Control the currently-selected camera. For more on this,
refer to “Camera Control” on page 260.
Note: This applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only.
Get Alarm List
From DVR
Operating the DVR
Get the recorded alarm list from the selected camera. For
more on this, refer to “Get Alarm List” on page 253.
239
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Properties
Display and/or set up the properties of the
currently-selected camera.
Viewing DVR/NVR Video From Attached Cameras
There are several different ways to view video from cameras connected to a DVR/NVR
through Velocity.
You can review live video feed using these techniques:



DVR/NVR cameras (American Dynamics only)
Live View (American Dynamics only)
Video Explorer (any supported DVR)
Recorded video can be reviewed by retrieving the video from the DVR/NVR and playing
it.
Viewing Camera Video
You can view live feeds from one of the cameras connected to an existing DVR/NVR
using the View Camera option.
To view video from a specified camera:
1.
2.
From the system tree pane, expand Interfaces Configuration until DVR/NVR folder
is expanded.
Click to highlight the DVR/NVR whose camera you want to view.
All the available cameras appear in the Components pane.
3.
In the Components pane, right click the camera you want to view.
A pop-up list appears.
4.
Select View Camera.
A Live Video screen appears displaying the live video feed from the specified
camera.
5.
6.
Use this screen as required.
When you're finished, click either
main Velocity menu.
or Velocity Administration to return to the
Live View
When you use Live View, it enables you to access and view all of the live feeds
currently coming to a specific DVR/NVR from its attached cameras.

In order to see camera video coming from multiple DVRs/NVRs, you
must use the Video Explorer.
To access Live View:
1.
2.
Expand the DVR/NVR folder in the System Tree to reveal the DVR/NVR you want to
view.
Right click the required DVR.
A pop-up list appears.
3.
Select View Cameras.
The Live Video window pops up.
240
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
4.
Click any pane on the screen to enlarge that video to full screen like this example:
You can also access this screen as a right click option from a specific camera. For
more on this, refer to “Viewing Camera Video” on page 240.
If you select a camera that has PTZ capabilities, the Dome icon,
Control console automatically appears.
5.
, or Camera
Manipulate this screen as described in Live View Screen.
If this camera has PTZ capabilities, use the Camera Control console to move the
camera as required.
6.
7.
To return to the Velocity Administration window, click the Velocity
Administration button.
When you're finished, click
to close the window. You are returned to the main
Administration screen.
You can also access Live View from an individual camera. For more on this, refer to
“Viewing Camera Video” on page 240.
Live Video Screen
The Live Video screen supports live video feed for a single camera or multiple cameras.
It looks like this American Dynamics Home example:
Operating the DVR
241
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
This screen includes these options:
Menu Tool Bar
This tool bar includes these options:
File — Close option.
Console — Includes these options:
• Administration - Return to the Velocity Administration
window. This can also be accomplished by clicking the
Velocity Administration button.
• Generate / Stop Host Alarm - This displays two
suboptions: Generate Host Alarm — generate a host
alarm at this camera. The Velocity host registers this alarm.
Override/Stop Host Alarm — stops a host alarm
generated by the specified camera.
• Get Alarm List from DVR/NVR - Generates a list of
alarms generated by the currently selected camera.
• Search & Retrieve Recorded Video - Enables a qualified
operator to find and retrieve video recorded by the
DVR/NVR for the selected camera.
• Play Local Video - Play video retrieved from the specified
camera.
• Camera Control - Display the camera PTZ camera control
console.
• Properties - Display the DVR/NVR properties sheet (see
the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide).
Settings — Includes the Display Size suboptions: small,
medium, large.
Help — Includes Help Topics and Version which provides
the DVR/NVR version number.
Magnifier/
Demagnifier
Click the minus button to decrease the size of the video
displayed in the currently selected frame.
Click the plus button to magnify the video displayed in the
currently selected frame.
Camera\View
Selector
If you selected View Cameras from the DVR, all currently
active cameras are represented by active buttons. Click an
active button to display an active view.
You can also drag a camera button from the button to the
screen.
Velocity
Administration
242
Click this button to return to the main Velocity Administration
module view.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
Select Pane
Selector
This area includes four options:
• One camera frame,
• Four camera frames,
• Nine camera frames,
• Sixteen camera frames,
Once the frames are available you can drag and drop camera
views into these frames as required.
Camera Sequence
Selector
Click the Sequence button to display each camera in turn on
the screen.
The 'Delay (Seconds)' text box designates the delay time
between camera switches.
Camera Name
fields
These overlays are determined by the DVR/NVR
programming and can be either hidden or displayed
according to the DVR/NVR administrator's preferences.
This icon appears only if the designated camera is equipped
for Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) use. Click this icon and the PTZ
controls appear.
For more on this, refer to PTZ Camera Controls.
Video Explorer
Video Explorer provides a quick view of up to sixteen preset cameras on one screen.
These cameras can be a mix of cameras from one or more DVR/NVR units.

The Video Explorer cannot display CCTV camera views. To display digital
CCTV camera views, use the camera frame placement in the Graphics.
To open and use Video Explorer:


From the icon tool bar, click the Video Explorer icon,
From the menu tool bar, select Console > Video Explorer.
.
The Video Explorer appears like the following example:
Icon Toolbar
Video Group Selector
Menu Toolbar
Camera View
Selector
System Tree
pane
Operating the DVR
243
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The sections of this screen are explained below:
Menu Tool Bar
This tool bar includes two options, File and Help. The
File option includes several suboptions:
New... — Select this option to create a new view group.
This can also be achieved by clicking the
icon in the
icon tool bar.
Save — Save the current view group configuration. This
can also be achieved by clicking the
icon in the icon
tool bar.
Save As — Save the current view group configuration as
another name.
Exit — Exit Video Explorer and return to the main Velocity
screen.
Camera Views
Selector
Specifies the number of frames displayed in the main
window.
This area includes four options:
Once the frames are available you can drag and drop
camera views as required.
Icon Tool Bar
Note: Provides four functions including:
— Create a new blank screen.
— Save the currently displayed screen.
— Delete the currently displayed view from the
screen.
— Bring up the Search Recorded Video screen for the
currently selected video frame.
View Groups
Selector
After a view group has been saved, select an existing
view group from the combo box.
For information on creating and modifying view groups,
refer to View Groups starting on page 259.
System Tree pane
This pane displays a system tree view of attached
DVRs/NVRs and cameras.
Drag camera objects from this pane into the view
window and drop them in the required frame.
244
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
Search & Retrieve Recorded Video
Before you can review video stored on the DVR, you should retrieve it and copy it to
your local hard disk. Because the DVR/NVR saves all video in a digital format,
duplication to your local hard drive does not affect the quality of the video.

These instructions apply to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only. Integral
DVRs do not store video on your local hard drive.
To retrieve recorded video:
1.
From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose video you
want to retrieve.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Search & Retrieve Recorded Video.
The Search Recorded Video screen appears like this example:
3.
Indicate the beginning and end time for your search in the 'Start Time:' and 'End
Time:' fields.
Click the
button to the right of the date field to display a calendar from which
you can select the starting and ending dates for this search. Click the spin buttons
to the right of the time fields to specify the exact starting and ending time. You can
also enter the dates and times with your keyboard, if you prefer.
4.
Check the camera(s) from which you want to retrieve video.
Click the All button to check all the camera boxes. Check the None button to
remove check marks from the boxes.
5.
Click the Get Video button.
The program removes the required video segments from the camera files stored
on the DVR. Those video segments are then copied to your local hard disk. A list of
all video segments copied to your hard disk appear in the lower left pane. As the
editing and duplication process continues, the status of it appears on the status
line at the bottom of the screen.
Operating the DVR
245
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Once all selected video is copied to your hard drive, the message 'All Video
Downloaded' appears on the screen. All segments transferred are displayed in the
lower left pane like this example:
6.
If needed, you can review a segment in this way:
a. From the lower left pane, click to highlight the segment you want to review.
The first frame of the segment appears in the lower right pane.
7.
b. Double click the segment you want to review in full and the Play Video screen
appears with the selected segment displayed.
c. Review the segment as required using the navigation tools on the screen.
d. When you're finished, close the screen. You are returned to the Search
Recorded Video screen.
Click Close to exit the Search Recorded Video screen.
To review and export retrieved video, refer to “Play & Export Local Video” on page 246.
Play & Export Local Video
Once you have retrieved the video you need from the designated DVR, use this feature
to play back the video now stored on this computer's hard disk. Using this option you
can also export the video you need to different formats.
To play local video:
1.
From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose recorded
video you want to play.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Play Local Video.
The Play Local Video screen appears.
The location of the current video path is displayed in the top field. You can change
this directory, if needed, using the
button to search for the correct directory.
3.
From the file list window, click to highlight any row in the list.
Each item in this list is a video segment stored by the DVR/NVR and indexed by
many attributes including start time, duration, camera, and file name.
246
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
The lower preview pane will show the first frame of that file like this example:
4.
Click the Play button to play the segment.
The Play Video window appears and plays the selected recorded video. This
window remains open during this process. For more on this window, refer to “Play
Video Window” on page 247.
5.
6.
7.
Use the video navigation tools at the bottom of this screen to move through the
video segment. You can also use the slide button to perform rough positioning.
If you need to review more than one segment, repeat steps 3 - 4.
When you're finished, click Close.
Play Video Window
For American Dynamics, the Play Video window looks like this example:
Operating the DVR
247
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
For Integral, the Play Video window looks like this example:
This window includes the following features.
Menu Tool Bar
File
Includes these options:
Play — includes two suboptions:
• From Date Time -- When you select this option, the Play from
Date and Time dialog box appears. Enter the date and time from
which you want the current video to start playing and click OK.
• From Image Number -- When you select this option, the Image
Number dialog box appears. Enter the image number you need
and click OK. The selected video plays from the specified image
number.
Open — Open another video file.
Exit — Exit this video file and return to the previous screen.
248
Console
Select another Velocity module from the available list. These are the
same Console selections available for the Live Video screen (page
241).
Settings
Player Size — Choose from three options that control the size of the
video frame appearing on your monitor: Small, Medium, and
Large.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
Export
Includes these options:
File — Select this option to export the entire video segment to AVI
format. The Export Video dialog box appears. For more on this, refer
to “Export DVR/NVR Video” on page 252.
Image Number — Select this option to export that portion of the
video specified by an image number range. For more on this, refer to
“Export DVR/NVR Video” on page 252.
Date Time — Select this option to export that portion of the video
specified by a date and time range. For more on this, refer to “Export
DVR/NVR Video” on page 252.
Location Indicators
For American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs, use the left slider to forward or rewind the video.
For either American Dynamics or Integral DVRs, the right slider only shows the progress
of the video as it plays. You cannot use the volume control slider on this screen;
volume is controlled by the PC.
Control Buttons & Speed Slider
This component only applies to the American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs.
Play the video.
Stop/Pause the video.
Increase or decrease the speed of play. Slide to the right to increase
the play speed. Slide to the left to slow the play speed.
Return to first frame of the video.
Go to last frame of the video.
Click to fill entire monitor screen. Press Esc to return to normal
mode.
Click to bring up the Image Tools screen. For more on this, refer to
“Image Tools” on page 250.
Start & End Time Fields
To crop the video file to a definite time range, enter the start and end dates and times.
When you click the Play button, only that time range is played.
Operating the DVR
249
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Navigation Buttons
Play
Play the video segment.
Stop
Stop playing the video segment.
Prev Frame
Show the previous frame of the video segment. The video must be
stopped before this function works.
Next Frame
Show the next frame of the video segment. The video must be
stopped before this function works.
First Frame
Show the first frame of the video segment. The video must be
stopped before this function works.
Last Frame
Show the last frame of the video segment. The video must be
stopped before this function works.
Clear
Display
Clear the currently displayed screen. The video must be stopped
before this function works.
Image
Tools
Print, save, zoom, color and perform other actions on the current
frame. This option also exports video frames as JPG files.
For more on this, refer to “Image Tools” on page 250.
This only applies to the American Dynamics DVR.
Image Tools
When you click the Image Tools button in the Play Video window, the Image Tools
window appears like the following example:
This screen enables a qualified operator or administrator to enhance an image
captured by a DVR/NVR camera. It does not allow the operator to edit the screen in any
way that would compromise the image.
250
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
This screen includes the following buttons and fields:
Zoom 1:1
Zoom In
Select this radio button then click in the frame. The mouse icon turns to
a magnifying glass. Click within the frame and the picture zooms in,
using the current mouse cursor as the zoom center.
Zoom Out
Select this radio button then click in the frame. The picture zooms out.
Move
Select this radio button then click and drag within the picture frame. The
picture center moves if you are currently zoomed in. This is the method
for moving a close-up from one area of interest to another.
Enhance/
Sharpen
Check one or both of these boxes to enhance and/or sharpen the
captured video frame.
Uncheck the box to return the picture to its original clarity.
1:1
Click this button and the picture returns to its original viewing size.
Tools
Bright/
Contrast
Click this button and a Brightness and Contrast slider appears at the
bottom of this screen. Use these sliders to increase or decrease the
brightness and/or contrast of the displayed image.
When you’re satisfied, click OK. The image is adjusted. Click Cancel to
ignore any changes and return to the unadjusted image.
Color/Light
Click this button and Hue/Saturation/Lightness sliders appear at the
bottom of the screen. Use these sliders to enhance the color or light of
the image.
When you’re satisfied, click OK. The image is adjusted. Click Cancel to
ignore any changes and return to the unadjusted image.
Apply
Click this button to apply the enhancements.
Undo
Click this button to remove the enhancements and return to the original
image.
Brightness
Chart
Check this box to display a brightness chart in the image frame. This can
aid in enhancing the brightness of the image.
Buttons
Full Screen
Click this button to increase the size of the image to full screen size.
Load
Click this button to open another image you have already saved.
Save
Click this button to display the Save dialog box. Name the image and
place it in the appropriate directory. It is saved as a JPG file.
Print
Click this button to print the image to the specified printer.
Restore
Click this button to restore the image to its original, unenhanced form.
Close
Close the Image Tools screen.
Operating the DVR
251
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Export DVR/NVR Video
One of the most important benefits of using a DVR/NVR to record your video output is
the ability to export the video to another source. This enables the qualified operator to
transfer video to:




Expert sites
Law Enforcement Agents
Lawyers
Company officials
In an increasingly litigious world, incontestable visual evidence is worth a great deal.
To export video:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Retrieve the video you need from the DVR.
Play the video locally until you have isolated the relevant video segment.
From the Play Video screen's menu tool bar, select Export.
Select the method by which you want to crop the video:
• Entire File
• Edit by Image Number
• Edit by Date and Time
5.
At the 'Export To:' text box, enter the path and file name you want for this exported
file.
The export dialog box appears.
If necessary, use the button to find the path and file name you want.
6.
7.
8.
At the Export File Format section, indicate the type of file format you require for this
export:
• AVI—Industry standard video format for audio visual files. This is the default
selection.
• IMG—Proprietary American Dynamics video format.
At the Text Overlay section, indicate whether you need to show text in one of the
screen's four corners. The default is None.
If you selected either Image Number or Date Time, indicate the section of the
currently-displayed video file you want to be exported.
• If you specified Image Number, indicate the beginning and ending image
number of the required segment.
• If you specified Date Time, indicate the starting and ending dates and times
of the required segment.
If you selected File, ignore this step. Go to Step 9.
9.
Click Export.
The status indicator above the button shows the progress of the export.
10. When the export is completed, click Done to return to the previous screen.
Generate and Stop Host Alarm
Qualified operators may need to generate an alarm if they view an infraction on their
video. This 'bookmarks' the video event and enables the operator or another authority
to return later to that exact spot and retrieve the video.

252
This procedure applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
To generate a host alarm:
1.
From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR where you want
to generate a host alarm.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Generate/Stop Host Alarm > Generate Host Alarm.
The Generate Alarm dialog box appears.
3.
Select the camera where you want to generate the host alarm, the alarm rate, and
the alarm duration. Click OK.
The Generate Alarm Configuration message appears.
4.
Click OK.
Once an alarm is issued at the camera, it continues for the duration indicated in the
'Alarm Duration' text box.
To stop an alarm at the designated camera before it is set to expire:
1.
From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR where you want
to stop the alarm.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Generate/Stop Host Alarm > Override/Stop Host Alarm.
The Override or Stop Host Alarm dialog box appears.
3.
4.
Select the camera whose alarm you need to override.
Do one of these:
• Click Override Alarm to override the present alarm. This enables the
operator to continue the current alarm process until the Stop button is
clicked.
• Click Stop to stop the alarm. This stops the current alarm in process.
You are returned to the Velocity main menu.
Get Alarm List
Use this feature to display and review a list of all video stored by the DVR/NVR that is
associated with alarmed states detected at their attached cameras.

This procedure applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only.
To get an alarm list:
1.
From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose alarm list
you want to get.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Operating the DVR
Select Get Alarm List from DVR.
253
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Get Alarm List window appears like the following example:
This screen includes these features:
Start Time:
Enter a date and time representing the beginning of the period
for which you want to display alarms.
End Time:
Enter a date and time representing the end of the period for
which you want to display alarms.
Get Alarms
Click to execute the command.
Close
Click to close this window.
Cameras
Check up to 16 check boxes indicating the cameras from
which you want alarm lists retrieved.
None
Click this button to uncheck all camera boxes.
All
Click this button to check all camera boxes.
Pre-Alarm
Length
A text box that shows the pre-alarm duration in seconds
required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Total Alarms
A text box showing the total number of alarms in the list below.
Post-Alarm
Length
A text box that shows the post-alarm duration in seconds
required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Maximum
Length
A text box that shows the total number of seconds required to
retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Alarm List
window
Once you click the Get Alarms button, this window lists all
alarms for the time duration and cameras specified.
Each alarm is listed by index, camera, duration, start time,
frame, and alarm type. To review video from one of these
alarms, double click the alarm.
Status Line
254
Indicates the current status of the Alarm List search including
result data.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
3.
4.
5.
6.
At the 'Start Time' fields, indicate the start date and time.
At the 'End Time' fields, indicate the end date and time.
In the 'Cameras' section, check the cameras for which you want to retrieve alarm
information.
Click the Get Alarms button.
7.
In the Alarm List window, double click the alarm you want to review.
The Alarm List window displays a list of all appropriate alarms.
The Play Video window appears and plays that particular alarm video after it
downloads the data from the DVR/NVR unit.
8.
Play and review the local video as required.
While you are in this window, you can right click the window’s frame to display a
pop-up option list like this example:
Right Click
options
The options included in this list enable the qualified operator to:
• Access properties for the currently selected DVR/NVR (the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide)
• Return to the Velocity Administration screen
• Generate/Stop a Host Alarm (page 252)
• Get an Alarm List from the DVR/NVR (page 253)
• Search & Retrieve Recorded Video (page 245)
• Play Local Video (page 246)
• Camera Control (page 260)
These are many of the same options displayed in the Console option list for the
Live Video screen (page 241).
These tasks can be run concurrently: the present video continues to play while you
perform another task. In this way, you can search, retrieve, and play several videos
at the same time.
When you're finished, select either File > Exit from the Play Video menu tool bar
or click
in the upper right corner to close the Play Video window.
10. Either select another alarm video to play or close the Alarm List window by clicking
the Close button.
9.
Operating the DVR
255
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Get Motion Events List
Use this feature to display and review a list of all motion events stored by the DVR/NVR
that is associated with alarmed states detected at their attached cameras.

This procedure applies to Integral DVRs only.
To get an alarm list:
1.
From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose motion
event list you want to get.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Get Motion Events List.
The Get Motion Events List window appears like this example:
Hint
Unlike the American Dynamics DVR, the Integral DVR cannot retrieve manually
generated alarms and auto-detected motion events at the same time. Get Motion
Event List only retrieves auto-detected motion events.
This window includes these features:
256
Start Time:
Enter a date and time representing the beginning of the period
for which you want to display alarms.
End Time:
Enter a date and time representing the end of the period for
which you want to display alarms.
Get Alarms
Click to execute the command.
Close
Click to close this screen.
Cameras
Check up to 16 check boxes indicating the cameras from
which you want alarm lists retrieved.
None
Click this button to uncheck all camera boxes.
All
Click this button to check all camera boxes.
Pre-Alarm
Length
A text box that shows the pre-alarm duration in seconds
required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
Total Alarms
A text box showing the total number of alarms in the list below.
Post-Alarm
Length
A text box that shows the post-alarm duration in seconds
required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Maximum
Length
A text box that shows the total number of seconds required to
retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Alarm List
window
Once you click the Get Alarms button, this window lists all
alarms for the time duration and cameras specified.
Each alarm is listed by index, camera, duration, start time,
frame, and alarm type. To review video from one of these
alarms, double click the alarm.
Status Line
3.
4.
5.
6.
Indicates the current status of the Alarm List search including
result data.
At the 'Start Time' fields, indicate the start date and time.
At the 'End Time' fields, indicate the end date and time.
In the 'Cameras' section, check the cameras for which you want to retrieve alarm
information.
Click the Get Alarms button.
The Motion Event List window displays a list of all appropriate alarms.
7.
In the Motion Event List window, double click the alarm you want to review.
The Play Video window appears and plays that particular alarm video after it
downloads the data from the DVR/NVR unit.
8.
Play and review the local video as required.
While you are in this window, you can right click the window’s frame to display a
pop-up option list like this example:
Right Click
options
The options included in this list enable the qualified operator to:
•
•
•
•
Operating the DVR
Return to the Velocity Administration screen
Generate/Stop a Host Alarm (page 252)
Get an Alarm List from the DVR/NVR (page 253)
Search & Retrieve Recorded Video (page 245)
257
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• Play Local Video (page 246)
• Camera Control (page 260)
• Access properties for the currently selected DVR/NVR (the Velocity 3.1
Administrator’s Guide)
These tasks can be run concurrently: the present video continues to play while you
perform another task. In this way, you can search, retrieve, and play several videos
at the same time.
When you're finished, select either File > Exit from the Play Video menu tool bar
or click
in the upper right corner to close the Play Video window.
10. Either select another alarm video to play or close the Alarm List window by clicking
the Close button.
9.
Time Synchronization
Use this feature to manually synchronize the Velocity host system clock with the
DVR/NVR unit. The default, as specified by the DVR/NVR Properties sheet, requires
synchronizing every 24 hours.
To manually synchronize a DVR/NVR with this host system clock:
1.
From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR you want to
synchronize.
A pop-up menu appears.
2.
Select Time Synchronization.
The Time Synchronization dialog box appears.
3.
Click Yes.
Drag & Drop Camera Views
The Velocity DVR/NVR module enables a qualified operator to drag and drop camera
views in one of two ways:


From a Live View screen (page 258)
From a Video Explorer screen (page 259)
Each is explained below.
Drag & Drop with Live View
To drag and drop video in Live View:
1.
2.
Expand the Interfaces Configuration folder in the System Tree pane until the
individual DVRs/NVRs appear.
Click to select the DVR/NVR you want.
All available cameras appear in the Components pane.
3.
Access the Live Video screen in one of two ways:
• From the System Tree pane, right click the DVR/NVR and select View
Camera.
• From the Components pane, right click on the designated camera and select
View Camera.
The Live Video screen appears.
4.
258
From the Camera\View Selector, select a camera view button.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
Initially, the default camera view for this button appears on the screen. For
example, if you selected button 4, camera 4 for the specified DVR/NVR appears. If
you selected an individual camera in Step 3, then this camera's video automatically
appears.
5.
6.
From the Select Pane selector, select the number of frames you want displayed.
Click the Velocity Administration button to bring the Administration module into
view.
Arrange the two windows on the screen so that both the Live Video screen and the
Administration window are showing.
7.
Drag one or more cameras from the Administration module to an available frame
on the Live Video screen.
The video feed represented by this camera now appears in the frame.
Using this approach, you can drag camera views from different DVRs/NVRs, if
needed.
You can also drag a camera button to an available camera view to populate the screen
with views from the same DVR.
When this is done, clicking the selected camera view number now displays all the
selected cameras in the designated frames as in this example:
Button 2 is
selected
Notice that in this example selecting button 2 displays four specified views.
Drag & Drop with Video Explorer
To drag and drop video in Video Explorer:
1.
2.
3.
Open Video Explorer.
Select an existing view group or create a new view group.
From the Video Explorer's system tree pane, drag a camera object to an available
frame.
The video generated by this camera appears in this frame. If a different camera view
already exists in this frame, the new video takes its place.
DVR/NVR View Groups
A View Group is a programmed arrangement of frames in Video Explorer presenting up
to sixteen different camera views.
Operating the DVR
259
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To create a view group:
1.
2.
Open the Video Explorer.
At the menu tool bar, select File > New... or press Ctrl + N.
You are prompted to confirm the creation of a new view group.
3.
Click OK.
The Enter new view group name dialog box appears.
4.
Enter the name of the new view group then click OK.
The new view group name appears in the View Group combo box at the top of the
screen.
5.
From the Camera Views Selector, specify the number of frames you want to
include in this view group.
Select one, four, nine, or sixteen frames.
6.
7.
From the System Tree pane on the left, expand the tree to display all of the
cameras associated with DVRs/NVRs you have defined for this system.
Drag a camera from the System Tree pane to an available frame in the view
window.
The video output associated with the camera is displayed in the frame.
8.
9.
Repeat Steps 4-7 for each camera you want placed in an available frame.
Press Ctrl + S or from the menu tool bar, select File > Save to save the current
view group settings.
The new view group appears in the View Group combo box.
To edit an existing view group to create a new view group:
1.
From the View Groups combo box, select an existing view group.
Video Explorer populates the view window with those frames and camera views
previously defined.
2.
3.
Modify this existing group as required by:
• substituting existing video for other views
• increasing / decreasing the number of frames and populating them as
required
Once you have modified this view group as you require, from the menu tool bar,
select File > Save As.
The Enter new view group menu dialog box appears.
4.
Enter the name of this new view group and click OK.
A new view group appears in the View Group combo box.
Camera Control
If this Velocity system is configured for use with a American Dynamics DVR, you can
control the movement of the cameras attached to the DVR/NVR through Velocity.

Only those cameras that support movement, such as pan, tilt, zoom, and
focus, are affected by this feature.
To control DVR- or NVR-attached cameras:
1.
2.
260
From the System Tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the
DVR/NVR folder appears.
Expand the DVR/NVR folder to reveal all currently-configured DVRs/NVRs.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
3.
Click to highlight the DVR/NVR connected to the camera you want to operate.
All currently attached cameras appear in the Components pane.
4.
In the Components pane, right click on the camera you want to operate.
Available options appear in the pop-up list.
5.
Select Camera Control.
The Camera Control console appears. The American Dynamics Camera Control
console looks like this example:
The fields and buttons on this console are:
Camera Control Selection
Radio
buttons
Select the camera control protocol you want enabled for this
camera. Select one of these radio buttons:
• Intellex
• Local Control (default)
Begin
Session
Click this button to start the session. By default, this button is
already selected.
End Session
Click this button to end a protocol and go to another option.
Camera Controls
Operating the DVR
261
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click the appropriate buttons to move the designated camera
in the manner you require. Possible controls include:
—Pan to upper left limit
—Pan up
—Pan to upper right limit
—Pan left
—Focus in or out
—Pan right
—Pan to lower left limit
—Pan down
—Pan to lower right limit
Focus
– focus on the nearest object in the view.
– focus on the farthest object in the view.
Track
— track to the left from the current location
— track to the right from the current location
Zoom
— zoom out to widest angle
— zoom in on the tightest angle
Iris
— open camera iris to largest radius
— close camera iris to smallest allowed radius
— set camera iris to adapt automatically
Speed
Adjust the speed dial to increase or decrease the speed with
which the camera performs its PTZ operations (page 263).
Show
Camera
Control
Check this box to show the camera control PTZ readout (page
263) on the screen. Uncheck this box to hide the readout from
the live view screen.
Camera
Use this pick list window to select another camera for control.
Only those cameras that allow camera control appear in this
list.
Patterns (This section is only active for American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs)
262
Pattern pick
list
Select one of the patterns options from the drop-down list.
There are three patterns available.
Run
Click this button to perform the pattern specified in the ‘Pattern’
pick list.
Repeat
Pattern
Click this button to repeat the run the number of times
specified in the text box to the right.
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
Quick Views (This section is only active for American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs)

Quick View
pick list
Select one of the available options from the drop-down list.
There are 99 views available. For creating quick views, refer to
Camera Quick Views.
Go To
Click this button to show the view specified in the ‘Quick View’
pick list.
The Set and End buttons are administrative functions. For information on
these, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
6.
Control the camera using the buttons and fields on this console.
The selected camera can only respond to those controls that it supports. All other
commands are ignored.
7.
When you're finished, click the
button in the upper right corner to exit this
screen and return to the main Velocity screen.
Cameras can also be controlled using the PTZ camera control icon as described in
DVR/NVR - PTZ Camera Controls. This icon can be shown/hidden through the console.
If you view a camera that is configured for PTZ effects, the camera control console
appears automatically.
PTZ Camera Controls
If a camera attached to a DVR/NVR is configured for Pan-Tilt-Zoom control, an icon like
this
appears in the lower right corner of the screen.
Click this icon and an bank of controls like this example appears:
The controls shown here are:
+ = Focus In
– = Focus Out
+ = Zoom In
– = Zoom Out
Click on a specific position and the camera pans to that location.
There are eight pan locations available.
+ = Tilt Up
– = Tilt Down
Rotate a full circle.
Click this icon and a pick list appears. Select one of the presets
already programmed into this camera from the DVR/NVR and
the camera executes the motion.
Select another preset from the pick list or click
the camera controls.
Operating the DVR
to return to
263
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this icon and the camera controls disappear. The initial PTZ
icon appears.
Click this icon and a pick list appears. Select one of the existing
tours already programmed into this camera from the DVR/NVR
and the camera performs the tour.
Select another tour from the pick list or click
camera controls.
264
to return to the
Operating the DVR
MAN007-0211
All Video Events
This feature displays all specified video events recorded by Velocity-connected
DVRs/NVRs. This is a list of all video captured by the DVR/NVR during a specified time
period.
To open and use the All Video Events screen:
1.
2.
From the system tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the
DVR/NVR folder appears.
Click to highlight the DVR/NVR folder.
The All Video Events option appears in the components pane.
3.
In the components pane, double click the All Video Events option,
.
The All Video Events screen appears like this example:
This screen includes these options, fields, and windows:
Menu Bar
This bar includes two options:
• File – This has one option, Close.
• Help – This enables you to view Velocity help.
Start Time
Designates the beginning of the interval after which you
want recorded video displayed in the Recorded Video
window.
Click the
button to display a calendar. Locate the start
date. You can also enter the date directly.
Use the
spin control buttons to increment or
decrement the start time. You can also enter the time
directly.
All Video Events
265
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
End Time
Designates the end of the interval before which you want
recorded video displayed in the Recorded Video window.
Click the
button to display a calendar. Locate the end
date. You can also enter the date directly.
Use the
spin control buttons to increment or
decrement the end time. You can also enter the time
directly.
History
Check this box to display the entire list of all video currently
stored in all cameras of all DVRs/NVRs.
The number of video events recorded by the DVR/NVR for
the specified period are displayed in parenthesis.
Search
Click this button to search for all video meeting the criteria
you have specified.
The results of the search are displayed in the Recorded
Video window.
DVR/NVR Unit
Select the DVR/NVR unit whose video events you want to
search. All DVR/NVR units currently defined for this system
appear in this list. The default is All.
Camera
Select the DVR/NVR camera from the specified DVR/NVR
unit whose video events you want to search. All DVR/NVR
cameras currently defined for this DVR/NVR appear in this
list. The default is All.
Events From...
To
If events appear in the Recorded Video window, you can
enter a starting and ending index number (shown in the
Index column) to filter the video you see.
Recorded Video
window
All events meeting the search criteria specified above
appear in this window.
To select an item to play, double click it.
4.
5.
6.
Do one of these:
• Check the History box on the right to display the entire list of all video
currently stored in all cameras of all DVRs/NVRs. This can result in a very long
(and unhelpful) list. Skip to Step 8.
• Use the fields on the left to narrow your search as described in Steps 5 - 7.
Using the 'Start Time:' and 'End Time:' fields, specify the date and time range
during which you want the program to search.
• Click the
button to display a calendar. Locate the start and end dates. You
can also enter the date directly.
• Use the
spin control buttons to increment or decrement the start and end
times. You can also enter the time directly.
At the 'DVR/NVR Unit' pick list, select the DVR/NVR unit whose video events you
want to search.
The default is All.
7.
8.
266
At the 'Camera' pick list, select the camera from the specified DVR/NVR unit whose
video events you want to search.
Click Search.
All Video Events
MAN007-0211
The video events for the specified range appear in the bottom window.
9.
To retrieve a recorded video, double click one of the video event selections in the
window.
The Search & Retrieve Recorded Video screen appears.
10. Retrieve the video then play it on the Play Local Video screen.
For more on this, refer to “Search & Retrieve Recorded Video” on page 245 and
“Play & Export Local Video” on page 246.
All Video Events
267
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Event History Viewer
The Event History Viewer enables a qualified Velocity operator to track and report
events that are specific to the DVR/NVR subsystem.
To open the Event History Viewer:
1.
2.
From the system tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the
DVR/NVR folder appears.
Click to highlight the DVR/NVR folder.
3.
In the components pane, double click the Event Viewer option,
The Event Viewer option appears in the components pane.
.
The Event History Viewer appears like this example:
The Event History Viewer looks and feels like the Velocity Report Manager. In fact, it
shares many features with the Report Manager except that it is dedicated to history
logs.
These logs include:






Active Alarms by Date
Active Alarms by Date with Comments
Alarm Log by Date
Alarm Log by Date with Comments
All Events Log by Category
All Events Log by Date
For more on how to generate a DVR/NVR report, refer to “Generating History Logs” on
page 268.
Generating History Logs
To generate a history log:
1.
2.
3.
268
In the Event Viewer history log tree pane, expand the History Logs folder to reveal
one of the available logs.
Click to highlight the log you want to generate.
Select one of these options:
• To generate a log with the default criteria as defined by the default report,
leave the 'Use Event Viewer Default Criteria and Sorting' box checked.
Event History Viewer
MAN007-0211
• To customize your log—including or excluding components and fields as well
as defining precise criteria for this report—uncheck 'Use Report Default Criteria
and Sorting' then customize the report.
For more on this, refer to “Customizing DVR/NVR Logs” on page 269.
4.
When you're finished, click the Search Events button.
The events corresponding to the criteria specified appear in the lower window.
Once you have generated the event list you need, you can use this list to:




Play video
Copy video to the clipboard
Send results to the printer
Procure properties
For more on this, refer to “Event List Functions” on page 271.
Customizing DVR/NVR Logs
If you uncheck the 'Use Event Viewer Default Criteria and Sorting' box, use the steps
below to customize the list of events that eventually appear in the lower pane:
1.
From the 'Field' combo box, select the field you want to serve as a filter.
The available data fields correspond to the history log you selected.
2.
In the 'Function' combo boxes, click and select appropriate values in the one or
more fields that now appear.
Additional fields and boxes appear depending on the field and arguments
specified:
• In the first pick list, select either is or is not.
• In the second pick list, select one of the available arguments: equal to, less
than, greater than, between, starting with, or like. Only some of these
options apply to a specific field value.
Event History Viewer
269
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• An additional checkbox, or equal to, appears on the same line if you select
either less than or greater than. Check this box to indicate that the
argument includes an equal to clause, such as 'greater than or equal to'.
• A text box appears if you select like, starting with, less than or greater
than. Enter a value that places your qualifiers in the correct context.
• If you specify the starting with or like argument, enter the value you
want the report to start with or be like.
• If you specify greater than or less than, enter the value this criterion will
be greater than or less than. If it is also equal to, check the previous box.
• If you specify the equal to argument, the variable window expands to
become a pick list from which you select one or more values. Select one or
more options from this list. If this report supports a range of values, you can
click the beginning value then hold down the Shift key and click the last value
in the range. To select non-contiguous values, hold down the Ctrl key while
clicking.
For more on the criteria page, refer to the Report Manager “Criteria Page” on page
1015.
3.
When you're finished with this specific criterion, click the Add button.
The criterion is displayed in the middle pane.
4.
5.
Repeat Steps 1 - 3 to add more criteria to this report.
If you need to add sorting elements to your report specifications, click the Sorting
tab.
The Sorting page appears.
6.
From the 'Field' combo box, select the item (field) by which you want to sort.
The values appearing on the combo box list depend on the type of report you
have selected.
7.
From the 'Direction' combo box, select either Ascending or Descending.
This indicates in which direction the selected field is used to sort: from least to
greatest value or vice versa.
For example, if you select 'Input Index' as the sorting point and indicate it should
be used as an Ascending sorting feature, then the Report Manager sorts the report
according to the Input Index, starting from the smallest value and proceeding down
the list to the highest value.
8. Click Add and the Sort Field function is added to the middle pane.
9. If there are any other sorting criteria you need to add, repeat steps 6 - 8.
10. Go to the lower pane and click any line (criterion) you need to edit. Do this:
• To nest the line as an expression, click in the specific line's open parenthesis
column. A combo box appears. Select the number of parentheses you need
for this expression. To close the nested expression, click in the closed
parenthesis column of the specific line and another combo box appears.
Select the number of closed parentheses you need to satisfy this expression.
• To add an AND argument to include or an OR argument to exclude this part of
the expression, click in the AND/OR column of this line and a combo box
appears. Select either AND or OR.
• To remove a line, select it and press Delete.
11. Continue to edit lines to create boolean expressions as required.
12. When you're finished, click the Criteria tab and then click the Search Events
button. The required events appear in the lower pane.
270
Event History Viewer
MAN007-0211
Event List Functions
Once you have generated a DVR/NVR history event list, you manipulate that list in a
number of ways.
1.
Generate an event list as detailed in “Generating History Logs” on page 268.
A list of events appears in the lower pane. This list is determined by the criteria you
selected in the Event History Viewer.
2.
From the lower pane of the Event History Viewer, right click on an event.
A pop-up list appears.
3.
Event History Viewer
Select one of these items:
• Play Video—Play the associated video for this event. The Search & Retrieve
Recorded Video screen appears as shown in “Search & Retrieve Recorded
Video” on page 245. Retrieve the video then play it on the Play Local Video
screen as shown in “Play Video Window” on page 247.
• Copy to Clipboard—Copy the contents of the selected event to the clipboard
for pasting to another source.
• Properties...—Show the properties of the selected event.
271
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
272
Event History Viewer
MAN007-0211
Who’s Inside
When an emergency occurs in an area or building, you need to know immediately who
is inside the area.
To enable this feature and define each area—passback zone —you need to oversee, use
the following technique:


Designate each passback zone you need.
Enable all defined passback zones for each controller overseeing those zones.
Once you have defined the required passback zones and enabled them for the
relevant controllers, you can immediately generate a report showing who is inside
using this technique.

You do not need to define passback zones in order to use this feature; it
only gives you a better sense of exactly where they are within the
security system. If passback zones are not defined, then credentials are
still displayed here. All credentials used at a defined reader are listed
here within Everyone and Zone 00 - Unknown, with information on the
reader that recorded the last credential use, the time it was recorded,
and other relevant information.
273
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
How To Use Who’s Inside
To use Who’s Inside:
1.
Open Who's Inside in one of these ways:
• With the Configuration folder highlighted in the System Tree pane, double click
the
option in the Components pane.
• From the menu bar, select Console > Who's Inside.
• From the icon bar, click the Who's Inside icon,
.
The Who's Inside screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Who's Inside Screen”
on page 275.
2.
Review the current situation as required.
Identify all those people still located inside the affected area. Determine how many
of the people Velocity shows as being inside the affected zone are actually at the
mustering station.
3.
Customize the screen view using the following icons:
Click this
icon:
To:
Toggle between hiding all zones that are currently empty and
showing all zones. When you hide empty zones, you simplify the
screen, making it easier to see and manage.
Refresh this screen. All controllers are queried as to their current
status and the most recent status of each zone is returned.
Display an HTML rendition of this information for printing or
E-mailing.
4.
Reassign those people who were inside the affected area and are now at the
mustering station.
For more on this, refer to “Who's Inside: Reassigning Credentials to Another Zone”
on page 278.
5.
Forgive user credentials as required.
If you need to temporarily halt polling on a busy screen, click the red button on the
Who’s Inside icon bar. You can restart polling by clicking the green button. For more
on this, refer to “Who's Inside: Forgiving Credentials” on page 277.
6.
Identify credential properties as required in this way:
a. Right click on one or more people in the right pane.
b. Select Display Credential.
The badge template for the specified credential appears. For more on this feature,
refer to “Display Credential Information” on page 890.
7.
When you're finished, exit the screen.
Alternative Method:
An alternative method is available using the Diagnostic window. This method has none
of the flexibility of the Who's Inside module, but can be useful as a diagnostic tool.
1.
2.
274
Open the Diagnostics window.
In the 'Controller' combo box, select the controller connected to the affected zone.
How To Use Who’s Inside
MAN007-0211
3.
Turn the Diagnostic Stream ON.
The message 'Diagnostic stream is ON' appears in the upper window.
4.
In the 'DIGI*TRAC Commands' field, type this command:
34*9*0*[capacity]
where [capacity] = the number of people allowed inside. Then press Enter.
5.
Click the ellipsis button to the right,
, to execute this command.
The message “Sending Host issued DigiTrac commands: 34*9*0*999” appears in
the upper window. The results of this command are displayed in the lower
window.
6.
Generate and print a report based on this information.
A report can also be generated in the Report Manager using the Person Information
folder’s Who is Inside Where report.
For more on generating reports, refer to “Creating a Report” on page 1003.
For more on the Diagnostic Window, refer to “Diagnostic Window,” starting on page
703.
Who's Inside Screen
The Who's Inside screen looks like this example:
It includes the following icons:
Click this icon to hide all zones in the Zone Tree pane that have no
people inside. This simplifies the screen.
Click this icon to refresh the screen. Current controller information is
uploaded to Velocity. This keeps this screen absolutely current -- a
necessity during emergencies.
How To Use Who’s Inside
275
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this icon to generate an HTML page showing the latest Who's
Inside information. This page is displayed on the default web browser
(e.g. MS Internet Explorer or Mozilla). The web page looks like this
example:
You can print (Ctrl + P) or E-mail this page (File > Send > Page by
E-mail...) as required.
This icon is both a status indicator and a button. As a status indicator,
green indicates that the Who's Inside feature is spooling and refreshing
normally; when the indicator turns red, it indicates that the feature is not
refreshing, in most cases because the icon was clicked to pause this
function.
Click the green button to stop polling by the Who's Inside engine. (The
red button appears.) This halts the screen refresh which enables the
operator to focus on investigations of specific lines and problems. This is
particular useful when the screen is very busy and lines keep jumping
around in the window as new information flows in and the screen is
refreshed. Once the operator has finished investigating one or more
incidents, he can click the red button to resume refresh and polling.
(The green button reappears.)
Zone
Tree
pane
This left pane displays a list of all 65 available passback zones (Zone 00
– Unknown and Zone 1 – Inside through Zone 63 – Inside), whether
these zones have been set up for the system or not. The Everyone zone
lists everyone currently recorded within the system. Click to highlight a
particular zone in this pane and all those persons who are currently
inside that zone appear in the right pane.
The columns in this pane include the zone name and the present
person count.
276
How To Use Who’s Inside
MAN007-0211
right
pane
This pane displays a list of all persons who are inside a selected zone.
The columns in this pane include:
Name – Name of the person assigned the credential.
ID – Number assigned to this credential.
Zone – The passback zone where this credential was last used. If no
passback zones are defined, then all credentials are shown as Zone 00
- Unknown.
Function – The IDF option assigned to this credential on the general
page of the credential properties.
Last Access Time – The date and time when this credential was last
used to request access at a defined reader.
Last Accessed Reader – The last reader, by door and reader number,
where this credential requested access.
Last Transaction Type – The result of the access attempt at the specified
reader: Granted or Denied.
This screen also supports the following right-click functions:
If you click on:
And select this option:
This occurs:
A zone in the left
pane
Forgive All Credentials in Zone
All credentials displayed in the right pane
are forgiven, even those that the system
did not grant access to. For more on this,
refer to Who's Inside - Forgiving
Credentials.
One or more
persons in the right
pane
Forgive Selected Credentials
All credentials associated with the
selected people are forgiven, even those
that the system did not grant access to.
For more on this, refer to Who's Inside Forgiving Credentials.
One or more
persons in the right
pane
Display Credential
The default display credential (as defined
by Preferences) is displayed for the
selected people.
Who's Inside: Forgiving Credentials
During an emergency, people leave affected areas any way they can. Most of the time,
all doors are automatically unlocked, enabling people to leave as quickly as possible. In
other facilities, such as high-security installations, doors cannot be unlocked and people
must exit as quickly and expeditiously as allowed. Frequently, a few rules are broken in
the process, including passback violations such as tailgating. Occasionally, Velocity may
invalidate those credentials used for such a purpose.
Under such circumstances, it is up to the qualified operator to forgive these credentials,
in effect 'resetting' or overriding them, so that users don't have to go through the
reissue process.
There are two ways to forgive credentials from within Who's Inside.
How To Use Who’s Inside
277
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To forgive selected credentials:
1.
In the Who's Inside left pane, click to select the affected zone.
The persons who were inside this zone when the alarm went off appear in the
right pane.
2.
3.
In the right pane, click one or more of the persons whose credentials you want to
forgive.
Right click on the highlighted persons.
A list of options pops up.
4.
Select Forgive Selected Credentials.
The selected persons' credentials are forgiven.
To forgive every credential inside the affected:
1.
In the Who's Inside left pane, right click the affected zone.
A list of options pops up.
2.
Select Forgive all credentials in Zone.
All persons' credentials inside this zone are forgiven.
Who's Inside: Reassigning Credentials to Another Zone
Using Who's Inside, a qualified operator can manually move a credentialed person
from an affected zone to a safe zone.
This is particularly useful for mustering a large group of people from one area to
another. During an emergency, most readers and doors are opened automatically,
allowing free movement from the affected area into a safe area. Once users exit a
problem area, they normally muster in an area where they can be identified and
accounted for by an operator. Since users normally do not have to use a credential to
exit an area during an emergency, Velocity will continue to show them as present in the
zone until they are manually removed from it. This process tells the program that the
user has successfully left the affected area.
To move a person to another zone:
1.
From the left Who's Inside pane, click to select the affected zone.
All persons inside this zone appear in the right pane.
2.
3.
4.
Identify all those persons at the mustering station who are identified in the right
pane as being inside the affected zone.
From the right pane, click to select those persons who have been identified at the
mustering station.
Drag those persons to the left pane and drop them into the zone identified as the
mustering station.
A message appears like this:
5.
Click Yes to confirm your move.
Velocity now identifies the new position for the persons identified.
278
How To Use Who’s Inside
MAN007-0211
Velocity Learning
Center
The Velocity Learning Center enables the operator to access these Velocity-specific
documents and tutorials:











Velocity Online Help
Release Notes
Defects Fixed in the Release
Known Issues
Tutorials
Velocity Quick Installation Guide (Adobe Acrobat required)
Velocity Administrator's Guide (Adobe Acrobat required)
Velocity Operator's Guide (Adobe Acrobat required)
DIGI*TRAC Reference Information
Uninstall Information
Install Adobe Acrobat Reader
As noted above, several of these documents cannot be run or read without Adobe
Acrobat Reader. (Velocity includes a copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader installer in the
option list.)
The topics in this section include:
Topic
See page:
How to Use the Learning Center
281
Opening the Learning Center
280
Learning Center Main Screen
280
Closing the Learning Center
281
279
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Opening the Learning Center
To open the Learning Center:
1.
Open Velocity.
The Velocity main screen appears.
2.
From the menu bar, select Help > Velocity Learning Center.
The Learning Center main screen appears.
Learning Center Main Screen
The Velocity Learning Center website uses the Microsoft Internet Explorer or the default
browser on your computer. Its screen and function should be familiar to you.
The Learning Center screen looks like this example:
This screen contains these features:
Navigation Bar
This bar depends on the browser you are using and contains the
necessary tools to navigate the screen.
Display Screen
This window displays any linked topic requested.
Most web pages, including the main Velocity web page, contain
linked text and graphics that enable you to click and jump to
additional referenced page. For example, when you click Release
Notes, the program displays the release notes page in the
Display Screen window.
For more on using this screen, refer to “How to Use the Learning
Center” on page 281.
280
Opening the Learning Center
MAN007-0211
How to Use the Learning Center
The Velocity Learning Center works like any other browser except that its focus is solely
the Velocity site.
Click on the linked text or graphic in the pane and the requested topic appears in the
pane.
Use your navigation tools at the top of the page as you would normally with your
browser.
Closing Learning Center
To close the Learning Center, do one of these:


Click the
button at the upper right corner of the Learning Center
Press Ctrl + F4
You are returned to the main Velocity screen.
How to Use the Learning Center
281
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
282
Closing Learning Center
MAN007-0211
Glossary
2-person rule
The 2-person rule feature can be used to require that two people enter
valid access codes to access a secure area. This is typically used in high
security areas or in areas where industrial safety is an issue.
AATL - Alarm Active Too Long
This applies to "non-door" locations that allow an alarm condition to
occur for a specified time period before an alarm is actually issued.
Doors report DOTL (door open too long) alarms rather than AATL
alarms. In this situation, an alarm is issued when the door is held open
longer than a specified time.
absentee rule mode
A User Management Command. Sets the maximum number of days
for non-use of an ID (1 – 255 Days). On expiration (no ID usage - for
the maximum number of days set) the User will be automatically
disabled or deleted.
ACB - Alarm Action Control Block
The ACBs, Alarm Action Control Blocks, are the means by which
DIGI*TRAC controllers control actions and events based on Alarm
conditions. ACBs are Factory programmed for specific actions; however,
they are all reprogrammable, if required. For a complete list of ACBs,
Table 4-2 starting on page 4page 184.
access
Refers to the ability to enter a secured area at a facility; also refers to
the ability to enter/use different applications/windows/dialog boxes
within Velocity.
access control
The monitoring or regulation of which persons are allowed to enter
secured (protected) areas in a facility.
access control system
(ACS) A security management system, consisting of a network of field
panels (hardware) whose behavior is controlled by software, which acts
to maintain the security of a facility via card access.
access delay time
An Access Delay Timer can be set to delay the actuation of a Relay for
special Access and Exit applications. The relay actuation can be delayed
for 1-8100 seconds after the use of a valid Access ID or an RQE Exit
request.
Glossary
283
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
access point
Point of entry or exit (e.g., door, gate) which can be controlled by the
Velocity system via the host computer and its peripheral devices.
access time
The amount of time a door will remain accessible (unlocked) after a
valid access is granted. Access Time should be set to allow enough
time for the badge holder to remove their card from a reader and open
the door.
action
Something which occurs in response to an input or trigger.
activate
Enable; make functional, as in enable codes activating certain
manufacturer features to a door attached to a panel.
activation state
Indicates the behavior of an output point when it is called. The
activation state is configured on the Output Points property sheet when
defining output points for doors.
address
A number by which the host recognizes a panel (e.g., for the purpose
of receiving messages from the panels).
administrator
One of the operators of the Velocity system. Also, as used in the
context of Velocity, a user or system administrator.
address
Each ScramblePad Reader requires an Address setting from 1-16. Each
MATCH Reader Interface Board also requires an Address setting from
1-16. The address alerts the controller from which ScramblePad/
MATCH Reader the access or control request originated.
alarm
The activation of an alarm device that causes a sound to occur at the
location of the alarm as well as a message to be sent to the alarm
monitor which will display information regarding the alarm, and cause
the alarm monitor terminal to beep. Alarms are caused by an open
switch; alarms may occur as a result of forced entry into an access
point or a door being held open beyond its shunt time, for example.
alarm cancel
Cancels all alarms within the specified control zone. This also enables
the DIGI*TRAC Annunciator.
284
Glossary
MAN007-0211
add-ins
Features or subprograms added to the basic Velocity program through
the use of the Add-In Manager.
alarm control
The practice of controlling the alarm monitoring and reporting
capabilities of a controller automatically by time and manually by
individual User ID.
alarm input
The physical connection of an alarm circuit to the interface panel
controller.
alarm levels
Settings that indicate what designated operators can acknowledge. If,
for example, an operator is able to acknowledge alarms with a level of
10 or less, then any alarm that is designated as being 11 or above
cannot be acknowledged by this operator.
alarm masking
The controller can mask any line module input to allow authorized use
of a monitored door or area. Masking prevents alarm conditions from
being reported but still allows line trouble alarms and tamper alarms to
be reported during the masking condition.
alarm monitor
The user interface in the Velocity system which monitors if alarms have
been activated, and allows them to be acted upon.
alarm queue
A list of alarms requiring the operator's attention. In Graphic Designer,
there is a pane called the Alarm Queue pane that displays a list of
alarms and their current status.
alarm point
A location in the facility where an alarm detector is located and
operating.
alarm relays
Dedicated Alarm Relays are for interfacing to local alarm annunciators
or to digital communicators for monitoring the controller's alarm status
from off-premise central alarm stations.
Glossary
285
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
alarm type
The type of alarm which may be reported in the Velocity System. All
alarms which occur in Velocity are assigned a type; alarm types are
differentiated by their priority, global shunt status, forced note, auto
clear and RTN separate alarm characteristics, and the message which is
received by the alarm monitor when alarms of this alarm type are
reported.
alarm shunting
Alarm shunting is different than alarm masking. Masking is performed
by the controller's software for its own line module inputs. Alarm
shunting is performed by the controller's relays to shunt the alarm
reporting of line module inputs of other controllers or alarm panels.
Shunting of alarms is an insecure and outmoded technique no longer
in use by state-of-the-art systems.
alarm stacking
If enabled in the Alarm Options preferences page, the same device can
issue more than one alarm. For example, if Expansion Input 3 on
Controller 2 triggers an alarm at 2:01 AM, it is displayed in the Alarm
Viewer. Subsequently, it can issue a second alarm at 2:03 without
overwriting the first, then issue a third without overwriting the first or
second one. All three alarms can appear together in the Alarm Viewer.
To discriminate amongst them, you can view either the Count or Time
columns.
alarm triggers control zone
Any Line Module Input can trigger a Control Zone. This is used for
point-by-point annunciation of Inputs or for special control applications
such as turning on security lighting when an alarm has been tripped.
alert
When a person is alerted, they are signalled by beeps or a tone
whenever they enter a secure area or use their code at a keypad
location to alert the person to their special alert condition.
AMT
Alarm Monitor Terminal. A type of terminal that is equipped to monitor
input points only.
anti-passback reader
A reader which will refuse access to cards which attempt access for a
second time within a specified period of time after a valid card read.
arm
Enable; to make a function of the Velocity system usable. See also
Unmask.
286
Glossary
MAN007-0211
arm points
Enable the Velocity system to report conditions that may occur at a
particular alarm point.
auto-relock
A monitored Door will automatically relock ¾ second after it is opened,
thereby reducing the chance of unauthorized follow-on entry by
tailgating after a valid access. To accommodate various types of electric
locks and door operators, auto-relock can be set to relock ¾ second
after the door closes or can be disabled.
For example, if the door time is set to 45 seconds to allow access by a
handicapped person, but someone accesses the door in ten seconds,
auto-relock can be used to automatically relock and rearm the door as
soon as the door is opened. Therefore, the door does not remain
unlocked and unarmed to allow an unauthorized person access. In a
“non-door” situation, there is no lock to relock so auto-relock will only
rearm the alarm. This can be used for doors not used for normal access
(such as a fire door). For example, someone (such as a maintenance
person or inspector) could be granted one-time access through a fire
door that is set up to trigger an alarm if opened; auto-relock can be
used to automatically rearm the alarm for the door as soon as the door
is closed.
backdrops
Drawings created using the Badge & Graphics Designer that are not
badges. These can include maps used within the Graphics module,
background designs (such as company logos, icons, and emblems)
used on other badges, or drawings required by Security for other
purposes like bulletins or notices.
badgeholders
In Velocity, these are known simply as people or persons. Anyone who
holds a card or code is an enrolled person.
balloon text
Text that appears when the cursor moves over an icon or text on the
screen. Usually a balloon or box appears with some explanatory text
inside it, describing the button or text just touched. In Velocity, this is
called a ToolTip.
blue prints
Architectural designs for a building or part of the building. Electronic
versions of these designs can be imported into Graphics Designer for
use as maps. See also Maps.
Glossary
287
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
bundled
used to describe a door that incorporates at least one associated relay,
input, and reader (normally an entry reader). In Velocity, bundled doors
are indicated by a checked box to the left of the item.
canvas
The window in Designer where a drawing is actually made.
cardholder
A person in the Velocity system who is assigned a credential specifying
the use of a card.
card event
An action that the panel has been programmed to execute after a valid
access (green light) has been registered at a door. This event is
triggered specifically by reading a card into a card reader.
CCM (Command & Control Module)
This daughterboard sits on the DIGI*TRAC controller board and
contains all the logical instructions the Controller Board uses to process
its information including the DIGI*TRAC Programming Language.
CCOTZ
A variant of COTZ. See COTZ.
child
The module cannot be dragged outside the main Velocity screen.
circuits, electrical
High voltage—a circuit involving a potential or not more than 600 volts
and having circuit characteristics in excess of those of a low-voltage
power-limited circuit.
Low-voltage—a circuit involving a potential of not more than 30 volts
alternating current (AC), 42.4 volts direct current (DC), or AC peak.
288
Glossary
MAN007-0211
Power-limited—a circuit whose output is limited as described in the
following tables. The first table lists power limitations for inherently
limited power sources; the second specifies power limitations for
sources not inherently limited. The power limitation is provided by the
design of the transformer, a fix impedance, a non-interchangeable fuse,
a nonadjustable manual reset circuit protective device, or a regulating
network.
Circuit voltage
Vmax AC-DC
(volts)
VA (volt-amps)
Current (amps)
Current limits
Imax (amps)
0 - 20
5.0 x Vmax
5.0
8.0
over 20 - 30
100
100 / Vmax
8.0
over 30 - 100
100
100 / Vmax
150 / Vmax
over 100 - 250 DC
only
0.030 x Vmax
0.030
0.030
Maximum nameplate ratings
where Vmax = maximum output voltage regardless of load with rated
input applied and Imax = maximum output after one minute of
operation under any non-capacitive load, including short circuits.
Circuit
voltage
Vmax AC-DC
(volts)
Maximum nameplate
ratings
Current
limits Imax
(amps)
Power
limits
(VA)max
(volt-amps)
Maximum
over-current
protection
(amps)
VA
(volt-amps)
Current
(amps)
0 - 20
5.0 x Vmax
5.0
1000/Vmax
250
5.0
over 20 - 100
100
100 / Vmax
1000/Vmax
250
100/Vmax
over 100 250 (DC
only)
0.030 x Vmax
0.030
1.0
NA
1.0
where Vmax = maximum output voltage regardless of load with rated
input applied, Imax = maximum output after one minute of operation
under any non-capacitive load, including short circuits and with
over-current protection, and (VA)max = maximum volt-amp output
regardless of load with over-current protection bypassed. If the power
source is a transformer, (VA)max is 350 or less when Vmax is 15 or less.
class
A group of users which has been defined to possess the same access
privileges (to the features of the system software and hardware) within
the system/facility.
Glossary
289
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
clearance code
A clearance code is a set of doors that have been grouped together for
access purposes. Clearance codes may be assigned to a company so
that all new badges assigned to the company will have access to all
doors in the clearance code. Modifications may be made to individual
user's clearance codes in the Badgeholder Maintenance application.
click
Refers to the act of point the mouse cursor at an object on the screen
and depressing the left mouse button. If you press the right mouse
button, this is called 'right clicking.'
code
Access codes are used to gain access to secure areas. Each user is
assigned a unique access code, and when an access code is entered,
the controller knows which user the access code belongs to and
whether the user is authorized to access the area. Access codes can be
entered manually on a ScramblePad, or they can be entered by
scanning a card in a MATCH reader.
There are 3 Code ID Formats: Keypad Code ID, Card Code ID, and Dual
Code ID (Keypad Code ID + Card Code ID). IDs can be programmed
to perform different functions and are controlled by time, day, location
and User Management Limits.
They can be issued when an event occurs to perform designated
activities (such as a turning on lights, unlocking doors, and masking
alarms), by selecting a button on the Control window (to lockdown a
door, for example), by scanning a card with a control code in a MATCH
reader, or by manually entering codes on a ScramblePad. Programming
codes can be used by trained personnel to program optional features
or to test and troubleshoot a controller from a keypad.
code holder
A person in the Velocity system who is assigned a credential specifying
a code.
code ID tamper alarms
The controller can detect and Report Code ID Tampers. A Code ID
Tamper results from an invalid Keypad Code ID being entered at a
ScramblePad Keypad or an invalid Card Code ID at a MATCH Card
Reader. An invalid Code ID is one that does not exist in the controller's
database, or one that is being used at the wrong door at the wrong
time. The controller reports Code ID Tampering on the system printer
and on the Tamper Relay after three invalid Code ID entries and may
be programmed to alarm on from one invalid Code ID to none.
290
Glossary
MAN007-0211
code tamper
The act of attempting to enter a code which is either invalid or
incorrect. Normally after three attempts, an alarm is issued.
command & control
Describes the ability for the owner, operator or authorized user to issue
Commands & Control the way in which the security system manages
access, alarms, relays and users. See also CCM.
computer system, redundant
Two computer systems maintained at a central station, either of which
can quickly be connected and operational for handling alarm signals in
the event that the other computer fails to operate. A fault-tolerant
computer system is considered to be redundant. See also fault-tolerant
computer system.
concatenate
To hash or combine a set of numbers or values to create a new
number or value.
configuration
The way in which the host computer and the peripheral equipment in a
facility are interconnected and programmed to operate as a system.
control delay timer
A Control Delay Timer can be set to delay the actuation of a control
relay for special control applications. The relay actuation can be delayed
for 1-8100 seconds after a valid Control ID entry, or after a relay has
been triggered by a Time Zone or by an Alarm or Relay triggering a
Control Zone.
control record
A Velocity file which contains system configuration information, which
in most cases will only be used by a system administrator or technician.
controller
Another term for panel. The term controller is generally applied to
Hirsch panels, such as M1N or M8 controller.
control zones
Control Zones are used to control Relays and Line Module Inputs by
Control IDs, and for special Control applications. A Control Zone
includes a Time Zone and a set of Relays or Line Module Inputs to be
controlled. There are two types of Control Zones: Standard Control
Zones and Master Control Zones.
• standard control zones: 0 - 191
Glossary
291
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Consists of a Time Zone and a combination of the Line Module Inputs
and Relays to be controlled. (CZ 0 = Never/No Inputs or Relays)
• master control zones: 192 - 255
Consists of a combination of Standard Control Zones each capable of
performing different access and control functions simultaneously.
COTZ
(Sometimes also called CCOTZ) Card/Code Only Time Zone. During a
specified time zone, the user can use either the card or code even at a
dual technology access point.
credentials
codes or cards assigned to people in Enrollment Manager. A person
within the system can possess more than one credential.
credential management
Known as User Management in the context of the DIGI*TRAC language,
this term encompasses a group of tasks that enable Velocity to control
how many people enter or exit a specified area. These tasks include
day, use, and absentee limits as well as 2-person rule, and occupancy
settings.
day limiting
Also called temporary days, this sets a maximum number of days an
authorized credential can access an assigned area before access
privileges are withdrawn. See also Temporary day.
deadman timer
A Deadman Timer Code is a special control code used to track the
safety and security of a user while a specific task is being performed.
The use of “deadman timers” is common in many industrial
applications such as railroads, refineries, and other dangerous or
hazardous locations.
default (condition/behavior)
A standard condition either imposed by the system (unless changed by
the user) and/or when no other condition exists.
default time zone
The time zone controlling a feature(s) of the system that will be in
effect unless another time zone has been imposed on the feature that
will override the default time zone.
device server
Device servers (also called terminal or serial servers) have been
developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals,
printers, and modems to the network and making those devices
available as networked devices. The Lantronix MSS is such a device.
292
Glossary
MAN007-0211
DESFire
Data Encryption Standard Fast, Innovative, Reliable and Secure. This is a
contactless smart card technology that employs Triple-DES (Data
Encryption Standard), an encryption scheme that provides a high level
of security.
DIGI*TRAC
The Hirsch line of controllers.
DIGI*TRAC Command Language
The language used to program and talk with Hirsch controllers. This is a
large and flexible language, using hundreds of commands that can
implement almost any procedure a security system might encounter.
disable
In the Velocity System, to make a function or feature that is normally
enabled or usable, unavailable for use.
disarm
See Mask.
disk backup devices
Disk backup devices are files on hard disks, or other disk storage media,
and are the same as regular operating system files. Referring to a disk
backup device is the same as referring to any other operating system
file. Disk backup devices can be defined on a server’s local disk or on a
remote disk on a shared network resource, and can be as large or as
small as needed. The maximum file size is equivalent to the free disk
space available on the disk. If the backup is to be performed over the
network to a disk on a remote computer, use the universal naming
convention name (UNC) in the form:
\\Servername\Sharename\Path\File
to specify the location of the file. As with writing files to the local hard
disk, the appropriate permissions needed to read or write to the file on
the remote disk must be granted to the user account used by SQL
Server. Because backing up data over a network can be subject to error,
verify the backup operation after completion.
dock
Anchoring a screen as a dependency within another window's
workspace. For example, if you dock the Event Viewer within the
Velocity main menu, you cannot drag the Event Viewer outside the
confines of the Velocity work space.
Glossary
293
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
domain
A group of computers and devices on a network that are administered
as a unit with common rules and procedures. Within the Internet,
domains are defined by the IP address. All devices sharing a common
part of the IP address are said to be in the same domain.
domain controller
A Windows server with a copy of the Active Directory database, allowing
it to support client/server authentication.
door alarms
The controller can monitor the doors it controls for two types of door
alarm conditions: Door Forced Open and Door-Open-Too-Long. Door
Forced Open is reported on the system printer and the General Alarm
Relay whenever a monitored door is opened without the entry of a
valid ID, or an RQE Input first. Door-Open-Too-Long is reported
whenever a monitored door that has first been opened by an
authorized User and is held or propped open beyond an owner
settable time period. The DOTL alarm is reported on the system printer
and on the General Alarm Relay.
door delay
A specified period of time before a door is actually unlocked. For
example, a bank vault might have a 10-minute door delay before it is
opened.
door delay timer
For special entrance or exit control applications, the door timer can be
delayed from starting after a granted code, RQE, or time zone actuation.
This is especially useful for implementing delayed egress control on
emergency exit doors where local building codes permit such controls
to be installed.
door groups
Two or more doors associated with a time zone. Door Groups answer
the questions When and Where. The When is the Time Zone and the
Where is the Door (Reader). This replaces the old Velocity access zone
concept. Several door groups can be defined as a Master Door Group.
door time
Relays have a Door Time setting for use by Access Users and RQE
devices. The Door Time can be set for 1-8100 seconds. It can be set to
0 (Zero) seconds for Toggle ON/OFF by consecutive uses of an Access
ID, or RQE device.
294
Glossary
MAN007-0211
DOTL - Door Open Too Long
Door-Open-Too-Long is reported whenever a monitored door has been
opened by an authorized User and is held or propped open beyond an
owner-assigned time period. The DOTL alarm is reported on the
system printer and on the General Alarm Relay.
download
To send data from a main computer system to a subsystem. In
Velocity, information from the database is downloaded from the host
computer to a panel when changes have been made to the system.
For example, when a large number of badges or cards have been
assigned, or a new door has been configured.
dragging
The act of using a mouse to move an object from one place on the
screen to another. Normally this is done by selecting the object with the
left mouse key then pulling the object to another location while
continuing to depress the mouse key. At the new location, release the
mouse key and the object is placed.
dropping
The act of pasting an object to a particular location usually by releasing
the left mouse button. It is associated with the concept of dragging and
dropping, wherein an object is selected, then moved (dragged), and
finally placed (dropped) at a new location.
dry contact
A switch or relay which provides no power to the circuit but redirects or
turns on/off power supplied from another source.
DTLM
To monitor door switches, or other alarm sensors, the controller
requires a DIGI*TRAC Line Module, DTLM, to be installed for each
monitored input. The Line Module provides line supervision of 2%
sensitivity for line security and line trouble reporting. The DTLM1
provides one input terminal for the alarm sensor. The DTLM2 has two
terminals, one is for the alarm sensor and one for the RQE Push-button
or sensor Input. The DTLM3 has three input terminals, one for an alarm
sensor, one for an RQE device, and one for a Tamper switch. The
MELM may be substituted.
dual code ID only
Description of User ID Format 3 (IDF 3). This ID Format is for Dual
Code ID (Card Code + Keypad Code) Users only and is entered on a
Dual Technology Reader (ScramblePad + MATCH Reader). This ID
takes up 1 User Record in the DIGI*TRAC User Record database. See
Command 311.
Glossary
295
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
dual technology reader
The use of two reader technologies at one location, usually a
ScramblePad and a MATCH reader. Either or both IDs may be used for
Access or Control Functions.
duress
A state in which a badgeholder is being forced to provide entry into a
secured area at the facility.
duress alarm
An alarm that is functional with keypad card readers; a duress alarm is
activated by a badgeholder by pressing the digit 9 in place of one of
the PIN digits when entering the normal PIN code into the card reader.
duress digit
If a qualified person is being forced to open a door against his/her will,
the person can indicate this coercion by entering an extra ‘duress’ digit.
By entering this digit, the controller permits access while issuing a silent
alarm, immediately alerting the Velocity operator to the situation.
enable
Activate; to make a feature or function of the system usable.
enable code
Numeric codes necessary for enabling (assign to activate) added
manufacturer features to the interface panel attached to a panel.
enter
Means to type characters using your computer keyboard. It also refers
to a specific key, the Enter key, on your keyboard that is most often
used to execute a specific procedure. Pressing the Enter key often
serves the same purpose as clicking the OK button with the mouse.
Event Report
An Event Report is the result of an action or event generated by the
controller automatically, or an event that occurred to the controller from
outside the controller. There are two types of System Events: Internal
Events and External Events.
• External Event Types
• AC OK
• Line Module Input Secure
• Box Tamper Secure
• Forgive All Users
• Keypad Tamper Secure
• Keypad On-line
296
Glossary
MAN007-0211
• Line Fault Cleared
• Multiple Keypads Alert
• Parallel Printer On-line
• Passback Violation
• Serial Printer On-line
• UPS Restored
• Internal Event Types
• End Of Time Zone Masking Of Input
• End Of Time Zone Disable Of Relay
• End Of Time Zone Actuation Of Relay
• End Of Time Zone
• Relay Clear At End Of Time Zone
• Relay State Change
• Start Of Time Zone
• Start Of Time Zone Masking Of Input
• Start Of Time Zone Actuation Of Relay
• Start Of Time Zone Disable Of Relay
executive override
The granting of privileges specifying that passback limitations don't
apply to this credential or person. No passback violation messages will
be issued and an access-grant always works.
executive privilege
Allows the card to obtain a valid access at any reader on the panel, and
also allows the card to obtain a valid access regardless of any other
privileges assigned to the card or any time zones assigned to any
readers on the panel.
fast poll
A condition by which panels are polled continuously, and there is no
pause between poll cycles.
fault-tolerant computer system
A computer system containing multiple power supplies, disk drives,
processors, and controllers, each of which back up and check on the
processes of the others. In the event of a component failure, the other
modules take over the function performed by the failed components
without affecting the operation of the computer. In addition to the
duplicating hardware, a fault-tolerant system includes the necessary
software to make the system operational.
Glossary
297
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
firmware revision
Refers to information related to the panel's own software.
float
Allow a window to go wherever you drag it whether it is inside or
outside the main Velocity window.
force note
A characteristic assigned to an alarm which requires operator's
comments to be added in response to the alarm before the alarm may
be acknowledged on the alarm monitor.
forgive
In the context of security access, the act of overlooking all current
passback and occupancy restrictions in the interests of a speedy exit
from an endangered area.
function groups
Function templates that are predefined through the Function Group
option that can be applied to credentials. Like credential templates or
operator groups, function groups provide administrators and qualified
operators with a less time-consuming way to apply many functions to a
credential.
global
In the context of Velocity, it refers to the program's ability to share
values amongst a large number of controllers if they are connected to
the same XBox. Globalizing a value indicates that the value will be
recognized by any controller to which the XBox and the Velocity host is
connected.
global shunt
A condition that may be programmed for a specified period of time
during which door open alarms are suppressed after valid card access
requests.
hardware
The physical equipment that make up the access control system at the
facility such as the panels and doors.
hardware components
In a facility using Velocity, the hardware components include loop,
panels, doors (interface panels), CCTV cameras and monitors, printers
and workstations.
holiday schedules
Groups of holidays. Velocity supports four schedules.
298
Glossary
MAN007-0211
holidays
Days during the year when special rules (access and control) apply.
These normally include Christmas, New Years, and July 4th. Velocity
groups holidays into Holiday Schedules.
hot keys
One or more keys that can be pressed to open or close a program or
feature. These shortcuts enable operators to work within Velocity more
efficiently and more quickly.
HTML
HyperText Markup Language.The language used to create World Wide
Web pages, with hyperlinks and markup for text formatting (different
heading styles, bold, italic, numbered lists, insertion of images, etc.).
icon
The Velocity term for the point (alarm or relay) or door placed on a
map. Each type is represented by a different icon. Icons on a map are
linked to the point or door represented.
ID
Hirsch controllers enable the use of a Personal ID to perform different
control Functions: access control, door control, elevator control, alarm
control, etc. When used, the ID identifies the user. There are 3 ID
Formats supported: Keypad Code ID, Card Code ID and Dual Code ID
(Card Code ID or biometric + Keypad Code ID.)
Hirsch controllers are code based. Codes can be entered by using a
ScramblePad. Codes can be entered by using a Card. Cards are
converted by the MATCH Reader Interface Board to a Card Code and a
combination of Card plus Keypad Code is converted to a Dual Code.
Each ID Format is stored in the controller's internal memory by a User
Record Number and checked for code conflicts (duplicates) during
programming.
IDK
Interoperability Development Kit.
In-X-It
Entry/exit; if In-X-It readers are set up in the facility the procedure refers
to this sequence of events - a card is read and gains access to an area
but does not exit through an “out” reader. When the same card is read
at another “in” reader, access is denied, and an alarm is set off.
input points
Electrical contacts that open or close to indicate a change of state in the
system. Input points are always designated as odd numbers when
being configured in the Door Maintenance application. Input points
may be of a 2-state (on/off) or 4-state (on/off/open/short) type.
Glossary
299
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
interface panel
The physical device for controlling access through an access point or
connecting an alarm input or connecting a digital output. There are
three types of interface panels that can be defined in the system; STI's
(Smart Terminal Interface), AMT's (Alarm Monitor Terminal, and OCT's
(Output Control Terminal).
interface panel controller
The physical device for controlling the behavior of the interface panels.
interoperable
A word describing systems or applications that can communicate or
work with each other.
IP address
The Internet Protocol address; a numeric address such as
123.231.32.2 that the domain name server translates into a domain
name.
keypad
Any device that possesses keys and can be used for entering a code.
The most common keypad used with Velocity is a ScramblePad;
however, other types of keypads can be used as long as they conform
to MATCH standards.
keypad code ID only
Description of User ID Format 1 (IDF 1). This ID is used for Keypad
Code ID only Users. This ID takes up 1 User Record in the DIGI*TRAC
User Record database.
keypad tamper
See physical tamper.
LED
Light emitting diode. LEDs are used on ScramblePads, MATCH readers,
SNIBs and Net*Adapts to indicate status and respond to entries.
line modules
Line modules are used to monitor door switches or other alarm
sensors. There are two types of line modules: DIGI*TRAC line module
(DTLM) and miniature embedded line module (MELM). Line modules
provide line supervision of 2% sensitivity for line security and line
trouble reporting. The DTLM1 and MELM1 provide one input terminal
for the alarm sensor. The DTLM2 and MELM2 have two terminals: one
for the alarm sensor and one for the RQE push-button or sensor input.
The DTLM3 and MELM3 have three input terminals: one for an alarm
sensor, one for an RQE device, and one for a tamper switch.
300
Glossary
MAN007-0211
line voltage
The voltage at any field-connected source of supply, nominally 50 – 60
Hz and 115, 208, or 230 volts (depending on the country standard).
local relay
The communication occurring between the doors (interface panels)
and the interface panel controller (panel).
loop
An optical fiber or wire network by which each panel is connected to
other panels and communicates with the host.
loop pause
The time to pause between poll cycles.
loop unload
Messages returned to the server when a panel is polled. This feature of
Velocity limits the amount of data sent by the loop at one time so as
not to slow down the system.
mask
Turns off reporting of all alarms from any of the line module inputs as
defined by the code's control zone. Also called Unarm.
master control zones
Master control zones (MCZs) are a compilation of standard control
zones. Using MCZs, a qualified operator can create sophisticated
control routines that can be triggered by either a single control code
entered at any authorized ScramblePad/MATCH reader or a line
module input or relay.
master time zones
Two or more standard time zones. These can be assigned to door
groups, function groups, credentials, or many other components within
the Velocity system.
MATCH
The term MATCH is an acronym for Multiple Access Technology Control
by Hirsch. It describes the ability to use multiple compatible
technologies such as card readers, biometrics, fingerprint/retinal
scanners, smart cards, etc. on a DIGI*TRAC controller, one at a time, or
all at the same time.
MATCH Reader Interface Board (MRIB)
This board is required to interface compatible card readers, by
themselves or in combination with ScramblePads, to a DIGI*TRAC
controller. Each MRIB supports 2 ScramblePads and 2 Readers
(ABA/ISO or Wiegand).
Glossary
301
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
MATCH2
A later version of MATCH with a second DIP switch bank to enable
configuration of newer reader protocols such as the Corporate 1000.
MELM
The MELM is a Miniature Embedded Line Module version of the DTLM.
Available in MELM1, MELM2 and MELM3, 1, 2 and 3 input versions
perform the same functions as the DTLM. See also DTLM.
modem
A MOdulator/DEModulator. A device that adapts a terminal or
computer to a telephone line. In Velocity, the use of a local modem
connected to the host PC and a remote modem connected to the XBox
which in turn is connected to the controller.
modem pools
Two or more modems defined as a single group.
modules
Programs that are part of the Velocity group. These include Event
Viewer, Alarm Viewer, Graphics Editor, Badge Designer, Customization
Manager, and the Administration window.
momentary single mask
Momentarily disables the reporting of a single alarm condition from any
of the line module inputs as defined by the card/code's control zone.
mouse buttons
Most mice that use Windows possess two buttons: a left button that
'clicks' or causes a particular procedure to occur and the right button
that 'right clicks' or provides additional options to appear on the screen.
multiple ID user
Describes a User who can Use different IDs (Keypad, Card, Dual) on
the same controller at different locations. See ID Formats 4, 5, 6, & 7.
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology. The government entity
responsible for overseeing Smart Card standards.
occupancy control
Occupancy Controls are used to keep track of the number of users
within a designated secure area or zone. Occupancy controls require
entry and exit readers on the controlled area.
output control group
A numbered group of output points that can be activated when the
status of an input point (assigned to the output group) changes.
302
Glossary
MAN007-0211
OCT
An Output Control Terminal. A type of interface panel which contains
relays to turn on or off field equipment via instructions received from
the main server or a user in the system.
occupancy
This allows control over how many users occupy the secure area at any
one time. The system counts the number entering and counts the
number exiting. A running total is kept and whenever the total exceeds
the maximum allowed or equals the minimum allowed, access is
denied and an occupancy violation alarm is recorded. In addition, the
occupancy count can be used to trigger a control zone for automatic
masking and unmasking of the protected area and to change
2-Person-Access-Rule to 1-Person Rule once the area is occupied by
the minimum required number of persons.
operators
Persons qualified to access and use Velocity. Operators are defined and
maintained through the Administration module.
output points
Contact points on the interface panel controller that can be opened or
closed by the system to turn something on or off. Output points are
numbered sequentially when being configured in the Door
Maintenance application.
override
A function used in relation to card readers and doors; a door which is
overridden is unlocked and the reader shows a valid access (green
light).
panel
A computer that controls up to sixteen interface panels. The panel
maintains a database of cards. All interface panel alarms and card
transactions are registered by the panel to which the interface panel is
attached. This information is sent via a loop to the main server. It is also
called a controller.
parameter
Information that controls the behavior of the system.
partial unmask
Unmasks all inputs in the specified control zone previously detected as
secure. All unsecured inputs are left unarmed.
Glossary
303
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
partitioning
The act of dividing processes or persons into groups that can be viewed
by only some operators. This is achieved in Velocity through Roles
which can include or exclude particular Velocity physical access devices
or logical applications, such as person groups or credential templates,
from the view of certain operators.
passback
This requires users to pass through an entry reader, and, later, through
an exit reader before their ID can be accepted at another designated
entry reader. Passback is used to reduce multiple entries on a single ID
by different persons (ID sharing by passing the card back to another
entrant) and tailgating (more than one person entering on the single
use of an ID). It also enables the system to track and report on who is
inside the secure area.
Hirsch has added an internal layer to passback controls that allows
access to an internal area only after a user has entered the secure area
through an entry keypad or reader.
permissions
Permissions are those privileges assigned to Operators. Permissions are
assigned through Roles.
persons
Card and code holders for this system. They are enrolled through the
Enrollment Manager and are assigned credentials. They are
distinguished from operators who have access to Velocity. See also:
Persons.
person groups
A feature within Enrollment Manager that allows the administrator to
group enrolled users for easier searching and more logical
arrangement.
person templates
Templates incorporating pre-defined values for Personal Information
panes. In this way, people can be enrolled more quickly.
physical tamper
When the keypad’s DIP switch for the Tamper Enable is set to ON, and
the outer keypad bezel is pried up or removed, the keypad goes into a
physical tamper mode. This will be evident when all four of the
keypad's LEDs flash on and off.
There are two distinct behaviors that can occur with the keypad in
physical tamper mode, depending on which model keypad you are
using:
304
Glossary
MAN007-0211
• DS37L - 4 LEDs flash on and off and the START button is disabled, so
pressing it does not generate the numbers display that allows code
entry. The keypad will beep once every few seconds.
• DS47L - 4 LEDs flash on and off. Pressing the START button will
generate numbers and allow a valid access code to be entered to
unlock the door. The keypad will beep once every few seconds.
physical zone (PZ)
Extensions of common passback and occupancy definitions that
enable programmers to create an arbitrary topology around a reader or
group of readers. A defined area inside of which passback and
occupancy definitions are observed. If users are detected inside a
prescribed PZ during an emergency or other predefined condition, they
are reported to the controller according to existing definitions.
pick
Clicking with the left mouse key on an object to highlight it within the
Badge Designer drawingboard. When picked, the object's handles
appear.
PIN
Personal Identification Number. Also called a code.
PIV
Personal Identification Verification: a standard devised by NIST to
regulate the development of smart cards for federal employees. This
includes all cards that conform to the DESFire FIPS201 standard.
PIV reader
A smart card reader developed to conform with U.S. government NIST
standard for smart card readers. This includes all SmartCard readers
that conform to the DESFire FIPS201 standard.
pocket PC
A mobile handheld computer that can communicate with the network
via wireless router or switcher.
polling
The sending of information from one device to another, which indicates
or determines the status of the device.
populate
To place objects or definitions within a particular space. In the context
of the Designer, it refers to placing devices on an existing map. Within a
dialog box, it refers to entering or selecting values for the required
fields.
Glossary
305
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
pre-arm status
Tests all available inputs within the specified control zone and reports
whether they are inactive (secure) or active (unsecured).If all inputs are
secure, the ScramblePad flashes its green LED once for an access grant
and twice for a control. If there are unsecured inputs detected, the
ScramblePad flashes its red LED and beeps—one beep for each active
input.
press
The act of pressing keys on your computer keyboard. For example, to
press Ctrl + F8 means to press both the Ctrl key and the F8 key on
your keyboard at the same time.
print server
Print servers (also called terminal and serial servers) have been
developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals,
printers, and modems to the network and making those devices
available as networked devices.
programming mode
The controller must be in Programming Mode in order to enter
Programming Commands at the keypad.
The ScramblePad will scramble its display to a normal pattern when in
Programming Mode for ease of Command entry. The right most Yellow
LED will be flashing while in Programming Mode. Both Yellow LEDs will
be flashing while in Programming Mode if the System Code is to the
Factory Default code of 123.
A ScramblePad and MATCH Reader combination is required to enroll
cards into a stand-alone DIGI*TRAC controller. Contact Hirsch for
information on pre-configured Enrollment Stations.
reader
A generic term applied to an access or alarm control device such as a
keypad, card reader, dual keypad + card reader combination, or
biometric reader.
re-enable
A return to normal operation; in reference to doors, reverses the effect
of a “Lock” or “Unlock” command, and returns the doors to normal
operation.
real time
Data processing concerning events occurring in current time.
redundant
Possessing a backup in case the original is corrupted.
306
Glossary
MAN007-0211
relay
An electrically operated device that is activated by a change in
conditions in an electrical circuit and that can actuate other devices in
the same or another electric circuit.
relay triggers control zone
Any Relay can trigger a Control Zone. This is for special control
applications such as shunting other alarm systems when doors are
unlocked or when relays are actuated.
response code
A code used to represent a commonly used response to an alarm
occurring in the facility in lieu of a written comment entered by the
operator for an alarm.
retrigger
To trigger again after an initial trigger is over. For example, a RQE can be
set to trigger a relay once unless it is set to retrigger the relay for as long
as it is actuated, such as when using a motion sensor for automatic
RQE activation.
return to normal
The act of an alarm point returning to its normal operation after being
in an alarm state. Return to Normal status advises the user that the
alarm condition no longer exists, but the horn may still be sounding
and the security in the area may be compromised.
return to normal alarm
An alarm that is reported to the alarm monitor indicating that the alarm
point has returned to its normal state.
rights
Rights are privileges assigned to Roles.
roles
The permissions and rights that can be assigned to a specific person or
operator. This takes the place of the old operator groups feature and
enables the administrator to partition access down to the feature and
event level.
RQE
Request to Enter button. Normally this button must be pressed in order
to gain access to or exit from a restricted area.
Glossary
307
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
RQE device
RQE means Request-To-Exit. An RQE device can be used to mask an
alarmed Door for authorized exit and to unlock magnetic locks for exit.
RQE devices can be push-button or motion sensors. An RQE
Push-button can be installed at a receptionist's desk to manually grant
access at an intercom controlled visitor's entry door. RQE Devices are
connected to a controller through a DTLM2, DTLM3, MELM2, or
MELM3 Line Module.
RQE Devices may also be used to locally mask an expansion line
module input, either for momentary passage through an alarmed door,
or using a key switch for masking interior motion sensors prior to area
occupancy.
RSS
RSS technology is used to create a list of headlines that can be
delivered to you. For example, when you report new alarms on a site
that supports RSS, those alarms can be added to a feed that a specified
operator or administrator subscribes to. RSS feeds enable a specified
operator to get update notifications delivered directly to their desktop
through a third-party news aggregator program.
scaling
Changing the size of an object without distorting the shape of the
object. Normally this is accomplished in Badge Designer by holding the
object at one of its corner handles and pulling.
SCRAMBLE*NET
The proprietary system incorporating Hirsch controllers, multiplexers,
and connected devices into a single network that can be overseen by a
computer running one of several Hirsch programs, such as S*NAP or
SAM. Velocity normally uses X*NET in conjunction with Hirsch products.
ScramblePad keypad
The unique and patented Hirsch ScramblePad Keypad. This type of
keypad is the most secure keypad available because it scrambles the
display - places the illuminated digits under different keys every time it
is used - to protect codes from being stolen by pattern recognition. It
also includes a built-in optical viewing restrictor to prevent anyone
except the authorized user from reading the display.
ScrambleProx
A ScramblePad with proximity reader built in.
screen
The frame within which a program or subprogram appears. Used
interchangeably with Window.
308
Glossary
MAN007-0211
secure
In the Velocity system, another word for arm or enable.
secured access area
An area in the facility protected by a door or gate that can only be
opened by use of a card or PIN number and card combination.
serial port
A port that uses a serial (sequential) protocol, such as RS-232 or
RS-485, to pass data between two or more devices. A USB port is a
type of serial port since it passes data sequentially.
serial server
Serial servers (also called terminal and print servers) have been
developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals,
printers, and modems to the network and making those devices
available as networked devices.
server
The host computer. The host computer is the computer that maintains
the Velocity database.
shunt
Disable; to make a function of Velocity unusable. Synonymous with
mask.
shunt points
Suppress the reporting of an alarm point. Alarm points may be shunted
by group as defined in the Alarm Group Maintenance application, by
accessing the appropriate Monitor Control Option. Synonymous with
masking points.
shunt time
The length of time a door open alarm is suppressed (shunted) after a
valid card access request. Shunt time should be set to allow the badge
holder to open the door or gate, pass through the doorway, and close
the door.
single zone access
This feature allows a controlled area to be occupied by only a single
Access Zone at a time. More than one Access Zone may be authorized
for the same secure area, however, when it is unoccupied, the first
Access Zone to enter will automatically exclude all other authorized
Access Zones until the area is again unoccupied.
Glossary
309
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
smart cards
Cards with integrated circuitry including microprocessor and memory.
This card is more of a solid-state PC than a dumb card, with capabilities
for storing far more information and performing calculations. Velocity
conforms to the FIPS201 federal standard.
S*NET
Abbreviation for SCRAMBLE*NET. Hirsch’s proprietary Hirsch Encrypted
Standard (HES) protocol SCRAMBLE*NET network. This network
protocol provides communication between the Hirsch controller and
any one of several devices including host PCs.
SNIB
S*NET Interface Board. This board must be installed in a controller
before it can communicate with a host PC.
SNIB2
The latest version of the SNIB2 board that allows high-speed TCP/IP
Ethernet connection between a controller and a networked Velocity
server. The SNIB2 can be assigned a unique IP address, enabling
remote controllers to be accessed from a networked server.
SQL
Structured Query Language. A database query and programming
language originally developed by IBM for mainframe computers. It is
widely used for accessing data, querying, updating, and managing
relational database systems. There is now an ANSI-standard SQL
definition for all computer systems.
standard control zones
Standard Control Zones (SCZ) link a time zone with any combination of
available relays for output control or inputs for alarm control. In this
way, a SCZ can be used to designate when and which input can be
masked, or when and what relay controlled. SCZs are only used by
Velocity when they are grouped together into Master Control Zones.
STI
Smart Terminal Interface. A terminal that is designed to interface with
one of a wide selection of card readers. In a system like Velocity, STI's
are set up to maintain a relay that is used to unlock the door adjacent
to the card reader. The STI interfaces to and receives its access control
instructions from the host computer, and has the ability to make access
control decisions based on valid card access requests, should
communications be lost with the host computer.
310
Glossary
MAN007-0211
soft alarm
An alarm that is encoded within the field panels (panels and doors).
Soft Alarms are assigned numbers that are recommended by the
manufacturer to be reported to the host to indicate the specified
condition. Examples of panel soft alarms include Tamper Alarm or
Battery Low Alarm; examples of door soft alarms include STI Tamper,
Forced Door, or Duress. Soft Alarms are configured in the Panel
Maintenance application on the property sheet for Soft Alarms.
software
The non-physical instructions that are loaded onto the host computer
that controls the access control system. Also, instructions that are
temporarily or permanently stored in the computer’s memory and used
to provide function and control of the computer’s components.
status
The current state or condition of a (Velocity) parameter.
system thresholds
The maximum number of components the system is set up to handle.
system administrator
The system administrator is a user who when logged into Velocity
maintains full privileges to all applications that are part of the access
control system. This person is familiar with both the hardware
components that make up the security system at the facility as well as
the software that controls it. The system administrator is also
responsible for assigning users their passwords and privileges for using
the Velocity system.
system code
The System Code must be entered on a ScramblePad to enter
Programming Mode. The System Code, a settable 3-8 digit Keypad
Code ID, protects the controller from unauthorized programming.
table
A SQL Server object in a database that stores data as a collection of
rows and columns.
tagging
When tagged, a tag alert report is printed on the system management
printer whenever the tagged user enters a secure area.
Glossary
311
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
tamper alarms
The Controller can detect and report several types of Tamper Alarms. It
will report a Box Tamper whenever the controller enclosure is opened.
It will report a Tamper whenever the ScramblePad or MATCH Reader
Bezel is removed and if Address Tamper reporting is set to on. It can
also report a Code Tamper if so programmed.
A Line Module Input Tamper will be reported from an Input equipped
with a DTLM3 or MELM3 Line Model with Tamper Switch installed.
Tampering with alarm monitoring circuits will trip line trouble alarms.
Tamper Alarms report on the System printer and trip the Alarm Relay.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) on top of the Internet Protocol
(IP).These protocols enable communication between different types of
computers and computer networks.The Internet Protocol is a protocol
which provides packet routing. TCP provides reliable communication
and multiplexing.
temporary day
This sets which days of the current week and the next week the user
will be authorized. Once the last day expires the user is disabled or
optionally deleted.
temporary-day mode
A User Management Command. Describes the ability to set which days
this week, next week, and the week after (up to 14 days) that a User
will be authorized to use their ID. Upon expiration, the User will be
disabled or optionally deleted automatically.
terminal server
Terminal servers (also called print and serial servers) have been
developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals,
printers, and modems to the network and making those devices
available as networked devices.
threat level
A numeric value assigned to each card reader. For access to be granted
at a card reader, the reader checks the threat level of the badgeholder’s
card against the reader's own threat level, then against the system's
threat level. If the card threat level is greater than or equal to (>=) both
the reader's and the system's threat level, access is granted. If the card
threat level is less than either, access is denied. Badge Holders with
executive privilege enabled are exempt from the threat level criteria.
Changing the system's threat level can act to either grant or deny
access to all the doors in the facility. The greater the number, the
greater the threat level.
312
Glossary
MAN007-0211
timed override
A period of time during which the door is unlocked, and the green
lamp on the card reader is on, indicating an access granted condition.
time log
Logs code entry for recording the arrival and departure times of time
log code holders.
time zone
A period of time during which a reader, card, alarm point or other
system feature is active or inactive. Time zones are used in Velocity to
define when certain features of the system are enabled or disabled.
• Standard Time Zones: 0 - 65
Consists of a start time, end time and set of days. (TZ 0 = Never; TZ 65
= Always)
• Master Time Zones: 66 - 129
Consists of up to eight Standard Time Zones
• Grand Master Time Zones: 130 - 149
Consists of up to eight Standard or Master Time Zones
tool tip text
Text that appears in a box or balloon when your cursor touchs the link.
This text usually explains the word or concept in a little more detail.
transaction
A transaction is an event that occurs as a result of a card access attempt
or a timed override being issued for an interface panel in the system.
Transactions are recorded in the real-time Transaction History log.
transaction processing method
A way to indicate how access decisions are made within the system. A
transaction processing method is defined for each panel that is
configured within the system. The three types available are local,
shared and central.
transaction report
A Transaction Report results from an ID being used. An RQE transaction
also generates a transaction report.
Glossary
313
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
trigger
A stored procedure that executes when data in a specified table is
modified. Triggers are often created to enforce referential integrity or
consistency among logically related data in different tables. For
example, an RQE input can be set to trigger a relay for use with
magnetic locks. The RQE will trigger the relay once unless it is set to
retrigger the relay for as long as it is activated, such as when using a
motion sensor for automatic RQE activation. See also retrigger.
trouble alarms
The controller can detect and report several types of Trouble Alarms.
These alarms include line module input circuit troubles such as opens,
shorts, excessive noise, and line out-of-spec. Trouble alarms also
include printer off line, printer out-of-paper, UPS fail and other internal
controller conditions. Trouble Alarms are reported on the printer and
the Trouble Relay.
T-SQL
The standard language for communicating between applications and
SQL Server. The Transact-SQL language is an enhancement to
Structured Query Language (SQL), the ANSI-standard relational
database language. It provides a comprehensive language for defining
tables; inserting, updating, or deleting information stored in tables; and
for controlling access to data in those tables. Extensions such as stored
procedures make Transact-SQL a full programming language.
turnstile
This type of gate allows one person at a time to pass its point. It is
frequently used for access control in crowded areas, such as airports or
department stores. There are three basic types of turnstiles: full-height,
half-height, and optical.
unbundled
Disassociate the parts of a door. The relays, inputs, and readers
associated with a door are unassigned so that they can be used for
other purposes. See also Bundled.
unload
This tem refers to the exchange of data during a poll cycle. Data is
unloaded from the panel during these poll cycles; the panel is
configured to unload a maximum number of messages at a time
during a poll cycle.
unmask
To arm or rearm a device. To enable and allow the input to talk with the
controller. The opposite of this to disarm or mask. See also Mask.
314
Glossary
MAN007-0211
upload
This term refers to sending data from a subsystem to a main computer
system. In Velocity, information is uploaded from a panel to the host,
for example, when the panel is brought down for repairs to be made.
use count
This sets a maximum number of uses for which an authorized user can
use their ID in order to enter a secure area or perform a control
function. Up to a maximum of 31 uses can be allowed. Once the
use-count expires the user is disabled or optionally deleted.
use-count mode
A User Management Command. Describes the ability to set the
number of times a user can use their ID (1-31 times) before it is
automatically disabled or optionally deleted.
user
A person who is allowed access to the Velocity system's database.
Users are identified in the Velocity system by use of a User ID, and
must obtain this User ID and a password from the system
administrator.
user-defined fields
Fields that may be custom defined by the user in the Company Code
Maintenance application to maintain information (specific to the
company's own needs) about badgeholders employed by the
company. User defined fields will be fields that do not already appear
on any of the screens in the Velocity system. After defining the field
names in the Company Code Maintenance application, the fields will
appear in the Badgeholder Maintenance application on the User
Defined Fields property sheet.
user function
Description of what Function DIGI*TRAC controller will perform upon a
valid transaction, e.g. Access, Unlock, Mask, etc.
user function and priority
Each User in the controller can perform one of the functions listed
below. The Functions are prioritized. Each higher priority Function can
override the lower priority Functions. For example, a Force Off Function
User can override an Unlock Function that is in effect. A Lock Open
Function User can override a Force Off Function that is in effect. Time
Zone controlled Functions fall in the middle of the priority list and
override lower priority User Functions, but can be overridden
themselves by higher priority User Functions.
• ACCESS USERS (Lowest Priority)
• Momentary Access
Glossary
315
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• Single Use Access
• Temporary Access
• Unlock
• Relock
• CONTROL USERS
• Trigger Relays
• Force Relays ON
• Force ON Release
• Force Relays OFF
• Force OFF Release
• TIME ZONE CONTROLS
• Time Zone Actuate
• Time Zone Disable
• Time Zone Clear
• TOP-PRIORITY CONTROL USERS (Highest Priority)
• Lock DOWN
• Lock DOWN Release
• Lock OPEN
• Lock OPEN Release
user ID format
The type of ID issued to a User determines the Format of the User
Record in the controller database. There are 7 available User ID
Formats which include Keypad Code ID Only, Card Code ID Only, Dual
Code ID (Card Code ID + Keypad Code ID) Only, as well as all in
combination.
user number
When added to a controller, each User is assigned a User Number as
well as issued a personal ID or set of Multiple IDs. If a User is issued
Multiple IDs, then more than one User Number will be associated with
that User. The User Number is used to change or delete a user as well
as to track and report transaction activity. Available User Numbers are
1-999 in a standard controller. User Expansion is available to 4,000 or
16,000.
316
Glossary
MAN007-0211
user record
The controller maintains in its internal Database a Record on every
User. The User Record is listed by User Number and contains all the
information needed on every User: The User Number, User Function,
ID Format, Access Zone or Control Zone, Duress Digit if assigned, and
current Passback Status. The Record also maintains the User's Alert and
Tag status and any Use-Count and Absentee-Rule Limits. For
Temporary-Day Users, the Record also contains their valid days.
Whenever Users are printed on the System printer, they are listed in
the User Record format listing most of the above information, but
selectively with or without Code IDs showing. See Command 330 to
be able to selectively print out User Records by printout style, each
showing different user setups and status information.
view
An alternate way of looking at SQL Server data from one or more tables
in the database. A view is a virtual SQL Server table, usually created as
a subset of columns from one or more tables.
virtual relays
Non-physical relays available for programming use for special
applications.
watch log
Logs code entry for tracking guards on their appointed rounds.
XBox
The SCRAMBLE*NET Gateway (XBox). It provides a high-speed
gateway from a Host PC to a network of DIGI*TRAC controllers. The
XBox can support up to 63 DIGI*TRAC Controllers through a single
XBox and is required to form an XNET network.
XML
Extensible Markup Language. A subset of SGML.
X*NET
An advanced network protocol incorporating Hirsch XBoxes, connected
controllers, and a host PC for a fast, server-controlled network
environment. This is the arrangement normally used by Velocity.
Glossary
317
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
318
Glossary
MAN007-0211
Index
Symbols
% 114
Numerics
2-person rule
definition 283
A
AATL
definition 283
Absentee limiting 172
for credentials 153
absentee rule mode 283
ACB
definition 283
access
definition 283
access control
definition 283
access control system
definition 283
access delay time
definition 283
Access functions 203–229
extended 207
in Designer 75
introduction 206
momentary door access 206
relock door 207
unlock doors 207
access point
definition 284
access time
definition 284
access users
priority level 315
Acknowledging alarms
in Designer 75, 76
Acknowledging an alarm 46
Acquire
files 133
photographs 128
TWAIN 131
video capture 129
action
definition 284
activate
definition 284
Activating credentials on specific dates 150
activation state
definition 284
Actuate 228
Add-ins
options 20
Add-ins options 20
address
definition 284
Administration main screen 6
administrator
definition 284
alarm
definition 284
alarm active too long
definition 283
Alarm cancel 221
alarm control
definition 285
Alarm functions
cancel entry delay 208
conditional unmask 209
introduction 208
mask/cancel entry delay 208
masking doors 210
masking inputs 211
momentary door masking 210
momentary input masking 210
partial unmask 209
pre-arm status 209
start exit timer 208
unmask/start exit timer 209
unmasking doors 211
unmasking inputs 211
alarm input
definition 285
alarm masking
definition 285
alarm monitor
definition 285
alarm points
definition 285
Alarm queue
acknowledging alarms in 77
clearing alarms in 77
entering comments about alarms in 78
alarm relays
definition 285
alarm shunting 286
alarm triggers control zone 286
alarm types
definition 286
Alarm viewer 39–52
acknowledged alarms pane 43
acknowledging an alarm 46
clearing alarms 47
clearing all alarms 47
closing 52
columns 42
copying to clipboard 48
displaying notes 49
get recorded DVR video 50
icon bar 42
introduction 39
main screen 41
placing on the Velocity desktop 45
319
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
playing DVR video 50
refresh alarms on 51
replay WAV file 50
starting 40
unacknowledged alarms pane 42
using 46
viewing instructions for alarms 51
viewing maps for alarms 51
Alarms
acknowledged pane 43
acknowledging in Designer 76
clearing 47
clearing all 47
clearing in Designer 76
copying to clipboard 48
entering comments about in Designer 78
get recorded DVR video 50
host DVR 252
host NVR 252
playing associated DVR video 50
refresh alarms on viewer 51
suspend switching 79
unacknowledged pane 42
viewing instructions for 51
viewing maps for 51
alarms
tamper 312
Alert
credentials 156, 171
overview 174
All video events 265
American Dynamics
see DVR
see NVR
AMT
definition 286
Annunciator
alarm cancel 221
anti-passback reader
definition 286
arm
definition 286
arm points
definition 287
Assign credential to person dialog box 101
Assign person to existing credential
dialog box 103
Assigning a credential template to a person 104
Assigning a new credential to a person 103
Assigning a person to an existing credential 103
Assigning existing credential to a person 101
Auto enroll 124
Auto pan 235
Auto-delete
overview 175
Auto-delete credentials 154
Auto-generate PIN codes 151
Auto-generate PINs 151
auto-relock
definition 287
B
Badge & Graphic Designer
320
assigning badge templates to credentials 148
Badge & graphics designer 67–82
Badge templates
assigning to credential 148
Badges
credential overview 146
double-sided printing 145
previewing 142
printing 144
printing an example from credential property sheet 148
specifying for credential 149
Batch enroll credentials 87
Batch enrollment
card credentials 123
Biometrics
credential property sheet 159
GUID 160
panel ID 160
site ID 160
Biometrics page 160
Browser 279–281
closing 281
main screen 280
opening 280
using 281
C
Cameras
addressing DVR 238
addressing DVR directly 239
addressing NVR 238
addressing NVR directly 239
drag & drop DVR views 258
drag & drop NVR views 258
DVR control 260
NVR control 260
PTZ controls using DVR 263
viewing DVR video 240
viewing NVR video 240
viewing video from attached DVR 240
viewing video from attached NVR 240
Cancel entry delay 208
Capturing filters 133
Capturing photos 128
Capturing signatures 126
Capturing TWAIN images 131
Capturing video images 129
Card codes
assigning PIN 151
length 151
overview 146
see also Credentials
specifying for credential 149
card event
definition 288
Card select number 160
Card types
indicating for credentials 149
Cards
overview 146
see also Credentials
Caret sign (^) 114
CCM
MAN007-0211
definition 288
CCTV viewer 231–236
auto pan 235
focus mode 235
functions 235
grab 233
introduction 231
iris mode 235
pan-tilt 235
presets 232
starting 232
tool bar 234
tours 233
view 233
zoom mode 235
Central stations
graphics icons 73
Check secure 209
circuits
electrical 288
class
definition 289
Clear code tamper 224
Clear state 229
clearance code
definition 290
Clearing alarms 47
in Designer 75, 76
Clearing all alarms 47
code
definition 290
code ID tamper alarms 290
Code tamper
clear 224
overriding 171
Column management 31
rearranging column headers 33
resizing columns and panes 34
sorting by column header 33
Command sets
executing in Designer 81
Components pane 14
Components windows 14
Conditional unmask 209
configuration
definition 291
Configuration folder 8
Console options 19
Control functions 203–229
force off doors 218
force off relays 218
force off release doors 219
force off release for relays 219
force on doors 217
force on relays 217
force on release door 217
force on release for relays 218
in Designer 76
introduction 212
lock down door 216
lock down relay 215
lock down release door 216
lock down release relay 216
lock open door 214
lock open relay 214
lock open release door 214
lock open release relay 215
triggering doors and relays 213
control record
definition 291
control users 316
control zone
definition 291
controller
definition 291
Controllers
viewing in Designer 71
Controlling placed objects in Designer 75
conventions
guide iii
Copying alarms to the clipboard 48
Count users other side 224
Count users this side 225
Credential pane 86
Credential templates
assigning to person 104
see also Credentials
Credentials
absentee limiting 172
absentee limits 153
access time extension 156
activating dates 150
alert 175
alerting 156, 171
apply global management 153
assign threat authority 153
assigning badge templates 148
assigning duress digits 151
assigning existing to persons 101
assigning function groups 152
assigning functions 152
assigning IDFs 149
assigning new to person 103
assigning person to existing 103
assigning PINs 151
assigning template to persons 104
assigning to persons 101
auto-delete 154
auto-generate PIN 151
auto-generate PINs 151
batch enroll cards 123
biometrics page 160
biometrics properties sheet 159
code length 151
day limiting 173
day limits 153
defining 147
delete 172
displaying from who’s inside 274
downloading 104
downloading multiple 105
dual technology 149
executive override 155, 156
executive passback override 173
expiration dates 151
finding card 110
321
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
fingerprints for 160
force download 171
forgive passback 174
forgive users 174
forgiving from Who’s Inside 277
function property sheet 152
general property sheet 148
indicating card type 149
limits property sheet 153
modifying existing for persons 118
options property sheet 156
overview 146
passback 156
printing a badge example from 148
properties 147
reassigning from Who’s Inside 278
response to expiration 151
special needs 156
tagging 156, 171, 175
tasks 169
two-person rule 155
unassign 172
unassigning 104
use limiting 173
use limits 153
using function groups 152
writing fingerprints to 162
Criteria list pane 196
Criteria page 193
CSN 160
Custom reports
saving 197
Customizing existing reports 190
D
Day limiting 173
for credentials 153
Deadman timer 222
deadman timer
definition 292
default
definition 292
default time zone
definition 292
Designer
entering comments about alarms 78
fire alarm icon behavior 73
suspend alarm switching 79
DIGI*TRAC configuration folder 10
disable
definition 293
Disable state 229
Disarming doors 210
door alarms
definition 294
Door open 65
Doors
extended access 207
force off 218
force off release 219
force on 217
force on release 217
lock down 216
322
lock down release 216
lock open 214
lock open release 214
masking 210
momentary access 206
momentary masking 210
relock 207
triggering 213
unlock 207
unmasking 211
viewing in Designer 72
doors
alarms 294
time 294
DOTL
definition 295
Double-sided badge printing 145
download
definition 295
Downloading credentials 104
Downloads
credentials 104
force credentials 171
forcing 105
multiple credentials 105
Drag & drop with live view DVR 258
Drag & drop with live view NVR 258
Drag & drop with Video Explorer 259
dry contact
definition 295
DTLM
definition 295
dual code ID only 295
Dual technology
specifying for credential 149
dual technology
definition 296
duress
definition 296
duress alarm
definition 296
Duress digits 165
assigning in credentials 151
defining 165
using with extension digits 165
DVR
address camera directly 239
addressing attached cameras 238
all video events 265
AVI files 252
camera control 260
customizing event logs 269
drag & drop camera views 258
event history viewer 268
event list functions 271
export recorded video 246
export video 252
generate and stop host alarms 252
generating history logs 268
get alarm list 253
get recorded video from Alarm Viewer 50
introduction 237
live video screen 241
MAN007-0211
manual time synchronization 258
operating 238–264
override or stop host alarms 253
patterns 262
play local video 246
play recorded video 246
play video from Alarm Viewer 50
play video window 247
PTZ camera controls 263
quick view 262
retrieve recorded video 245
right click options 255
search & retrieve recorded video 245
time synchronization 258
usage 237–271
video explorer 243
view camera video 240
view groups 259
viewing video from attached cameras 240
DVR and NVR
live view 240
DVRs
get motion events list 256
E
electrical circuits 288
E-mailing images from enrollment manager 137
Employees
see Persons and Enrollment Manager
enable
definition 296
enable code
definition 296
Enrolling a new person 97
Enrollment
auto 124
Enrollment manager 83–175
acquire 128
adding persons 97
additional images 94, 136
alert 171
apply credential management globally 153
assign credential to person dialog box 101
assign person to credential dialog box 103
assigning a credential template to a person 104
assigning a new credential to a person 103
assigning a person to an existing credential 103
assigning credential to person 101
assigning existing credential to a person 101
auto enroll 124
batch enroll card credentials 123
capturing signatures 126
closing 87
credential pane 86
credential properties 147
credentials 146
defining credentials 147
delete credentials 172
double-sided badges 145
downloading credentials 104
downloading multiple credentials 105
e-mailing images 137
enrolling new person 97
file capture 133
finding card credentials 110
finding persons 106
force download 105, 171
forcing downloads 105
forgive passback 171
IDFs 149
image preview 133
image preview dialog box 134
main screen 85
menu bar 87
modifying an existing person 117
modifying existing credentials for a person 118
opening 84
override code tamper 171
overview 83
personal information form 95
personal information pane 90
photo capture 128
previewing badges 142
print preview screen 142
printing badges 144
saving an image to another source 138
see also Credentials
signature capture 126
signature capture dialog box 126
start Badge Designer from 171
TWAIN capture 131
unassign credentials 172
unassigning credentials 104
video capture 129
wildcard symbols 114
Event history viewer for DVR 268
Event history viewer for NVR 268
event report
definition 296
Events
customizing DVR logs 269
customizing NVR logs 269
DVR history viewer 268
DVR list functions 271
NVR history viewer 268
NVR list functions 271
Executing command sets 81
Executive override
credential passback 156
for credentials 155
Executive passback override 173
Executive password 220
executive privilege
definition 297
Exiting Velocity 4
Expanding and contracting the system tree 8
Expiration dates 151
response to 151
Export DVR video 252
Export local video 246
Export NVR video 252
Extended access 207
Extension digits
using with duress digits 165
external event types 296
323
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
F
fast poll
definition 297
fault-tolerant system 297
File capture 133
File options 18
lock workstations 29
switching operators 28
Finding card credentials 110
Finding persons 106
Fingerprints
enrolling for credentials 160
writing to a credential 162
Fire alarms
icons in graphics 73
firmware revision
definition 298
FlashBus TWAIN32 setup dialog box 132
FlashBus video
capturing photos using 128
Focus mode 235
Force download 105
force note
definition 298
Force off door 218
Force off relays 218
Force off release for doors 219
Force off release relays 219
Force on doors 217
Force on relays 217
Force on release doors 217
Force on release for relays 218
Forgive all users 226
Forgive passback 171, 174
Forgive users 174
Forgiving credentials from Who’s Inside 277
Freeze pane 201
Function groups
assigning to credentials 152
duress digits 165
duress digits with extension digits 165
using with credentials 152
Functions 203–229
assigning to credentials 152
priority levels 227
G
Generating DVR history logs 268
Generating NVR history logs 268
Generating reports 183
Get motion events list 256
Get recorded DVR video 50
Getting started 3
Global credential management 153
global shunt
definition 298
Global unique identifier 160
glossary 283–317
Grab 233
Graphics
fire alarms 73
Graphics designer 67–82
access functions 75
324
acknowledging alarms 75, 76
clearing alarms 75, 76
command sets 81
control functions 76
controllers 71
controlling placed objects 75
doors 72
inputs 72
monitoring placed objects 71
readers 72
relays 73
special icons 71
viewing linked maps 70
XBoxes 73
GUID 160
H
hardware
definition 298
help
technical support iii
Help options 21
Help topics 21
Hirsch
fax number iii
technical support iii
web page iii
Holidays
manual tables 226
manual unholiday tables 227
Host alarms
generate and stop DVR 252
generate and stop NVR 252
Hot Keys
using to access programs 19
I
Icon tool bar 15
Icons
system 24
ID
definition 299
ID formats 164
IDFs 164
assigning to credential 149
Image preview 133
Images
additional 136
capturing 128
e-mailing from Enrollment Manager 137
file capture 133
preview dialog box 134
saving from enrollment manager to another source 138
TWAIN capture 131
updating 136
video capture 129
Indexed commands 223
clear code tamper 224
count users other side 224
count users this side 225
forgive all users 226
manual holiday tables 226
manual unholiday tables 227
MAN007-0211
Input functions
masking doors 210
input points
definition 299
Inputs
masking 211
momentary masking 210
unmasking 211
viewing in Designer 72
Integral DVRs
get motion events list 256
Integral NVRs
get motion events list 256
interface panel
definition 300
interface panel controller
definition 300
Interfaces configuration folder 13
internal event types 297
In-X-It
definition 299
Iris mode 235
K
Keyboard functions 26
keypad code ID only 300
keypad tamper 304
L
LEDs
definition 300
line modules
definition 300
Live view 240
local relay
definition 301
Local video
play & export 246
Lock down door 216
Lock down relay 215
Lock down release door 216
Lock down release relay 216
Lock open door 214
Lock open relay 214
Lock open release door 214
Lock open release relay 215
Locking workstations 29
Logs
time 221
watch 221
loop
definition 301
loop pause
definition 301
loop unload
definition 301
M
main menu
system tree pane 6
Main menu description 5
Main screen
status line 23
Managing columns 31
Managing desktop space 30
Managing Velocity windows 30
Manual holiday tables 226
Manual time synchronization for DVR systems 258
Manual time synchronization for NVR systems 258
Manual unholiday tables 227
Maps
viewing alarms on 51
viewing linked 70
Mask/cancel entry delay 208
masking
definition 285
Masking doors 210
Masking inputs 211
master control zone
definition 291
MATCH
definition 301
MELM
definition 302
Menu tool bar 17
modem pools
definition 302
modems
definition 302
Momentary door access 206
Momentary door masking 210
Momentary input mask 210
Monitoring placed objects in Designer 71
Mouse functions 26
MRIB
definition 301
multiple ID user 302
N
Navigating between modules 26
Navigating Velocity 26
Noisy 65
Notes
displaying in Alarm viewer 49
NTSC 130, 133
NVR 259
address camera directly 239
addressing attached cameras 238
all video events 265
AVI files 252
camera control 260
customizing event logs 269
drag & drop camera views 258
event history viewer 268
event list functions 271
export recorded video 246
export video 252
generate and stop host alarms 252
generating history logs 268
get alarm list 253
introduction 237
live video screen 241
manual time synchronization 258
operating 238–264
override or stop host alarms 253
patterns 262
325
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
play local video 246
play recorded video 246
play video window 247
PTZ camera controls 263
quick view 262
retrieve recorded video 245
right click options 255
search & retrieve recorded video 245
time synchronization 258
usage 237–271
video explorer 243
view camera video 240
viewing video from attached cameras 240
NVRs
get motion events list 256
O
occupancy control
definition 302
OCT
definition 303
Off normal points 24
One-field ABA 149
Open circuit 65
Operator password 220
Operators
switching 28
Out of spec 65
output control group
definition 302
output points
definition 303
override
definition 303
Override code tamper 171
Override executive passback 173
P
PAL 133
Pan Tilt Zoom
see PTZ
Panel ID 160
panels
definition 303
Pan-tilt 235
parameter
definition 303
Partial unmask 209
Passback
assigning to credentials 156
executive override 173
forgive 174
forgiving 171
Pass-thru 149
Password functions
executive password 220
introduction 220
operator password 220
priority levels 220
supervisor password 220
system password 220
passwords
priority levels 220
326
Patterns 262
percentage sign (%) 114
Personal information form 95
Personal information pane 90
additional images 94, 136
general property sheet 91
Persons
adding 97
enrolling new 97
finding 106
forgive access 174
modifying 117
modifying existing credentials 118
Photographs
capturing 128
file capture 133
image preview 133
TWAIN capture 131
video capture 129
physical tamper mode 304
physical zones
definition 305
PINs
assigning to credential 151
auto-generate 151
Play DVR video 50
Play local video 246
polling
definition 305
Pre-arm status 209
Preferences option
accessing 19
Preliminaries 3
Presets 232
Preview screen
features 200
Previewing badges 142
Print preview
reports 198
Print preview screen 142
Printing
badges 144
double-sided badges 145
preview screen for enrollment manager 142
Printing reports 202
priority
definition 315
Priority levels for functions 227
programming mode
definition 306
PTZ
using DVR 263
using NVR 263
Q
Quick views 262
R
Readers
viewing in Designer 72
readers
definition 306
real time
MAN007-0211
definition 306
Rearranging column headers 33
records
user 317
redundant
definition 306
redundant computer system
definition 291
re-enable
definition 306
Refresh alarms on alarm viewer 51
relay
definition 307
relay triggers control zone 307
Relays
actuate 228
clear state 229
disable state 228
force off 218
force off release 219
force on 217
force on release 218
lock down 215
lock down release 216
lock open 214
lock open release 215
states 228
triggering 213
viewing in Designer 73
relays
virtual 317
Release force off for doors 219
Release force off for relays 219
Release force on for doors 217
Release force on for relays 218
Release lock down door 216
Release lock down for relay 216
Release lock open for door 214
Release lock open for relay 215
Relock
door 207
Report manager 177–202
add new reports 183
criteria page 193
customizing existing reports 190
flowchart 178
freeze pane 201
generating a report 183
icon tool bar 182
introduction 177
list of existing reports 184
main screen 180
opening 179
preview screen 198
preview screen features 200
print reports 183
printing 202
saving custom reports 197
selected criteria list pane 196
sorting page 195
Reports
list of existing 184
see Report manager
reports
event types 296
transaction 313
Resizing columns and panes 34
response codes
definition 307
Retrieve recorded DVR video 245
Retrieve recorded NVR video 245
retrigger
definition 307
return to normal
definition 307
RQE
definition 308
S
Saving a photo from enrollment manager to another source
138
SC readers field 160
ScramblePads
definition 308
secured access area
definition 309
server
definition 309
Service Password functions
service password 220
Set threat levels 224
Short 65
Short-cut keys 22
Show last access for unassigned credentials 88
Show UDF summary 88
shunt
definition 309
shunt points
definition 309
Signal type 130
Signatures
capture dialog box 126
capturing 126
single zone access 309
Site ID 160
smart terminal interface
definition 310
soft alarm
definition 311
Sorting by column header 33
Sorting page 195
Special functions
alarm cancel 221
deadman timer 222
indexed commands 223
introduction 221
set threat level 224
time log 221
watch log 221
Special needs
access time extension for credentials 156
Square brackets 114
standard control zone
definition 291
Start exit timer 208
Starting Velocity 3
327
Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Status groups
column headers 64
creating 62
properties 63
Status line 23
Status messages 65
active 65
door open 65
inactive 65
masked 65
noisy 65
open circuit 65
out of spec 65
secure 65
short 65
Status viewer 53–65
columns and rows 55
how to use 60
main screen 54
opening 53
right-click options 60
status groups 62
status messages 65
tasks 60
Std 26-Bit Wiegand 149
Std 27-Bit Wiegand 149
Std 28-Bit Wiegand 149
Std 29-Bit Wiegand 149
STI
definition 310
Supervisor password 220
support
technical iii
Suspend alarm switching 79
Switching operators 28
Symbols
wildcards 114
system administrator
definition 311
system code
definition 311
System icons 24
System password 220
system thresholds
definition 311
System tree pane 6
expanding and contracting 8
System tree window 6
T
Tagging
credentials 171
for credentials 156
overview 175
tamper alarms
definition 312
technical support iii
Temporary days
see Day limiting
temporary-day mode 312
Test if secure 209
Threat authority
assign to credentials 153
328
threat level
definition 312
Threat levels
set 224
Time log 221
Time synchronization 258
time zone
definition 313
timed override
definition 313
Timers
deadman 222
start exit 208
unmask/start exit 209
Tool Bars
console options 19
Tours 233
transaction
definition 313
transaction processing method
definition 313
transaction report 313
trigger
definition 307, 314
Triggering doors and relays 213
trouble alarms
definition 314
turnstiles
definition 314
TWAIN capture 131
FlashBus setup 132
setup dialog box 131
Two-person rule
for credentials 155
U
UL requirements iv
Unassign credentials 172
Unassigning credentials 104
Underscore sign (_) 114
unload
definition 314
Unlock
door 207
Unlocking workstations 29
Unmask
conditional 209
partial 209
Unmask/start exit timer 209
Unmasking doors 211
Unmasking inputs 211
Update image 136
upload
definition 315
Use count
overview 173
Use limiting 173
for credentials 153
use-count
definition 315
user
definition 315
user numbers
MAN007-0211
definition 316
user-defined fields
definition 315
Users
count other side 224
count this side 225
forgive 174
forgive all 226
users
multiple ID 302
Using fields and tools 26
Using the mouse and keyboard 26
Using the mouse and keypad 26
Using Velocity fields and tools 27
Using Velocity programs 35
V
Velocity
administration main screen 6
browser 279
enrollment manager 83–175
exiting 4
fields and tools 27
hot keys 22
main menu 5
managing desktop space 30
managing windows 30
menu tool bar 17
mouse and keyboard 26
navigating 26
placing alarm viewer on 45
status viewer 53–65
using programs 35
Velocity configuration folder 8
Velocity icon tool bar 15
Video
export DVR 252
export NVR 252
retrieve recorded 245
Video capture 129
dialog box 130
signal 130
Video dialog box 130
Video explorer 243
drag and drop with 259
View DVR camera video 240
View groups 259
View NVR camera video 240
Viewing instructions for an alarm 51
Viewing maps for alarms 51
virtual relays
definition 317
main screen 275
overview 273
pause button 276
persons inside pane 277
reassigning credentials 278
refresh screen 275
resume button 276
right-click functions 277
start polling button 276
status indicator 276
stop polling button 276
zone tree pane 276
Wildcard symbols 114
% 114
square brackets 114
underscore 114
Workstations
locking 29
unlocking 29
Writing fingerprints to a credential 162
X
X*NET
definition 317
XBox
definition 317
XBoxes
viewing in Designer 73
Z
Zoom mode 235
W
Watch log 221
WAV file
replaying 50
Who’s Inside
alternative method for using 274
displaying credentials 274
forgiving credentials 277
hide zones 275
how to use 274
329